AutoWatch

Instant Troubleshoot

Instant Troubleshoot provides technicians with immediate solutions to common repair issues through an intuitive chat interface. By utilizing AI-driven insights, technicians can quickly resolve problems on the spot, reducing downtime and enhancing repair efficiency.

Requirements

AI-Powered Diagnostic Suggestions

"As a technician, I want to receive AI-generated diagnostic suggestions so that I can quickly identify and fix common repair issues, reducing downtime and improving efficiency."

Description

This requirement focuses on integrating AI algorithms within the Instant Troubleshoot feature to provide technicians with real-time diagnostic suggestions based on frequently encountered repair issues. By analyzing historical data and current problems reported in the chat, the AI can suggest possible fixes and parts needed, enhancing the technician's ability to resolve issues efficiently. This will reduce the time spent diagnosing problems and improve overall repair shop productivity, leading to higher customer satisfaction. The integration with existing AutoWatch systems will allow for seamless updates and access to relevant diagnostic data.

Acceptance Criteria

Technician uses Instant Troubleshoot for a vehicle that has intermittent electrical issues.

Given the technician has accessed the Instant Troubleshoot feature, when they input details of the electrical issue, then the AI should provide at least three diagnostic suggestions with relevant parts listed.

A technician encounters a common engine issue during a repair job.

Given the technician is engaged in a chat with Instant Troubleshoot, when they describe the engine issue, then the system should respond within 10 seconds with accurate diagnostic suggestions and potential fixes based on historical data.

A technician needs to resolve a brake system failure quickly on a customer’s vehicle.

Given the technician uses the Instant Troubleshoot feature, when they input the symptoms of brake failure, then the AI should provide step-by-step troubleshooting guidelines and required parts, enabling the technician to make informed decisions.

The shop owner wants to analyze the effectiveness of the AI responses in the troubleshooting feature.

Given the shop owner accesses the reporting dashboard, when they review the effectiveness statistics, then the dashboard should display metrics indicating at least 80% of AI suggestions led to successful resolutions as reported by technicians.

A technician is working under time constraints and needs immediate help with a complex repair issue.

Given the technician utilizes the Instant Troubleshoot feature, when they outline a complex issue, then the AI must identify the problem and suggest immediate actions within 5 seconds to aid the technician's efficiency.

A service manager wants to review how often technicians rely on the AI suggestions.

Given the service manager accesses the historical usage logs, when they analyze the log data, then the report should show a minimum of 50% usage rate of the Instant Troubleshoot feature during repair jobs.

User Training Module

"As a training manager, I want a user training module so that technicians can become proficient in using the Instant Troubleshoot feature and enhance their problem-solving capabilities."

Description

A requirement to develop a user training module within the AutoWatch platform, specifically aimed at educating technicians on how to effectively use the Instant Troubleshoot feature. This module will include interactive tutorials, demonstration videos, and best practice guides. By ensuring that users are proficient with the tool, we can maximize its efficiency and effectiveness in real-world repair situations, leading to decreased resolution times and enhanced user satisfaction. This functionality will be particularly beneficial for onboarding new staff and improving overall shop operations.

Acceptance Criteria

User Training Access to Instant Troubleshoot

Given a technician has logged into the AutoWatch platform, when they access the User Training Module, then they should be able to select the Instant Troubleshoot feature and view the available interactive tutorials, demonstration videos, and best practice guides.

Completion of Training Modules

Given a technician is viewing the training content for the Instant Troubleshoot feature, when they complete all interactive tutorials and quizzes, then the system should automatically mark their training as complete and update their progress in the user profile.

User Feedback Collection Post-Training

Given a technician has completed the User Training Module, when they finish the training, then the system should prompt them to provide feedback on the effectiveness of the training materials and gather quantitative satisfaction ratings.

Interactive Tutorial Functionality

Given a technician is engaging with an interactive tutorial, when they follow the tutorial prompts, then each prompt should function correctly and provide relevant information without errors throughout the lesson.

Video Playback Performance

Given a technician is watching a demonstration video within the User Training Module, when they play the video, then it should load within 3 seconds, play smoothly, and include closed captioning options.

Best Practices Accessibility

Given a technician is using the User Training Module, when they search for best practices related to the Instant Troubleshoot feature, then they should receive relevant resources and documentation in under 2 seconds.

Real-Time Collaborative Troubleshooting

"As a technician, I want to collaborate with my peers in real-time while troubleshooting so that I can leverage collective knowledge to solve more complex repair issues efficiently."

Description

This requirement entails implementing a real-time collaborative troubleshooting feature that allows technicians to connect and share insights or solutions during a repair process. By enabling instant communication through text or voice within the Instant Troubleshoot interface, technicians can collaborate on complex issues and learn from one another. This will foster a supportive environment, reduce error rates, and promote a community of knowledge-sharing within the shop, enhancing overall repair efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

Technicians engage in a collaborative troubleshooting session via chat when faced with a complex repair issue on a vehicle, using the Instant Troubleshoot interface to share insights and solutions in real time.

Given that multiple technicians are connected in a troubleshooting session, when a technician poses a question regarding a specific issue, then all participating technicians should receive the notification and be able to provide input instantaneously.

A technician uses the voice communication feature within the Instant Troubleshoot interface to discuss a repair problem with a colleague while working on the vehicle.

Given that voice communication is established, when a technician speaks and requests assistance, then the colleague should hear the message without any perceptible delay and respond back via voice or text instantaneously.

After resolving a technical issue collaboratively, technicians document their findings in a shared knowledge base accessible within the Instant Troubleshoot feature.

Given that a solution is reached after collaboration, when a technician selects the option to add the solution to the knowledge base, then the solution should be saved efficiently without data loss and be retrievable by other technicians in future sessions.

Technicians engage in a troubleshooting session using the Instant Troubleshoot chat and need to utilize shared images of vehicle parts for clarity in communication.

Given that technicians are discussing a repair issue, when a technician uploads an image of a part into the chat, then all participants in the chat should be able to view the image without lag and reference it in their responses.

A technician seeks real-time assistance from a colleague who is off-site, using the Instant Troubleshoot interface to connect and communicate effectively during a repair job.

Given that a technician is off-site, when a request for real-time assistance is made through the Instant Troubleshoot feature, then the off-site technician should receive the request and be able to join the session without disruption, utilizing the available communication tools.

During a repair session, technicians want to review past troubleshooting sessions for similar issues encountered before to gain insights.

Given that a past troubleshooting session has been documented, when a technician searches through the history within the Instant Troubleshoot feature, then the relevant session should be retrievable with all shared insights and solutions clearly displayed.

Technicians are prompted to rate the effectiveness of the collaborative troubleshooting session immediately after it concludes to provide feedback for future improvements.

Given that a collaborative troubleshooting session has ended, when the technicians rate the session using the embedded feedback tool, then the system should collect and store their ratings accurately without error for future analysis.

Feedback and Improvement Loop

"As a technician, I want to provide feedback on AI suggestions so that I can contribute to the continuous improvement of troubleshooting processes and enhance my repair efficiency."

Description

This requirement focuses on creating a feedback mechanism integrated within the Instant Troubleshoot feature that allows technicians to provide insights on the effectiveness of AI suggestions. This will enable continuous improvement of the AI’s capabilities based on user experiences and success rates. By collecting data on which suggestions led to successful repairs and which did not, AutoWatch can enhance the accuracy of future diagnostic recommendations, ultimately leading to improved service quality.

Acceptance Criteria

Technicians providing feedback on AI suggestions after using the Instant Troubleshoot feature during a repair session.

Given a technician has used the AI suggestion to resolve a repair issue, when the feedback option is accessed, then the technician can submit feedback rating the suggestion's effectiveness on a scale of 1 to 5.

Analyzing the collected feedback to determine the most effective AI suggestions over a specified period.

Given that feedback has been collected over the last month, when the analysis is performed, then at least 80% of suggestions must receive an effectiveness rating of 4 or higher to be considered successful.

Notifying technicians of updates to AI suggestions based on feedback received in their past repair experiences.

Given that feedback has been successfully analyzed and improvements made, when a technician opens the Instant Troubleshoot feature, then they should receive notifications of updated or new suggestions relevant to their previous feedback.

Evaluating the effectiveness of the feedback loop on diagnostic accuracy.

Given that feedback has been implemented, when comparing the success rate of AI suggestions before and after feedback implementation, then there should be at least a 20% improvement in successful repairs using AI suggestions post-implementation.

Tracking the number of feedback submissions to gauge technician engagement with the feedback mechanism.

Given the feedback feature is in use, when monitoring the number of feedback submissions, then there should be at least 50 unique submissions each month to indicate proper technician engagement.

Facilitating follow-up questions for technicians after submitting feedback on AI suggestions.

Given a technician has submitted feedback, when they are prompted for follow-up questions, then they must be able to provide additional comments or clarifications about the AI's suggestion to improve response quality.

Mobile Accessibility

"As a mobile technician, I want to access the Instant Troubleshoot feature on my mobile device so that I can quickly resolve repair issues while on the move, improving my efficiency and service delivery."

Description

This requirement entails the development of a mobile-compatible version of the Instant Troubleshoot feature. Given that technicians often operate in dynamic environments, mobile accessibility will allow them to utilize troubleshooting resources on-the-go. This will not only enhance their efficiency in the shop but also enable instant access to important diagnostic information, thereby improving response times and increasing overall productivity.

Acceptance Criteria

Technicians are in the middle of a complex repair task and need to troubleshoot an unexpected issue that arises while working on a vehicle, using their mobile devices to access instant troubleshooting resources.

Given a technician is using their mobile device, when they initiate the Instant Troubleshoot feature, then they should receive relevant troubleshooting information within 5 seconds.

A technician is on the shop floor and needs to quickly reference a previous troubleshooting conversation to resolve a current issue, ensuring continuity in diagnostics.

Given a technician is on the shop floor, when they access their chat history within the Instant Troubleshoot feature, then they should be able to retrieve past troubleshooting discussions within 3 clicks/taps.

While working in different areas of the repair shop, a technician needs to switch between multiple devices to continue using the Instant Troubleshoot feature without losing data or conversation context.

Given a technician is logged into the Instant Troubleshoot feature on one device, when they switch to a different device, then their session should continue seamlessly, retaining all data and conversation context without requiring a re-login.

A technician is troubleshooting a vehicle issue outside of the shop and relies on the mobile accessibility of the Instant Troubleshoot feature to gather information in real-time.

Given a technician is outside the repair shop, when they access the Instant Troubleshoot feature, then it should work efficiently with a mobile internet connection, without significant delays or loading issues.

The shop manager wants to monitor the usage and effectiveness of the Instant Troubleshoot feature through mobile access, analyzing the number of troubleshooting sessions completed by technicians.

Given the shop manager accesses the admin reporting section, when they review the usage logs for the Instant Troubleshoot feature, then they should be able to see detailed reports on troubleshooting sessions completed per technician, along with timestamps.

Technicians working at different repair shops under a franchise umbrella need consistent access to the same troubleshooting resources via their mobile devices for effective problem resolution across locations.

Given that technicians belong to different franchises, when they access the Instant Troubleshoot feature via mobile, then they should all have access to a centralized database of troubleshooting resources that is updated in real-time.

Technicians often encounter varying levels of internet connectivity throughout the repair shop, affecting their use of the Instant Troubleshoot feature.

Given a technician is using the Instant Troubleshoot feature in an area with poor connectivity, when they attempt to access troubleshooting resources, then the system should provide a cached version of the last accessed information, ensuring functionality without internet access.

Knowledge Base Access

Knowledge Base Access allows users to tap into a comprehensive database of repair guides, manuals, and best practices. This feature boosts technician confidence and accuracy by making critical information readily available, leading to quicker repair times.

Requirements

Knowledge Base Search Functionality

"As a technician, I want to quickly search for repair guides and manuals so that I can efficiently complete repairs without unnecessary delays."

Description

The Knowledge Base Search Functionality enables users to quickly and efficiently search through a vast array of repair guides, manuals, and best practices. This feature will include advanced filtering options, keyword search capability, and tag-based categorization, allowing technicians to find the exact information they need with minimal effort. Providing this functionality not only enhances the user experience but also reduces time spent on searches, leading to faster repair completion times and improved technician confidence. Integration with the existing AutoWatch user interface is essential to ensure a seamless transition and user adoption.

Acceptance Criteria

User performs a keyword search for a specific repair guide on the Knowledge Base and retrieves relevant results quickly.

Given a technician enters a keyword in the search bar, When the search is initiated, Then the system should return a list of relevant repair guides within 2 seconds displaying a maximum of 10 results.

A technician applies advanced filters to refine search results for repair manuals by category and difficulty level.

Given a user applies filters for category and difficulty on the search results, When the user clicks 'Apply Filters', Then only repair manuals that meet the specified criteria should be displayed in less than 3 seconds.

User searches for information using tag-based categorization within the Knowledge Base.

Given a technician selects tags related to the repair task, When the search is performed, Then the result should display all items associated with the selected tags within 2 seconds.

A technician searches for a repair guide and selects a result to view the complete content.

Given that a technician clicks on a repair guide from the search results, When the guide is opened, Then the full content of the guide should load without errors and display correctly within 2 seconds.

User accesses the Knowledge Base from the main dashboard of AutoWatch.

Given a technician clicks on the Knowledge Base link from the dashboard, When the page loads, Then the Knowledge Base should be fully accessible, and all search and filtering functionalities should be operational within 2 seconds.

A technician conducts a keyword search with no matching results in the Knowledge Base.

Given a technician enters a non-existing keyword in the search bar, When the search is initiated, Then the system should display a message indicating that no results were found and suggest relevant tags for search improvement.

Interactive Troubleshooting Guides

"As a technician, I want to access interactive troubleshooting guides so that I can resolve issues more efficiently and accurately during repairs."

Description

Interactive Troubleshooting Guides provide step-by-step, visual instructions for common repair issues, allowing technicians to diagnose and resolve problems more effectively. These guides will include flowcharts, images, and visual aids to support users in understanding complex repair processes. By enhancing the technician's ability to troubleshoot, this feature aims to reduce the number of errors and decrease the time spent on repairs. Integration with the Knowledge Base is required to ensure consistency and accuracy of the provided information.

Acceptance Criteria

Technicians use the interactive troubleshooting guides while diagnosing a customer's vehicle issue in a repair shop setting.

Given a technician has access to the Interactive Troubleshooting Guides, when they navigate to a specific repair issue, then they should see a step-by-step guide including flowcharts and images to assist with diagnosis.

During a training session, new technicians are introduced to the Interactive Troubleshooting Guides to enhance their diagnostic skills.

Given a group of new technicians is being trained, when they use the Interactive Troubleshooting Guides for practice scenarios, then at least 80% of them should successfully complete the troubleshooting process without external help.

A technician encounters a complex repair issue requiring specific information from the Knowledge Base while using the Interactive Troubleshooting Guides.

Given the technician is following an Interactive Troubleshooting Guide, when they reach a point requiring additional information, then they should be able to seamlessly access related articles from the Knowledge Base without losing their progress in the guide.

A technician finds a discrepancy between the information provided in the Interactive Troubleshooting Guides and the Knowledge Base.

Given a technician uses the Interactive Troubleshooting Guide, when they identify an error in the guide compared to the Knowledge Base, then they should be able to report this discrepancy through the platform’s feedback system.

After utilizing the Interactive Troubleshooting Guides, technicians provide feedback regarding their effectiveness.

Given the technicians have used the guides regularly, when they complete a feedback survey, then at least 75% of the responses should indicate improved confidence and speed in troubleshooting due to the guides.

A repair shop owner wants to assess the overall impact of the Interactive Troubleshooting Guides on repair times.

Given the repair shop owner tracks repair times before and after the implementation of the guides, when they analyze the data, then they should find a reduction in average repair times by at least 20% within the first three months.

The Interactive Troubleshooting Guides need to be updated with the latest repair information and techniques.

Given that new repair information is available, when the Knowledge Base is updated, then the Interactive Troubleshooting Guides should reflect these changes within 48 hours.

User Feedback System for Knowledge Base

"As a technician, I want to leave feedback on knowledge base articles so that I can help improve the quality and relevance of the information available."

Description

The User Feedback System for the Knowledge Base allows users to provide ratings and comments on the usefulness and clarity of the articles and guides. This feature will collect feedback from technicians to identify areas needing improvement and to track which resources are the most effective. Incorporating this feedback loop is crucial for maintaining a high-quality knowledge base and ensuring that it evolves according to user needs. Integration with reporting tools to analyze feedback data will be necessary.

Acceptance Criteria

Technicians want to access the Knowledge Base to provide feedback on an article they just read about brake repair.

Given a technician is viewing an article in the Knowledge Base, when they click on the 'Rate this article' button and select a rating from 1 to 5, then the rating is recorded successfully and the technician receives a confirmation message.

A technician has found that a specific guide is unclear and wants to leave detailed feedback.

Given a technician has rated an article, when they enter a comment into the feedback section and submit, then the comment is saved and associated with the specific article, visible to administrators for review.

The management team wants to review feedback metrics to improve content quality.

Given feedback has been collected over time, when the management team accesses the reporting tool, they should see a summary of average ratings and comments per article to identify the top areas for improvement.

Users want to know if their feedback has been useful in enhancing the Knowledge Base.

Given a user submits feedback, when the article is updated based on feedback, then the user receives an email notification summarizing the changes made to the article.

A technician wants to view the most effective articles based on user feedback.

Given the feedback system is in operation, when technicians browse the Knowledge Base, they should see articles ranked by average ratings, helping them identify the most useful guides readily.

Technicians need to ensure that all feedback submissions are properly logged in the system.

Given a technician submits feedback, when reviewing the central database, all feedback entries should reflect the correct article ID, user ID, and timestamp without any errors or duplications.

The development team wants to test the integration of the feedback system with existing reporting tools.

Given the integration of the User Feedback System with reporting tools, when feedback is submitted, it should be reflected in the reporting dashboard within 24 hours without data loss.

Offline Access to Knowledge Base

"As a technician, I want to access the knowledge base offline so that I can refer to essential information even when I have no internet connection."

Description

Offline Access to the Knowledge Base allows users to download essential repair guides and manuals for use in environments where internet connectivity is limited or unavailable. This feature is particularly important for technicians working in remote locations or during field operations. Enabling offline access will enhance the usability of the knowledge base and ensure that technicians have crucial information when they need it most. A synchronization mechanism will be required to update offline content when the user has internet access.

Acceptance Criteria

User is a technician in a remote area with no internet access who needs to access repair guides for a car issue.

Given the technician has downloaded the required repair guides, when the technician opens the AutoWatch application offline, then the technician should be able to access all downloaded repair guides without any errors.

User is a technician who returns from a remote job site and wants to synchronize updated repair guides with the online knowledge base.

Given the technician has an internet connection, when the technician accesses the AutoWatch application, then the application should successfully synchronize the offline content with the latest updates from the knowledge base without any data loss.

User is a technician who downloads multiple repair manuals for offline access and wants to ensure they are all stored correctly.

Given the technician has downloaded multiple repair manuals, when the technician navigates to the offline storage section of the AutoWatch application, then all downloaded manuals should be listed accurately with the correct titles and dates of download.

User is a technician who needs to check if a specific repair manual is available offline before going to a job site.

Given the technician is in the knowledge base section and has an internet connection, when the technician selects a specific repair manual, then the application should indicate whether the manual is available for offline access or not.

User experiences a loss of connectivity while using the knowledge base and needs to handle the situation effectively.

Given the technician is using the application and loses internet connectivity, when the technician attempts to access the repair guides, then the application should display a user-friendly message indicating offline mode is activated, and all downloaded content is accessible.

Automated Updates for Knowledge Base

"As a shop owner, I want the knowledge base to be automatically updated so that I can ensure my technicians have the most current information available for their work."

Description

Automated Updates for the Knowledge Base ensure that all repair guides, manuals, and best practices are kept current with the latest industry standards and practices. This requirement involves setting up a system to regularly review and revise content, incorporating information from user feedback and new developments in auto repair techniques. This capability will enhance the reliability of the knowledge base, ensuring that technicians always have access to the most relevant and accurate information.

Acceptance Criteria

Technicians accessing the Knowledge Base on a typical workday to find the latest repair manuals and guides.

Given that a technician accesses the Knowledge Base, when they search for a specific repair guide, then the system must return the most recent version of that guide within 3 seconds.

Regular automated updates are scheduled to ensure knowledge base content reflects the latest industry standards.

Given that an automated update is scheduled to run monthly, then the system should check for updates to all repair guides and incorporate any changes by the end of each month, ensuring up-to-date content.

Feedback from technicians is collected and reviewed for potential updates to repair guides and best practices.

Given that user feedback is submitted regarding repair guides, when the feedback is reviewed, then the system must show evidence of content revisions made based on at least 80% of relevant feedback within one quarter.

The Knowledge Base is integrated with user feedback mechanisms to gather insights on the effectiveness of the information provided.

Given that a technician provides feedback on a repair guide, when the feedback is submitted, then the system must confirm receipt of the feedback within 1 hour.

End-of-month reports are generated to track the effectiveness and usage of updated repair guides in the Knowledge Base.

Given that the automated update is complete for the month, when the end-of-month report is generated, then it should detail all updates made, user interactions, and feedback received, with a 95% accuracy rate on the content.

Voice Command Feature

Voice Command Feature enables technicians to interact with the Virtual Repair Assistant hands-free. By simply speaking their questions, technicians can receive instant guidance, allowing them to focus on their tasks without distraction.

Requirements

Voice Recognition Accuracy

"As a technician, I want the system to accurately recognize my voice commands so that I can get timely assistance without having to stop my work to type or navigate manually."

Description

The Voice Recognition Accuracy requirement ensures that the Voice Command Feature accurately understands and processes spoken commands from technicians. This involves implementing advanced speech recognition algorithms capable of comprehending industry-specific terminology and varying accents. High accuracy will minimize misinterpretations, reduce frustration, and optimize workflow, making it easier for technicians to receive the correct guidance without manual input, thereby enhancing productivity and service quality.

Acceptance Criteria

Voice command input during a repair task

Given a technician is performing repairs on a vehicle and is using the Voice Command Feature, when the technician issues a command related to a specific repair task, then the system accurately recognizes and responds to the command with the correct guidance 95% of the time.

Voice command recognition for industry-specific terminology

Given a technician uses industry-specific terms while issuing commands, when a command is spoken that includes industry jargon, then the system accurately interprets and executes the command in 90% of the cases.

Handling of different accents and dialects

Given technicians with varying accents are using the Voice Command Feature, when they speak commands, then the system should successfully recognize and process commands from at least 85% of users regardless of their accent or dialect.

Error handling and feedback mechanism

Given a technician issues a command that the system does not understand, when a misinterpretation occurs, then the system should provide a clear error message and offer an alternative command suggestion to the technician.

Real-time processing speed of voice commands

Given a technician issues a command using voice input, when the command is processed, then the system must respond with guidance within 2 seconds in 90% of the interactions.

Integration with existing workflow tools

Given the Voice Command Feature is in use, when a technician invokes a command for guidance that requires cross-referencing with inventory or scheduling tools, then the system should successfully pull up the relevant information and present it seamlessly within the existing interface.

Hands-Free Operation

"As a technician, I want to use voice commands to interact with the assistant so that I can keep my hands free for repairs, enhancing my work efficiency and safety."

Description

The Hands-Free Operation requirement mandates that the Voice Command Feature allows technicians to interact with the Virtual Repair Assistant without needing to use their hands. This is crucial in a busy auto repair shop environment where technicians often have their hands occupied with tools or parts. By enabling voice commands, technicians can request information, set reminders, or update status seamlessly, promoting a safer and more efficient workflow.

Acceptance Criteria

Technician requests vehicle repair guide using voicecommand.

Given the technician has the Voice Command Feature activated, when they say 'Show me the repair guide for a 2015 Toyota Camry', then the Virtual Repair Assistant displays the relevant repair information within 2 seconds.

Technician sets a reminder for a follow-up task using voice commands.

Given the technician is in the process of working on a vehicle, when they say 'Remind me to check the oil in 10 minutes', then the system should set a reminder and notify the technician audibly at the specified time.

Technician updates the status of a repair job using voice commands.

Given the technician is working on a vehicle, when they say 'Mark the brake job as complete', then the system updates the job status in the management dashboard and confirms the action audibly to the technician.

Technician queries inventory levels using voice commands.

Given the technician needs to check part availability, when they say 'What is the status of the brake pads inventory?', then the system should respond with the current inventory status within 2 seconds.

Multiple technicians use the Voice Command Feature simultaneously.

Given two technicians are using the Voice Command Feature in the shop, when both issue commands at the same time, then the system processes each command accurately without lag or loss in response quality.

The Voice Command Feature recognizes and acts upon different accents.

Given the diverse range of accents among technicians, when a technician with a specific accent issues a voice command, then the system accurately interprets and executes the command as intended without requiring repetition.

Technician receives alerts about system updates or maintenance events via voice commands.

Given the technician is engaged in a repair task, when they say 'What are the latest system updates?', then the Virtual Repair Assistant provides a verbal summary of the updates without requiring the technician to stop working.

Integration with Existing Systems

"As a technician, I want the voice command feature to work with our existing management systems so that I can access information efficiently without switching between different applications."

Description

The Integration with Existing Systems requirement focuses on ensuring that the Voice Command Feature can effectively work with other tools and systems already in use at the auto repair shop. This includes the inventory management system and scheduling software, allowing technicians to access various functionalities through voice commands. Seamless integration will enhance the overall user experience and ensure that technicians can utilize the feature without disruptions to their existing workflows.

Acceptance Criteria

Technician accesses the inventory management system using voice commands while working on a vehicle repair.

Given that the technician is at the repair station, when they say 'Check inventory for brake pads', then the system should respond with the current status of brake pad inventory and availability.

Technician schedules a follow-up appointment through the voice command feature while completing a repair task.

Given that the technician is completing a repair, when they say 'Schedule a follow-up appointment for customer John Doe next Tuesday at 10 AM', then the system should confirm the appointment has been successfully scheduled and recorded in the scheduling software.

Technician requests real-time updates on an incoming part delivery using voice commands.

Given that a technician is waiting for a part delivery, when they say 'What is the status of part delivery for vehicle ID 12345?', then the system should provide the real-time status of the part delivery including estimated arrival time.

Technician uses voice commands to navigate through troubleshooting guides within the system.

Given that the technician is working on a specific vehicle issue, when they say 'Show troubleshooting guide for engine overheating', then the system should display the relevant troubleshooting steps for engine overheating issues immediately.

Technician checks scheduled appointments for the day using the voice command feature.

Given that the technician wants to review the day’s schedule, when they say 'What are my appointments for today?', then the system should list all appointments scheduled for that day including customer names and times.

Technician utilizes voice commands to log completed repairs into the system.

Given that the technician has finished a service on a vehicle, when they say 'Log repair for vehicle ID 98765 as completed', then the system should record the repair details and mark the job as completed.

Technician requests customer history for a specific vehicle through voice commands.

Given that the technician is working on a vehicle, when they say 'Show me the repair history for vehicle ID 54321', then the system should retrieve and display the entire repair history for that vehicle.

User Feedback Mechanism

"As a technician, I want to provide feedback on the assistant's performance after using voice commands so that the system can improve and better serve my needs in the future."

Description

The User Feedback Mechanism requirement involves implementing a system that allows technicians to provide feedback on the accuracy and utility of the voice recognition system after every interaction. This feedback will be used to continuously improve the voice command capabilities through machine learning and updates. By leveraging user insights, we can enhance the effectiveness of the voice assistant over time, ensuring that it remains a valuable tool in the technicians' workflow.

Acceptance Criteria

Feedback submission after voice command interaction.

Given a technician uses the voice command feature, when the interaction concludes, then they must be prompted to provide feedback on the voice recognition accuracy and utility, which is submitted successfully.

Feedback categorization and analysis.

Given the feedback submitted by technicians, when the feedback is received, then it should be automatically categorized and logged in the system for analysis by the development team.

Feedback visibility to technicians.

Given technicians provide feedback, when they view the voice command feature interface, then they should see a summary of previous feedback responses and enhancements made based on user input.

User feedback impact on the voice command system.

Given feedback is recorded, when the development team reviews the feedback, then they should identify at least one actionable item each month to improve the voice command capabilities based on the technician feedback.

Feedback response time measurement.

Given a feedback submission from a technician, when the feedback is submitted, then the response from the development team regarding improvement actions taken must occur within five business days.

Technician training on feedback provision.

Given the introduction of the feedback mechanism, when a technician first uses the voice command feature, then they must receive a tutorial on how to provide effective feedback after their interaction.

Multi-language Support

"As a non-English speaking technician, I want to use voice commands in my native language so that I can access assistance comfortably and efficiently, improving my overall work experience."

Description

The Multi-language Support requirement ensures that the Voice Command Feature can recognize and respond to voice commands in multiple languages. This is essential for auto repair shops that may have staff from diverse backgrounds who prefer using their native language. By supporting several languages, we can expand the usability and accessibility of the Voice Command Feature and enhance communication and collaboration in multicultural environments.

Acceptance Criteria

Voice Command Usage by Multilingual Technicians in the Repair Shop

Given a technician speaks a command in Spanish, when the command is processed, then the Virtual Repair Assistant responds accurately in Spanish.

Validating Command Recognition in Different Languages

Given a technician performs voice commands in French, when the commands are spoken clearly, then the system recognizes and executes the commands without errors.

User Feedback on Voice Command Feature in Multiple Languages

Given a technician completes a task using voice commands in Italian, when they provide feedback, then at least 85% of the responses must indicate satisfaction with language support.

Switching Between Languages During Use

Given a technician is using voice commands in English, when they switch to German, then the system should seamlessly transition to recognize German commands without requiring a restart.

Testing Voice Command Recognition in Noisy Environments

Given there is background noise in the repair shop, when a technician issues a voice command in Mandarin, then the system should still accurately recognize the command at least 90% of the time.

Multilingual Voice Command Program Setup

Given an administrator accesses the settings, when they select languages for the Voice Command Feature, then the system should allow at least five languages to be added without errors.

Live Chat Support

Live Chat Support connects technicians or customers with a real human expert when more complex issues arise. This feature ensures that users receive precise assistance and enhances the overall customer service experience.

Requirements

Real-Time Chat Functionality

"As a shop owner, I want to provide real-time chat support so that customers can get immediate help with their service inquiries, enhancing their overall experience and increasing satisfaction."

Description

This requirement encompasses the development of a real-time chat interface that enables seamless communication between customers and service technicians. The chat functionality should support text-based messaging, file sharing, and ideally, include a responsive design that works across various devices. Its integration within the AutoWatch platform will enhance customer service by allowing immediate assistance for technical inquiries, thereby improving user satisfaction and reducing resolution times. Additionally, the feature must ensure data security and privacy compliance to protect sensitive user information.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer initiates a chat request from the AutoWatch platform to ask a technical question regarding their vehicle repair status.

Given that the customer is logged into their account, when they click on the 'Live Chat' button, then a new chat window should open within 3 seconds, ensuring immediate access to support.

A technician receives a chat message from a customer and needs to respond with a status update regarding their repair request.

Given that a technician is active on the chat dashboard, when a customer sends a chat message, then the technician should receive a notification and have the ability to respond within 1 minute.

Customers need to share images or files related to their vehicle repair during the live chat for better assistance.

Given that the customer is in an active chat, when they click the 'Upload File' button, then they should be able to successfully upload an image or file with a maximum size of 5 MB without errors.

A live chat session should be accessible on mobile devices to facilitate customer inquiries on-the-go.

Given that a customer is using a mobile device, when they access the AutoWatch platform, then the live chat interface should be fully responsive and functional on screen sizes smaller than 768 pixels.

The live chat interface must maintain user data security and privacy during conversations.

Given that a chat is in progress, when a customer communicates sensitive information, then the data transmitted should be encrypted to ensure compliance with security standards and regulations.

Customers should receive a follow-up survey after the chat concludes to rate their support experience.

Given that the chat session has ended, when the customer closes the chat window, then they should be prompted with a survey asking for feedback on their support experience within 10 seconds.

The live chat system should log chat history for both customers and technicians for future reference.

Given that the chat session has concluded, when either participant checks their account in the AutoWatch platform, then they should see a record of the chat history accessible in their account within 2 minutes.

Chat Transcript Saving

"As a customer, I want to save my chat history so that I can refer back to the information and advice given by the technician for future use."

Description

The requirement includes the ability for users to save chat transcripts for future reference. This feature enables both customers and technicians to retain a record of their conversations, which can be valuable for follow-up inquiries or for clarifying past communications. The transcripts must be stored securely and easily accessible through the user’s profile. This functionality not only adds to transparency in communication but also helps in managing customer relationships effectively by resolving issues in future interactions.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer accesses the live chat feature, engages in a conversation with a technician regarding an issue with their vehicle, and wishes to save the transcript for future reference.

Given a user is in an active live chat session, When the user clicks the 'Save Transcript' button, Then the chat transcript should be stored in their profile under 'Chat History'.

Technician concludes a live chat with a customer and needs to ensure that the transcript is saved correctly for record-keeping and potential follow-up.

Given a technician finishes a chat with a customer, When the technician confirms the 'Save Transcript' action, Then the transcript should be automatically saved and timestamped in the system.

User wants to review a previous chat transcript to clarify information about a service or follow up on an unresolved issue.

Given a user navigates to their profile and selects 'Chat History', When the user clicks on a specific transcript, Then the full chat transcript should be displayed accurately with a time and date stamp.

User attempts to save a chat transcript while disconnected from the internet.

Given a user is offline during an active chat, When the user clicks the 'Save Transcript' button, Then a message should be displayed stating 'Please reconnect to save the transcript.'

Administrator needs to ensure that chat transcripts are stored securely to protect user privacy and sensitive information.

Given an administrator reviews the chat storage system, When transcripts are examined, Then all transcripts should be encrypted and not accessible without proper authentication.

User wishes to delete a chat transcript that is no longer needed or relevant.

Given a user is viewing their 'Chat History', When the user selects a specific transcript and clicks 'Delete', Then the transcript should be permanently removed from their history and a confirmation message should appear.

Automated Responses for FAQs

"As a customer, I want to receive quick answers to my common questions via chat, so that I can resolve my issues without waiting for a technician's availability."

Description

This requirement involves creating an automated response system that provides instant answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs) within the live chat interface. By leveraging AI and machine learning, the system will identify common queries and deliver prompt responses to users, alleviating wait times and improving user experience. This integration will allow technicians to focus on more complex issues while ensuring users receive timely assistance for routine inquiries. This feature is essential for enhancing the efficiency of customer service operations.

Acceptance Criteria

User initiates a chat session for common FAQs during business hours.

Given a user is on the AutoWatch platform, When the user types a frequently asked question into the live chat, Then the system should automatically provide an appropriate response within 3 seconds.

Technician receives an alert for a new chat session about a complex issue.

Given a technician is available on the AutoWatch platform, When a user submits a query that falls outside the automated response library, Then the technician should receive a notification within 1 minute of the user's submission.

Administrator updates the FAQ database with new questions and answers.

Given an administrator has access to the system, When the administrator adds a new FAQ, Then the new question should be added to the automated response system within 5 minutes and be available for users immediately.

User rates the response received from the automated FAQ system.

Given a user has received an automated response, When the user is prompted to rate their experience, Then the response must allow users to provide a rating from 1 to 5 stars and any additional comments.

System collects and analyzes data on user interactions with the automated FAQ feature.

Given the automated response feature is live, When data is collected from user interactions, Then the system should provide monthly reports detailing average response time, user satisfaction ratings, and the number of interactions handled without technician intervention.

User inquires about a service-related topic that is common but not in the FAQ.

Given a user types a question that is common but not in the current FAQ database, When the system identifies the lack of an automated response, Then it should gather this interaction data for future updates and inform the user that their question will be reviewed for future inclusion.

Multiple users initiate chat conversations simultaneously seeking FAQs.

Given multiple users are on the AutoWatch platform at the same time, When each user submits a frequently asked question, Then the automated response system must handle at least 100 concurrent inquiries without degradation in response time beyond 3 seconds.

Chat Analytics Dashboard

"As a shop owner, I want to access analytics on chat interactions, so that I can assess the quality of customer support and identify areas for improvement."

Description

The development of a chat analytics dashboard is critical for monitoring and evaluating chat interactions. This requirement includes tracking metrics such as response times, customer satisfaction ratings, and common queries. The analytics will provide insights into the effectiveness of the live chat support, allowing shop owners to identify trends, address potential issues, and improve the overall service quality. By analyzing chat data, businesses will be better equipped to make informed decisions regarding staffing and training, enhancing operational performance.

Acceptance Criteria

Dashboard displays real-time chat metrics for yesterday's interactions.

Given the user is on the Chat Analytics Dashboard, when they select 'Yesterday', then the dashboard shows real-time metrics for chat interactions including total chats, average response time, and customer satisfaction ratings for the previous day.

Dashboard provides graphical representation of chat metrics over the past week.

Given the user is viewing the Chat Analytics Dashboard, when they select the 'Last Week' option, then the dashboard displays a graphical representation of chat metrics including response times and customer satisfaction ratings for each day of the week.

Users can filter chat data by agent and specific timeframes.

Given the user is on the Chat Analytics Dashboard, when they apply filters for an agent and a specific date range, then the dashboard updates to show chat metrics only for the selected agent within the specified timeframe.

Dashboard includes a section for common queries received via chat.

Given the user is on the Chat Analytics Dashboard, when they scroll to the common queries section, then they can see a list of the five most frequently asked questions along with the number of times each was asked.

Users receive alerts for low customer satisfaction ratings.

Given the user is on the Chat Analytics Dashboard, when the average customer satisfaction rating falls below a predefined threshold, then an alert is generated for the user to review the performance of the live chat support.

Export feature allows users to download chat metrics reports.

Given the user is on the Chat Analytics Dashboard, when they click on the 'Export' option, then they can download a report of the current chat metrics in CSV format.

Dashboard provides actionable insights and recommendations based on chat data.

Given the user is on the Chat Analytics Dashboard, when they navigate to the recommendations section, then they can see actionable insights derived from the chat metrics to improve the live chat support.

Integration with CRM Systems

"As a technician, I want the chat interactions to be logged in our CRM system, so that I can have a comprehensive view of the customer history and provide tailored support."

Description

This requirement involves integrating the live chat support feature with existing Customer Relationship Management (CRM) systems used by auto repair shops. This integration will ensure that all customer interactions are logged and accessible within the CRM, allowing for a seamless experience across different service channels. It will enable technicians to have a complete view of customer histories, preferences, and previous interactions, fostering better customer relationships and personalized service. Ensuring compatibility with major CRM solutions is essential for maximizing this feature's effectiveness.

Acceptance Criteria

Integration of Live Chat Support into the CRM System

Given a live chat session is initiated, when the technician assists the customer, then the entire chat transcript should be logged automatically into the CRM system under the customer's profile, ensuring no information is lost.

Accessibility of Customer Information through the Live Chat Support

Given a technician is on a live chat with a customer, when they access the customer’s profile, then they should see a complete history of past interactions and preferences, enabling personalized support.

Compatibility with Major CRM Solutions

Given a selection of major CRM systems (e.g., Salesforce, HubSpot), when the integration is tested, then customers using any of these CRMs should be able to seamlessly connect live chat support with their existing CRM platform.

Real-Time Notifications for Customer Interactions

Given a customer initiates a live chat, when the chat starts, then both the customer and the technician should receive real-time notifications in their respective interfaces, confirming the chat connection.

Tracking of Live Chat Metrics in the CRM

Given that live chats are occurring, when the session ends, then metrics such as chat duration, satisfaction rating, and resolution status should be logged in the CRM for reporting and analysis.

User Experience of the Live Chat Interface

Given that a customer starts a live chat, when they interact with the live chat support interface, then they should find it easy to use, with a maximum time of 3 seconds for initial loading and response times not exceeding 2 seconds.

Data Security During Live Chat Sessions

Given that customer data is sensitive, when a technician is chatting with a customer, then all data sent through the live chat must be encrypted and comply with data protection regulations.

Visual Troubleshooting

Visual Troubleshooting allows technicians to upload images or videos of vehicle issues for analysis. The AI assistant can provide targeted troubleshooting tips based on the visual data, leading to more effective problem resolution.

Requirements

Image Upload Interface

"As a technician, I want to upload images and videos of vehicle issues so that I can receive accurate troubleshooting advice based on visual data."

Description

The Image Upload Interface allows technicians to easily upload images and videos of vehicle issues through a user-friendly interface. The feature should support multiple file formats and ensure quality accommodation for images and videos to facilitate effective analysis. Integration with existing workflows is crucial to minimize disruptions, and the system should include error handling for unsupported file types or sizes. This requirement enhances the utility of the Visual Troubleshooting feature by enabling quick and efficient data gathering for issue analysis.

Acceptance Criteria

Use Case: A technician needing to report a vehicle issue accesses the Image Upload Interface to quickly submit visual evidence for analysis during a repair ticket.

Given the technician is on the Image Upload Interface, when they select an image or video file to upload, then the system accepts the file and displays a confirmation message for successful upload.

Use Case: A technician attempts to upload a video file that exceeds the specified size limit for the Image Upload Interface.

Given the technician selects a video file larger than the maximum allowed size, when they attempt to upload it, then the system shows an error message indicating the file size exceeds the limit.

Use Case: A technician uploads an unsupported file type while using the Image Upload Interface.

Given the technician selects an unsupported file type for upload, when they submit the file, then the system should notify them with an error message explaining the file type is not supported.

Use Case: A technician successfully uploads multiple images for a vehicle issue during a busy service day.

Given the technician selects multiple supported image files and clicks upload, when the process completes, then all files should be uploaded successfully without any errors, and the system should display a summary of uploaded files.

Use Case: A technician wishes to edit or replace an uploaded image after the initial submission.

Given the technician has uploaded an image, when they choose to replace or delete the image, then the system allows them to easily perform this action without losing any previous data from the submission.

Use Case: A technician uploads a high-quality image, aiming for optimal detail capture for issue resolution.

Given the technician uploads a high-resolution image, when the upload is completed, then the system retains the image quality and provides tools for the technician to analyze the image effectively.

AI Troubleshooting Analysis

"As a shop owner, I want the AI to provide troubleshooting tips based on uploaded visuals to ensure my technicians can address issues effectively and promptly, resulting in better service for our customers."

Description

The AI Troubleshooting Analysis feature utilizes machine learning algorithms to analyze uploaded images and videos. It will identify potential issues based on visual input and generate tailored troubleshooting tips specific to the identified problems. The technology should continuously enhance its suggestions through user feedback and successful resolutions, improving accuracy over time. This capability not only saves time for technicians but also increases the precision of diagnostics, leading to improved customer satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

Technicians can upload images or videos of vehicle issues through the AutoWatch platform for AI analysis during a repair job.

Given the technician has uploaded an image or video of a vehicle issue, when the AI completes the analysis, then it provides at least three targeted troubleshooting tips based on the visual input within five seconds.

The AI continuously improves its analysis by incorporating user feedback on the accuracy of troubleshooting tips provided.

Given a technician has completed a troubleshooting process, when they provide feedback on AI-generated tips, then the AI must record and analyze this feedback to improve future suggestions in 80% of instances.

The uploaded visual data must be analyzed correctly to identify common vehicle problems in real-time while the technician works on the vehicle.

Given a vehicle issue is depicted in uploaded images or videos, when the AI analyzes the visual data, then it identifies at least 90% of common problems accurately based on a predefined dataset of issues.

Technicians need to view the analysis results in a user-friendly format post-upload.

Given the technician has submitted visual data, when the AI provides feedback, then the results must be displayed in a clear, organized, and actionable format for the technician within ten seconds of analysis completion.

AI troubleshooting analysis feature should handle multiple uploads simultaneously without degradation in performance.

Given multiple technicians are uploading images or videos at the same time, when the AI processes these uploads, then it must maintain an average response time of under five seconds per analysis, regardless of upload volume.

The AI's performance should be monitored and updated based on the success rate of the troubleshooting suggestions provided.

Given a collection of AI-generated troubleshooting tips, when the success of these tips is measured against resolution cases, then at least 75% of the successful tips should lead to positive feedback from technicians.

User Feedback Loop

"As a technician, I want to provide feedback on the AI's troubleshooting suggestions so that I can contribute to improving the system's accuracy and effectiveness in future diagnoses."

Description

The User Feedback Loop gathers input from technicians regarding the accuracy and helpfulness of the AI-generated troubleshooting suggestions. This mechanism allows technicians to provide ratings and comments on the tips received, facilitating a continuous improvement process for the AI model. Insights gained from this feedback will drive enhancements to the troubleshooting algorithms, ultimately providing more relevant and context-specific advice. This feedback loop is crucial for maintaining high-quality service and fostering trust in AI recommendations.

Acceptance Criteria

Technicians review AI-generated troubleshooting tips after uploading a video of a vehicle issue, providing feedback on the accuracy of the suggestions and effectiveness of the guidance.

Given a technician has uploaded a visual issue, when they receive suggested troubleshooting tips, then they can rate the accuracy of each tip from 1 to 5 stars and leave a comment for additional context.

The system collects feedback on AI-generated suggestions and compiles statistical data for review by the management team every month.

Given feedback has been submitted by technicians, when the management team accesses the feedback report, then it should display average ratings, number of comments, and trends in feedback over the last month.

Technicians receive a notification after providing feedback, confirming that their input has been recorded and will be used for improving the AI recommendations.

Given a technician submits feedback, when the submission is complete, then they should receive an immediate notification thanking them and informing them that their feedback is valuable for AI improvements.

The feedback loop is implemented to allow technicians to track how their input influences AI suggestions over time, fostering a sense of ownership in the improvement process.

Given feedback has been provided, when a technician checks their profile, then they should see metrics indicating how many suggestions they have rated and any changes in AI accuracy based on their input.

Automated reports are generated to display technician feedback on AI suggestions to the engineering team for continuous improvement.

Given feedback has been accumulated, when the engineering team requests the report, then they should receive a PDF containing detailed statistics and highlight areas that need algorithm improvements.

Different user roles have varied levels of access to the feedback and reporting systems to ensure sensitive information is protected while gathering insights.

Given a technician logs in, when they access the feedback system, then they should have permissions limited to submitting ratings and viewing their own feedback summary only, not other technicians' inputs.

Real-time Notification System

"As a technician, I want to receive real-time notifications about updates or new tips concerning troubleshooting so that I can act quickly and keep the workflow moving smoothly."

Description

The Real-time Notification System ensures that technicians are promptly informed about new feedback, additional troubleshooting tips, or updates from the AI after the analysis of uploaded visuals. This system should provide notifications via in-app alerts or emails to keep users informed and engaged. By promoting responsiveness in the troubleshooting process, this requirement enhances communication, minimizes downtime, and supports swift resolutions to customer issues.

Acceptance Criteria

Technician uploads a visual of a vehicle's issue and the AI analyzes it while the technician is working on another task.

Given the technician has uploaded a visual, When the AI completes its analysis, Then the technician receives a real-time in-app notification and an email about the analysis results and troubleshooting tips.

A technician checks their app for notifications after a busy work period.

Given the technician is logged into the app, When there are new notifications regarding uploaded visuals, Then all new notifications are displayed prominently on the dashboard and sent via email to ensure the technician is informed of any updates.

Technician is in the middle of a repair and receives a push notification from the system.

Given the technician is performing a repair while receiving a push notification, When they acknowledge the notification, Then the details of the message should be easily accessible without interrupting their current workflow.

A technician reviews past notifications regarding previous visual uploads.

Given the technician accesses the notification history, When they view notifications, Then they should see an organized list of notifications with timestamps and corresponding visual uploads for easy review.

Technician needs urgent troubleshooting help and uses the app to check for new tips from the AI.

Given the technician has uploaded visuals, When new troubleshooting tips are generated by the AI, Then the technician should receive immediate notification in-app and via email with the relevant tips linked to their uploaded visuals.

A technician is working on multiple vehicles and needs to stay updated with all notifications.

Given multiple visual uploads have been made by the technician, When the AI provides updates for each visual, Then the notification system should aggregate and summarize updates to avoid clutter, allowing technicians to manage their tasks efficiently.

Integration with Existing Systems

"As a shop manager, I want the Visual Troubleshooting feature to integrate with our existing systems so that our technicians can have all relevant information at their fingertips, optimizing our operational efficiency."

Description

The Integration with Existing Systems requirement focuses on ensuring that the Visual Troubleshooting feature seamlessly connects with the current auto repair shop management systems. This includes syncing with customer records, service histories, and inventory tracking systems. Such integration will facilitate smoother operations, as technicians will access all necessary information without leaving the Visual Troubleshooting interface. This requirement eliminates potential data silos and encourages a holistic approach to vehicle diagnostics and repairs.

Acceptance Criteria

Technician accesses Visual Troubleshooting feature to upload images of a vehicle's issues directly from the service interface.

Given the technician has logged into the Visual Troubleshooting feature, when they select the option to upload images or videos, then they should be able to successfully upload visual data without errors.

Integration with the existing customer records system to ensure vehicle issues uploaded by technicians are linked to the respective customer profiles.

Given a technician has uploaded a visual issue, when they save and submit their report, then the issue details must automatically sync with the correct customer record in the existing system.

Technician reviews AI-generated troubleshooting tips based on the uploaded visuals for clarity and relevance.

Given the technician has uploaded images and received AI troubleshooting tips, when they review the tips, then at least 80% of the suggestions should be deemed relevant and actionable by the technician based on their expertise.

Integration with inventory tracking systems to ensure that any parts suggested by AI troubleshooting tips are accurately reflected in inventory levels.

Given the AI troubleshooting recommends a part, when the technician approves the recommendation, then the inventory levels should automatically adjust to reflect the part allocation.

Audit of data syncing between the Visual Troubleshooting feature and existing systems to ensure no data is lost during integration.

Given a week's usage of the Visual Troubleshooting feature, when an audit is performed, then all uploaded vehicle issues and customer records must show 100% synchronization with no discrepancies.

User access control is implemented to restrict certain functionalities of the Visual Troubleshooting feature based on user roles.

Given a technician's role has been defined, when they attempt to access restricted functionalities, then they should receive a message indicating insufficient permissions to access that feature.

Feedback mechanism for technicians to report issues with the integration of Visual Troubleshooting with existing systems.

Given the Visual Troubleshooting feature is in use, when a technician encounters an issue, then they must be able to submit feedback or report issues within the feature, generating a ticket for follow-up.

Feedback Loop Integration

Feedback Loop Integration gathers insights from technicians and customers about the effectiveness of the Virtual Repair Assistant’s responses. This information is used to continuously improve the AI’s knowledge base and user experience, ensuring it evolves with user needs.

Requirements

Technician Feedback Collection

"As a technician, I want to provide feedback on the Virtual Repair Assistant's responses so that I can help improve its effectiveness and make my job easier."

Description

This requirement involves developing a system to gather feedback from technicians regarding the effectiveness of the Virtual Repair Assistant’s responses. The feedback mechanism should collect qualitative and quantitative data, allowing technicians to easily submit insights following interactions with the assistant. This continuous feedback loop is crucial for analyzing the AI’s performance, identifying weaknesses in its responses, and ultimately facilitating enhancements that lead to a more effective and user-friendly tool. By incorporating technician feedback into the AI’s development, AutoWatch ensures that the assistant evolves in alignment with user needs, which significantly enhances the repair process and service quality.

Acceptance Criteria

Technicians are able to access the feedback system immediately after their interaction with the Virtual Repair Assistant through a prompt that appears on their screen, inviting them to provide feedback on the assistant's performance.

Given a technician has completed an interaction with the Virtual Repair Assistant, When the feedback prompt appears, Then the technician is able to submit their feedback successfully, and it is recorded in the system without errors.

Technicians can submit quantitative ratings on a scale from 1 to 5 regarding the usefulness of the Virtual Repair Assistant's response after each interaction.

Given a technician selects a rating from 1 to 5 post-interaction, When the technician submits the rating, Then the system should log the rating and display a confirmation message to the technician.

Qualitative feedback from technicians is collected through a text box that allows them to elaborate on their rating, capturing detailed insights about the assistant's performance.

Given a technician fills out the qualitative feedback text box, When they submit the feedback, Then the text should be stored in the database and associated with the respective interaction log for analysis.

A summary report is generated weekly that consolidates feedback data from technicians, outlining any recurring strengths or weaknesses noted in the Virtual Repair Assistant responses.

Given the week has concluded, When the feedback data is compiled, Then a report summarizing ratings and qualitative insights should be generated and sent to the development team for review.

Technicians receive notifications if their feedback results in significant changes or improvements to the Virtual Repair Assistant based on their input, enhancing engagement and transparency.

Given that a significant change has been made to the Virtual Repair Assistant due to technician feedback, When the change is implemented, Then all technicians who provided feedback should receive an informative notification about the changes made and their impact.

A user-friendly interface for submitting feedback is provided, ensuring that technicians can easily navigate and complete the feedback process in less than two minutes.

Given the feedback system is designed for technician use, When a technician accesses the feedback form, Then they should be able to submit their feedback within two minutes without any technical difficulties.

Customer Experience Enhancement

"As a customer, I want to rate my interaction with the Virtual Repair Assistant so that I can share my experience and help improve future responses."

Description

This requirement focuses on creating a customer-facing interface that allows customers to rate their interactions with the Virtual Repair Assistant. This feature should permit customers to provide feedback on the clarity, accuracy, and usefulness of the AI’s responses after each interaction. Gathering this data is essential for understanding customer satisfaction and identifying areas for improvement. By integrating customer feedback into the AI’s training process, AutoWatch can continuously refine the user experience and ensure that customer needs are effectively met, ultimately fostering loyalty and trust in the service.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer Interaction with the Virtual Repair Assistant Rating System

Given a customer has an interaction with the Virtual Repair Assistant, when they are prompted for feedback, then they should be able to rate their experience on a scale of 1 to 5 stars.

Customer Feedback Submission Process

Given a customer has rated their experience, when they submit their feedback, then a confirmation message should appear indicating that their feedback has been successfully recorded.

Feedback Visibility for Technicians

Given feedback has been submitted by customers, when technicians access the feedback loop dashboard, then they should be able to view all submitted feedback along with the corresponding ratings.

Integration of Feedback into AI Training

Given that customer feedback is collected, when the AI's training process runs, then it must incorporate the collected feedback to adjust its knowledge base and response accuracy accordingly.

Tracking Feedback Impact on Customer Satisfaction

Given customer feedback is continuously gathered, when analyzing customer satisfaction metrics, then the overall satisfaction score should indicate whether improvements have resulted from feedback integration over a defined period.

Reporting on Feedback Trends

Given a period of customer feedback submissions, when a report is generated, then it should display trends in ratings and comments, highlighting areas for improvement along with actionable insights.

User Experience Testing of Rating System

Given that a customer has accessed the rating system, when they interact with the rating interface, then it should be intuitive and result in no observed user errors or confusion in at least 95% of test cases.

Automated Feedback Analysis

"As a product manager, I want to analyze feedback data on the Virtual Repair Assistant so that I can make informed decisions on improvements and updates."

Description

This requirement entails implementing an automated analysis system that processes the feedback collected from both technicians and customers. The analysis should categorize feedback for trend identification, highlight common issues, and suggest actionable improvements for the Virtual Repair Assistant. Automated feedback analysis is vital for rapidly responding to input from users and ensuring that the AI system is continuously optimized. By effectively analyzing feedback, AutoWatch can prioritize updates and enhancements based on real user insights, making the system more responsive and effective over time.

Acceptance Criteria

Automated analysis of feedback from technicians is successfully implemented and provides insights into the effectiveness of the Virtual Repair Assistant's responses.

Given that feedback is collected from technicians, when the automated analysis is performed, then the system should categorize at least 90% of the feedback accurately into predefined themes.

The feedback analysis system identifies common issues raised by customers regarding the Virtual Repair Assistant.

Given customer feedback, when the automated analysis is completed, then the system should highlight the top 5 recurring issues reported by customers with a frequency of at least 10% across collected feedback.

Actionable improvements suggested by the automated analysis are logged correctly for further review by the AutoWatch development team.

Given the analysis of collected feedback, when the report is generated, then the system should provide at least 3 actionable improvement suggestions based on identified trends and issues.

Technicians can easily access categorized feedback reports to improve their interactions with the Virtual Repair Assistant.

Given that automated feedback analysis is complete, when technicians access the feedback reports, then the system should display categorized feedback within 2 clicks with an overall satisfaction metric.

The automated feedback analysis system is monitored for performance and accuracy in categorizing feedback.

Given that feedback is continuously being collected, when a sample of 100 pieces of feedback is analyzed, then the categorization accuracy rate should remain above 85% to ensure consistent performance.

The virtual assistant receives updates based on prioritized feedback analysis results to enhance user satisfaction.

Given prioritized feedback results, when enhancements are implemented, then at least 75% of users should report improved interactions with the Virtual Repair Assistant in a follow-up survey conducted 30 days post-implementation.

User Training Materials Development

"As a user, I want access to training materials on the Virtual Repair Assistant so that I can confidently use its features and provide useful feedback."

Description

This requirement involves creating comprehensive training materials, such as tutorials, videos, and FAQs, to educate users on how to effectively utilize the Virtual Repair Assistant and provide constructive feedback. Providing adequate training resources is essential for maximizing the functional benefits of the AI tool and ensuring users feel comfortable and confident in using the system. By equipping users with knowledge and resources, AutoWatch can encourage greater participation in the feedback loop, which amplifies the impact of user insights on the AI’s evolution.

Acceptance Criteria

User Training Completion for Virtual Repair Assistant.

Given a user has access to the training materials, when the user completes all tutorials and quizzes, then the user should be able to demonstrate the ability to utilize the Virtual Repair Assistant effectively in real scenarios with at least 80% accuracy.

Feedback Submission Process for Technicians and Customers.

Given a technician or customer has accessed the feedback submission form, when they provide feedback about their experience with the Virtual Repair Assistant, then the submitted feedback should be stored in the database and acknowledged with a confirmation message.

Ease of Access to Training Materials for Users.

Given a user navigates to the training section of the AutoWatch platform, when they search for specific training materials or FAQs, then the relevant materials should be displayed in less than 3 seconds, with clear navigation options provided.

Effectiveness of Training Materials in Enhancing User Knowledge.

Given the training materials have been accessed by the users, when users are surveyed one month later about their knowledge of the Virtual Repair Assistant, then at least 75% of users should report a significant improvement in their understanding and usage of the AI tool.

Integration of User Feedback into the AI Improvement Cycle.

Given user feedback has been collected, when the development team reviews the feedback, then actionable insights should be documented, and a plan for integrating these insights into the AI's knowledge base should be established within two weeks of feedback collection.

User Comfort and Confidence in Providing Feedback.

Given users have completed the training and used the Virtual Repair Assistant, when they are asked about their comfort level in providing feedback, then at least 70% of users should indicate they feel confident in providing constructive feedback.

Feedback-based AI Model Adjustments

"As an AI developer, I want to receive feedback to adjust the Virtual Repair Assistant model so that it adapts to user needs and improves response quality."

Description

This requirement includes setting up a structured process for implementing adjustments to the AI model based on the feedback received. This process should facilitate regular reviews and updates of the AI’s knowledge base to incorporate relevant feedback from both technician and customer insights. Having a robust system for integrating feedback into the AI model is critical to maintaining the quality of responses and aligning with evolving user expectations. By ensuring that the AI adapts effectively to user needs, AutoWatch can maintain a competitive edge and deliver a higher quality service.

Acceptance Criteria

Feedback Submission by Technicians after Repair Jobs

Given that a technician has completed a repair job, when they submit feedback about the Virtual Repair Assistant's responses, then the feedback should be successfully recorded in the system for review and analysis.

Customer Feedback Collection Post-Service

Given that a customer has received service from the auto repair shop, when they complete a feedback form regarding the Virtual Repair Assistant and submit it, then the feedback should be logged into the feedback loop for further processing.

Regular Review of Feedback Data to Modify AI Model

Given that there is accumulated feedback from technicians and customers, when the scheduled review meeting occurs, then the feedback data should be analyzed and prioritized for potential adjustments to the AI model based on relevance and impact.

Implementation of Proposed Adjustments to AI Based on Feedback

Given the finalized recommendations from feedback analysis, when the development team implements adjustments to the AI model, then the adjustments should be deployed successfully in the next system update.

Monitoring the Impact of AI Adjustments on User Satisfaction

Given that adjustments have been made to the AI model, when user satisfaction surveys are conducted three months post-adjustment, then at least 80% of users should indicate improved satisfaction with the AI's responses.

Documentation of Feedback Loop Processes

Given the established feedback loop process, when the documentation is reviewed, then it should comprehensively describe the steps for collecting, reviewing, and implementing feedback to ensure consistency and clarity in operations.

User Engagement Metrics Dashboard

"As a product manager, I want to see user engagement metrics for the feedback loop so that I can identify trends and areas for improvement in the feedback process."

Description

This requirement involves creating a dashboard that displays key metrics related to user engagement with the feedback loop, such as participation rates, feedback submission frequency, and response trends. By providing stakeholders with a visual representation of user engagement, this dashboard will enable AutoWatch to monitor the effectiveness of the feedback collection process and identify areas of improvement. Tracking these metrics is essential for developing strategies to enhance participation and ensuring that user feedback is driving meaningful changes to the Virtual Repair Assistant.

Acceptance Criteria

User Dashboard Displays Participation Rates

Given the User Engagement Metrics Dashboard is accessible, when a user opens the dashboard, then it must display the participation rate for feedback submissions over the past month at the top of the page, represented as a percentage.

Visual Representation of Feedback Submission Frequency

Given the User Engagement Metrics Dashboard is displaying, when a user navigates to the feedback submission section, then it must show a graphical trend of feedback submissions over the last 30 days with clear indicators of peak submission dates.

Display Response Trends Over Time

Given the User Engagement Metrics Dashboard is in use, when the user selects the response trends tab, then it should present a line graph that visually represents the trends of technician and customer feedback response rates over the last quarter.

Dashboard Integration with Data Sources

Given the User Engagement Metrics Dashboard needs real-time data, when the dashboard is loaded, then it must successfully pull the latest metrics from the feedback loop database and update the displayed values within 5 seconds.

Exportable Reports for Stakeholders

Given that the dashboard is operational, when a user selects the export report option, then they must receive a downloadable report in CSV format containing all key engagement metrics displayed on the dashboard.

Cost Estimation Tool

Cost Estimation Tool predicts potential repair costs associated with troubleshooting steps suggested by the Virtual Repair Assistant. This enables technicians to provide customers with upfront estimates, enhancing transparency and trust.

Requirements

Dynamic Cost Calculation

"As a technician, I want to receive real-time cost estimates based on my troubleshooting steps so that I can provide customers with accurate and transparent information about their repair costs."

Description

The Dynamic Cost Calculation requirement allows the Cost Estimation Tool to adjust predicted repair costs in real-time based on selected troubleshooting steps by the technician. This requires the integration of an algorithms that account for various factors such as parts availability, labor rates, and previous repair data. This flexibility in cost estimation enhances customer transparency and enables technicians to provide accurate upfront estimates, fostering trust and improving the customer experience. The requirement also supports integration with the existing inventory and pricing system, ensuring that the estimates are reflective of current market conditions and internal pricing strategies.

Acceptance Criteria

Technician uses the Cost Estimation Tool to select troubleshooting steps for a vehicle in the AutoWatch platform, activating the dynamic cost calculation feature during the customer interaction process.

Given a technician selects specific troubleshooting steps for a vehicle, when they initiate the Cost Estimation Tool, then the system should display an accurate, updated repair cost reflecting the selected steps, parts availability, and labor rates.

A technician wants to change the selected troubleshooting steps after the initial estimate has been generated to see how the costs adjust in real-time.

Given a technician has already generated an estimate, when they modify the troubleshooting steps in the Cost Estimation Tool, then the tool should recalculate and display the new estimated repair costs instantly without requiring a page refresh.

A shop manager needs to ensure that the estimated costs provided by the Cost Estimation Tool are consistent with current market pricing and internally set pricing strategies.

Given the integration with the existing inventory and pricing system is functioning, when a technician inputs a requested service, then the Cost Estimation Tool should reference live data to generate an estimate that matches or adheres to current pricing strategies and market conditions.

A customer receives an estimate from the technician and has follow-up questions about the components of the cost breakdown.

Given the customer requests a breakdown of total estimated costs, when the technician accesses the estimate details within the Cost Estimation Tool, then the tool should provide a detailed line-item breakdown of parts and labor included in the estimate.

The shop needs to track the accuracy of the estimates provided by the Cost Estimation Tool against actual repair costs post-service completion.

Given a service has been completed, when a shop manager reviews the repair cost report, then they should see a comparison between initial estimates generated by the Cost Estimation Tool and actual costs incurred, with a variance report included for analysis.

The technician is using the AutoWatch platform in a shop with limited internet connectivity, impacting the performance of the Cost Estimation Tool.

Given the technician is operating in an environment with intermittent internet access, when they attempt to use the Cost Estimation Tool, then the system should allow offline functionality to cache the most recent data and allow for basic calculations without real-time internet access.

A technician needs to ensure that the Cost Estimation Tool integrates seamlessly with other components of the AutoWatch platform, such as the scheduling and communication features.

Given the technician is using the Cost Estimation Tool, when they navigate to schedule a service appointment with a customer based on the estimate provided, then the system should automatically populate the appointment details with the service type and estimated cost, ensuring a smooth transition between features.

Historical Data Analysis

"As a shop owner, I want historical repair data to be analyzed so that the Cost Estimation Tool can provide more accurate estimates based on past repairs."

Description

The Historical Data Analysis requirement enables the Cost Estimation Tool to access and analyze past repair data to provide more precise cost predictions. This feature will leverage machine learning algorithms to identify patterns in repair costs associated with specific vehicles and issues. By incorporating historical pricing data, the tool will enhance the accuracy of the estimates, allowing technicians to offer informed guidance to customers based on previous cases. This analysis will also be beneficial for predicting future repair trends and optimizing inventory management by understanding common parts and repair needs.

Acceptance Criteria

Historical Data Analysis for Accurate Repair Cost Estimation

Given a technician is inputting a vehicle issue into the Cost Estimation Tool, when the tool accesses historical repair data, then it should return a cost estimate that reflects at least 85% accuracy compared to actual past repair costs.

Enhancing Cost Transparency for Customers

Given a customer requests an estimate for a vehicle repair, when the technician uses the Cost Estimation Tool, then the customer should receive an upfront estimate that includes detailed breakdowns of labor and parts costs based on historical data.

Identifying Patterns in Repair Cost Trends

Given the Cost Estimation Tool has access to a minimum of 100 past repair cases, when the tool analyzes this data, then it should generate a report highlighting the top three most common repair issues and their associated costs within a specified time frame.

Predicting Future Repair Costs Using Machine Learning

Given the historical data is updated daily, when the Cost Estimation Tool runs its machine learning algorithm, then it should continuously improve its cost prediction model with each new data set, achieving a 5% improvement in estimate accuracy quarterly.

Inventory Optimization Based on Repair Trends

Given the Cost Estimation Tool provides insights on frequently used parts for repairs, when the analysis identifies a trend for a specific vehicle type, then the system should suggest an inventory restock alert for those parts to maintain optimal stock levels.

User-Friendly Interface for Accessing Historical Data

Given the technician is using the Cost Estimation Tool, when they access the historical data analysis feature, then the interface should display repair cost data in an easy-to-read format, with sortable columns for vehicle, issue, and cost, ensuring usability for technicians.

Evaluating Technician Performance with Historical Data

Given a technician completes a repair task, when their performance is evaluated based on the accuracy of their cost estimates over a month, then the system should provide feedback highlighting any discrepancies between estimated and actual costs.

Customer Notification Integration

"As a customer, I want to receive notifications with my cost estimate after the technician inputs the information so that I can make timely decisions regarding my repair options."

Description

The Customer Notification Integration requirement focuses on enabling automated notifications to customers with their cost estimates promptly after technicians input their troubleshooting steps. This feature will enhance communication between the shop and the customers, ensuring they are kept informed and reducing the need for follow-up inquiries. Notifications will be customizable, allowing shop owners to choose the preferred delivery methods such as SMS, email, or app notifications. This integration streamlines the customer service process, promoting better satisfaction and quicker decision-making from customers regarding their vehicle repairs.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer receives a cost estimate notification immediately after the technician inputs troubleshooting steps into AutoWatch for their vehicle.

Given a technician has entered the troubleshooting steps, when the cost estimation is generated, then the customer should receive a notification via their selected delivery method (SMS, email, or app notification) within 5 minutes.

Shop owner customizes notification settings for different types of cost estimates and selects preferred communication methods for customers.

Given a shop owner accesses the notification settings, when they customize notification templates and choose preferred delivery methods, then the changes should save successfully and reflect immediately in the system.

A customer verifies they have received the correct cost estimate notification after a troubleshooting input by a technician.

Given the customer has inputted their preferred notification method in their profile, when the cost estimate is generated, then the customer should verify that the notification contains accurate cost information and arrives as per their preference.

Multiple customers receive their cost estimates simultaneously after technicians input troubleshooting data.

Given multiple technicians input troubleshooting steps for different customers, when the system processes these inputs, then each customer should receive their respective cost estimate notifications without delays beyond 5 minutes.

Technician identifies issues with notification delivery and reports them to the system administrator.

Given a technician notices that a customer did not receive their cost estimate notification, when they report the issue through the system, then the report should create a ticket for the admin to investigate the delivery failure.

A customer changes their preferred notification method and receives future notifications accordingly.

Given a customer selects a new preferred notification method in their profile settings, when the cost estimate is generated and sent, then the customer should receive it via the newly selected method for future notifications.

Shop owner reviews the logs of notification delivery and checks for any failed notifications.

Given a shop owner accesses the notification delivery logs, when they filter for failed notifications, then they should see a report of all unsuccessful deliveries along with reasons for the failures for corrective actions.

User-Friendly Interface for Estimation

"As a technician, I want the Cost Estimation Tool to have a user-friendly interface so that I can quickly input information and focus my efforts on serving the customer."

Description

The User-Friendly Interface for Estimation requirement ensures that the Cost Estimation Tool has an intuitive layout and design that makes it easy for technicians to navigate and input troubleshooting steps quickly. This will include features like dropdown menus, automated suggestions based on vehicle inventory, and visual indicators for common repair types. By simplifying the input process, the tool will minimize time spent on estimations and focus more on customer interaction. A user-friendly interface is essential for improving workflow efficiency and promoting user adoption of the new tool.

Acceptance Criteria

User navigates to the Cost Estimation Tool and selects the service they want to estimate for a specific vehicle.

Given the technician is on the Cost Estimation Tool page, when they click on the dropdown menu for service selection, then they should see a list of all available repair services listed alphabetically with a search function.

A technician inputs troubleshooting steps for a particular vehicle model in the Cost Estimation Tool.

Given the technician has selected a vehicle model, when they input troubleshooting steps, then the tool should automatically suggest relevant repair options based on the selected vehicle and show the estimated cost for each option.

The technician needs to provide a cost estimate to a customer based on the inputted repairs in the cost estimation tool.

Given the technician has selected repair options and reviewed the estimates, when they click on 'Generate Estimate', then a clear, printable summary of the estimated costs should be generated, including labor and parts, for the technician to present to the customer.

The technician completes a repair estimate session and wants to save the estimates for future reference or review.

Given the technician has created an estimate for a vehicle, when they click on 'Save Estimate', then the estimate should be saved in the system and should be retrievable by searching the vehicle information or customer profile.

A technician is using the Cost Estimation Tool on a tablet during a customer interaction.

Given the technician is using a tablet, when they access the Cost Estimation Tool, then the interface should be fully responsive with properly aligned buttons and dropdowns that are easily tappable without losing any functionalities compared to the desktop version.

The manager seeks to analyze the usage of the Cost Estimation Tool by the technicians over a month.

Given the manager is in the analytics section of the system, when they request a usage report for the Cost Estimation Tool, then the report should display detailed statistics of how many estimates were created by each technician during the selected period, alongside average estimate values.

Integration with Inventory Management System

"As a technician, I want the Cost Estimation Tool to integrate with the inventory system so that I can provide accurate cost estimates based on current part availability."

Description

The Integration with the Inventory Management System requirement ensures that the Cost Estimation Tool can pull real-time data on parts availability and pricing from existing inventory systems. This feature will facilitate accurate cost estimation and provide technicians with immediate access to the latest parts information, allowing them to inform customers of repair timelines and availability. Integrating this data will help avoid delays in parts ordering and provide customers with a transparent view of both cost and time associated with their repairs.

Acceptance Criteria

Technician retrieves real-time part availability and pricing while using the Cost Estimation Tool.

Given the Cost Estimation Tool is integrated with the Inventory Management System, When the technician requests parts availability for a specific repair, Then the tool should display current inventory levels and pricing for each needed part.

Customer receives accurate repair cost estimates based on real-time inventory data.

Given that the technician has accessed real-time inventory data through the Cost Estimation Tool, When the technician generates a cost estimate for the customer, Then the estimated cost must reflect the most current part prices from the inventory system.

Inventory updates impact cost estimates in real-time during a customer consultation.

Given that part prices in the Inventory Management System change, When a technician is providing a customer with an estimate, Then the Cost Estimation Tool must reflect any changes in part pricing to ensure accurate estimates are given.

Technician can order parts directly from the Cost Estimation Tool if they are not available.

Given that a part is not available in the Inventory Management System during a cost estimate, When the technician selects the option to order the part, Then the system should allow the technician to place an order directly through the tool and confirm the order status to the technician.

The Cost Estimation Tool tracks parts status and expected delivery times for transparency.

Given that a part has been ordered through the Cost Estimation Tool, When the order is submitted, Then the tool should provide the technician with updates on parts status and expected delivery times for the customer.

Audit log tracks historical pricing and inventory data for analysis.

Given the Cost Estimation Tool's integration with the Inventory Management System, When any part’s pricing or availability changes, Then the system must log the historical data changes to maintain a comprehensive audit trail.

Integration error handling when the Inventory Management System is inaccessible.

Given that the Inventory Management System is down or unreachable, When the technician uses the Cost Estimation Tool, Then the tool must display an error message and allow the technician to proceed with a manual estimate without crashing.

Feedback Analysis Tool

The Feedback Analysis Tool utilizes advanced analytics to dissect customer feedback into actionable insights, helping shop owners identify prevalent themes and areas for improvement. By summarizing customer sentiments and highlighting issues needing attention, this feature empowers businesses to make informed decisions and enhance service quality.

Requirements

Sentiment Analysis Engine

"As an auto shop owner, I want to analyze customer feedback so that I can identify areas for improvement and enhance customer satisfaction."

Description

The Sentiment Analysis Engine is designed to automatically process and analyze customer feedback collected through various channels such as surveys, online reviews, and direct customer communications. This requirement entails the integration of natural language processing (NLP) algorithms to extract sentiments from textual data, categorizing feedback into positive, negative, and neutral sentiments. The tool will generate visual representation of sentiments over time, allowing auto repair shop owners to track shifts in customer perception and satisfaction levels. By leveraging advanced analytics, this feature enables shop owners to identify recurring themes in customer feedback, pinpoint areas requiring improvement, and enhance overall service quality. Integration with existing databases and customer relationship management (CRM) systems will ensure seamless data flow and accurate analysis.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer feedback is collected through surveys and online reviews at the end of each repair service.

Given customer feedback has been collected, when the Sentiment Analysis Engine processes this data, then it should accurately categorize at least 90% of the feedback into positive, negative, or neutral sentiments.

A shop owner wants to view sentiment trends over the past month to understand customer perception shifts.

Given the Sentiment Analysis Engine has processed customer feedback, when the shop owner accesses the visual representation of sentiments, then it should display trends that clearly indicate shifts in sentiment categories over the selected period.

A shop owner is analyzing customer feedback from multiple channels to identify areas for improvement.

Given that customer feedback from surveys, online reviews, and direct communications is integrated, when the shop owner uses the Feedback Analysis Tool, then it should highlight the top three recurring negative themes mentioned in the feedback.

The shop owner integrates the Sentiment Analysis Engine with their existing CRM to automate customer feedback tracking.

Given that the Sentiment Analysis Engine is linked with the CRM system, when new customer feedback is received, then it should automatically trigger a sentiment analysis and update the CRM records without any manual intervention.

A small shop owner reviews the summary report generated by the Sentiment Analysis Engine.

Given the engine has processed sufficient customer feedback, when the shop owner generates a summary report, then it should provide actionable insights including sentiment distribution, key themes, and specific recommendations for service improvement.

The Sentiment Analysis Engine encounters unknown text or unsupported language in customer feedback.

Given customer feedback in an unknown or unsupported language is processed, when the Sentiment Analysis Engine analyzes this text, then it should log the feedback as 'unresolved' and notify the shop owner about the unsupported content without crashing.

The shop owner wants to validate the accuracy of the Sentiment Analysis Engine against a mixed dataset of customer feedback.

Given a mixed dataset of customer feedback has been prepared, when the Sentiment Analysis Engine processes this dataset, then the accuracy of sentiment categorization should meet or exceed 85%, validated by a manual review of the output.

Thematic Insights Dashboard

"As an auto shop owner, I want to view trends and themes in customer feedback so that I can adjust my services accordingly and improve customer satisfaction."

Description

The Thematic Insights Dashboard provides users with a comprehensive visualization of customer feedback trends and themes derived from the Sentiment Analysis Engine. This dashboard features a user-friendly interface that categorizes comments and feedback into specific themes such as service quality, wait times, and pricing. The requirement also includes customizable reporting features, enabling shop owners to generate detailed reports based on selected timeframes or specific themes. This tool serves the purpose of allowing shop owners to proactively address common issues and tailor their services to meet customer expectations. The dashboard must be fully integrated within the AutoWatch platform, providing easy access to essential insights while maintaining data integrity and security.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Thematic Insights Dashboard for the first time and attempts to navigate through different feedback themes to understand customer sentiments.

Given the user is logged into AutoWatch, when they navigate to the Thematic Insights Dashboard, then they should see a user-friendly interface displaying categorized themes such as service quality, wait times, and pricing.

User generates a report from the Thematic Insights Dashboard for a specific timeframe to analyze customer feedback trends over the last month.

Given the user selects a date range from the report generation options, when they click the 'Generate Report' button, then the system should provide a downloadable report summary of customer feedback themes for the selected timeframe.

User wants to filter customer feedback based on specific themes like 'Service Quality' or 'Pricing' to focus on certain areas needing improvement.

Given the user is on the Thematic Insights Dashboard, when they apply a theme filter for 'Service Quality', then the dashboard should update to only show feedback related to that theme, with corresponding insights displayed clearly.

User checks the integration of the Thematic Insights Dashboard within their existing AutoWatch account to ensure no data integrity issues.

Given the user accesses the Thematic Insights Dashboard, when they review the data inputs from the Sentiment Analysis Engine, then all information should align correctly with prior customer feedback data without discrepancies.

User interacts with the Thematic Insights Dashboard and reports an issue regarding incorrect theme categorization in displayed feedback.

Given the user submits a feedback report of the issue from the dashboard, when the support team reviews the report, then the dashboard should log the issue for resolution and provide the user with a confirmation of receipt.

User seeks to understand the overall performance of their auto repair shop based on customer feedback depicted in the Thematic Insights Dashboard.

Given the user analyzes the summary insights on the dashboard, when they view the overall satisfaction rating based on aggregated themes, then it should summarize to indicate a net positive or negative sentiment clearly and accurately.

Automated Feedback Notifications

"As an auto shop owner, I want to receive immediate notifications about customer feedback so that I can address issues promptly and maintain high service standards."

Description

Automated Feedback Notifications will alert shop owners and staff in real-time about new customer feedback submissions. This feature ensures that all feedback is addressed promptly, enhancing customer interaction and response times. The notifications will be customizable, allowing users to set thresholds for alerts based on sentiment scores or specific keywords indicating negative feedback, thereby prioritizing critical feedback that requires immediate attention. This functionality is essential for maintaining high service standards and demonstrating to customers that their feedback is valued and acted upon, thereby fostering customer loyalty.

Acceptance Criteria

Notification Triggers on New Feedback Submission

Given a customer submits feedback, when the feedback is received by the system, then a notification should be sent to the shop owner and relevant staff members in real-time.

Customization of Notification Settings

Given the admin user accesses the notification settings, when they set thresholds for alerts based on sentiment scores or keywords, then these settings should be saved and applied to future feedback submissions.

Display of Feedback Sentiment in Notifications

Given that feedback is submitted, when a notification is triggered, then the notification should clearly display the sentiment score along with the feedback summary to prioritize response actions.

Timely Acknowledgment of Feedback by Staff

Given staff receive a feedback notification, when they view the notification, then they must acknowledge it within 30 minutes to ensure timely response.

Testing Notification Delivery Under High Load

Given a surge in feedback submissions, when multiple submissions occur, then the system should deliver notifications to all designated staff without delays or errors.

Feedback Notification History Access

Given an admin user wishes to review past notifications, when they access the notification history, then they should see a complete list of all sent feedback notifications with timestamps and feedback details.

Feedback Collection Integration

"As an auto shop owner, I want to collect feedback through various channels so that I can gather diverse perspectives and improve my services accordingly."

Description

Feedback Collection Integration requires the seamless incorporation of multiple feedback acquisition methods into the AutoWatch platform, including online surveys, SMS feedback requests, and direct feedback forms. This requirement will facilitate comprehensive collection mechanisms, ensuring shop owners can gather diverse opinions and reviews from customers easily. The integration must provide robust tools for customizing feedback forms to align with the shop's branding and customer engagement strategies. The outcome will empower shop owners with rich data from various sources, providing a holistic view of customer sentiments and facilitating better-informed decisions based on diverse feedback.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer submits feedback through an online survey after a service appointment, and the feedback is captured in the AutoWatch platform.

Given a customer has completed an online survey, when they submit the survey form, then their feedback should be recorded in the AutoWatch database without errors, and a confirmation message should be displayed to the customer.

A shop owner customizes feedback forms to include specific branding elements, and customers respond to these forms.

Given a shop owner has access to the feedback customization tool, when they apply branding elements to a feedback form, then the updates should be reflected in the feedback form displayed to customers, and responses should be accurately attributed to the customized form.

Shop owners receive SMS feedback requests after a service, and customers respond via SMS.

Given that a customer receives an SMS feedback request, when they reply with their feedback, then the response should be captured in the AutoWatch platform and logged against the customer's service record.

Feedback from various sources (online surveys, SMS, direct forms) is aggregated and analyzed by the Feedback Analysis Tool.

Given multiple feedback responses from different channels, when the Feedback Analysis Tool processes this data, then it should generate a report summarizing customer sentiments and highlight prevalent issues or themes for the shop owner.

A shop owner uses analytics to view overall customer satisfaction trends over the past month from feedback collected via different methods.

Given feedback data has been collected over the past month, when the shop owner accesses the analytics dashboard, then they should see visual representations of customer satisfaction trends, including positive and negative feedback percentages.

A customer interacts with a feedback form embedded in the AutoWatch platform during their visit, and submits feedback on their experience.

Given a customer is filling out a feedback form during their visit, when they click 'submit', then the feedback should be recorded immediately in the system, and the customer should receive a thank you notification for their input.

Feedback Export Functionality

"As an auto shop owner, I want to export customer feedback data so that I can analyze it in different formats and share it with my team for better decision-making."

Description

The Feedback Export Functionality allows shop owners to download customer feedback data in various formats, such as CSV or Excel spreadsheets. This feature will support users in conducting further analysis in external tools or sharing data with team members for collaborative discussions or strategic planning. Additionally, this functionality allows for the tracking of historical feedback performance over defined periods, essential for reporting and compliance. It enhances the overall usability of the feedback system by enabling data portability and flexibility to analyze data outside of the AutoWatch platform.

Acceptance Criteria

The shop owner wants to export customer feedback data collected over the past month to analyze trends outside of the AutoWatch platform.

Given the shop owner is logged into the AutoWatch platform, When they navigate to the Feedback Analysis Tool and select the feedback export option, Then they should be able to choose the format (CSV or Excel) and successfully download the feedback data for the past month.

A team member needs to share customer feedback data with a marketing specialist for a campaign strategy meeting.

Given the shop owner successfully exports customer feedback data, When they share the exported file with the marketing specialist, Then the marketing specialist should be able to open and analyze the data in their preferred spreadsheet application without any errors.

The shop owner wants to analyze feedback trends over multiple months to assess performance improvement.

Given the shop owner selects a date range of the last six months in the Feedback Analysis Tool, When they export the feedback data, Then the exported file should include all relevant feedback entries within the selected time frame in the chosen format.

The shop owner is assessing the usability of the Feedback Export Functionality for reporting purposes.

Given the shop owner has exported feedback data, When they review the exported file, Then they should find that all columns match the data fields in the AutoWatch platform (e.g., customer name, feedback date, feedback category).

The shop owner encounters an error while attempting to export feedback data.

Given the shop owner tries to export feedback but encounters an issue, When they receive an error notification with suggested solutions, Then the notification should clearly describe the issue and provide actionable steps to resolve it.

The shop owner wants to ensure that historical feedback performance can be tracked efficiently after exporting data.

Given the shop owner exports historical feedback data, When they choose to view the performance metrics in the AutoWatch platform, Then the metrics should reflect the data exported with consistent time periods for accurate reporting.

Service Rating Trends

This feature visualizes service rating trends over time, allowing shop owners to track performance fluctuations and gauge customer satisfaction levels. With easy-to-read charts and graphs, owners can pinpoint periods of high or low satisfaction and correlate them with business practices, enabling strategic interventions to maintain or enhance service quality.

Requirements

Service Rating Dashboard

"As a shop owner, I want to visualize service rating trends over time so that I can track performance fluctuations and make informed decisions to improve customer satisfaction."

Description

The Service Rating Dashboard provides a comprehensive overview of customer satisfaction scores over specified time periods, displayed through intuitive visual aids like graphs and charts. This dashboard will allow shop owners to easily analyze trends in service ratings, helping them identify peak periods of customer satisfaction and areas needing improvement. Integrating seamlessly with existing customer feedback systems, the dashboard not only enhances data visibility but also supports data-driven decision-making to improve shop performance and customer experience. By monitoring these trends, shop owners can correlate service ratings with operational changes, implementing strategic interventions to enhance service quality consistently.

Acceptance Criteria

Service rating dashboard displays customer satisfaction scores over time periods selected by the shop owner, showing trends for the previous month, quarter, and year.

Given that I am on the Service Rating Dashboard, when I select a time frame (previous month, quarter, or year), then the dashboard should display service rating trends in charts and graphs accurately reflecting customer satisfaction scores for the selected period.

Shop owners can customize the dashboard settings to display specific metrics related to service ratings, such as average rating, highest/lowest ratings, etc.

Given that I am on the Service Rating Dashboard, when I navigate to the settings and select specific metrics to display, then the dashboard should reflect those changes in real-time without errors.

The service rating dashboard integrates with existing customer feedback systems to pull data automatically without manual entry by the shop owner.

Given that the existing customer feedback system is integrated with the dashboard, when new feedback is submitted, then the service rating dashboard should automatically update to reflect the most recent data within 5 minutes.

Shop owners can filter service ratings by specific services performed, allowing them to identify trends in performance related to particular offerings.

Given that I am on the Service Rating Dashboard, when I apply a filter for a specific service, then the displayed trends should only reflect customer satisfaction data related to that service and update instantly.

The dashboard provides actionable insights, suggesting strategic interventions based on identified trends in customer satisfaction.

Given that I am analyzing the service rating trends on the dashboard, when I observe a decline in ratings over a specified period, then the dashboard should provide suggested actions, such as 'Improve Communication' or 'Enhance Service Offerings' to address the issues.

Shop owners can export the service rating data for reporting purposes in various formats (e.g., PDF, CSV, Excel).

Given that I am on the Service Rating Dashboard, when I select the export option, then the export file should be generated successfully in the chosen format, containing all relevant data without loss or corruption.

The dashboard visualizations are accessible and legible for all users, including those with visual impairments, complying with accessibility standards.

Given that I am using the service rating dashboard, when I apply accessibility features such as screen readers or color-blind modes, then all visualizations and texts should remain legible and provide equivalent information without hindrance.

Automated Reporting

"As a shop owner, I want to receive automated reports on service ratings so that I can focus my efforts on improving customer satisfaction without the hassle of manual reporting."

Description

Automated Reporting will generate periodic reports on customer service ratings, detailing performance metrics and trends over time. This feature aims to save time and reduce manual effort in preparing reports by delivering insightful analytics directly to shop owners via email or within the app. Such reports will include comparative analyses to highlight changes in customer satisfaction, ultimately allowing owners to make proactive adjustments to their service strategies. This integration will not only enhance operational efficiency but also support long-term strategic planning based on solid data.

Acceptance Criteria

Automated Reporting generates and sends a performance report to shop owners on a weekly basis.

Given the Automated Reporting feature is set up, when the weekly schedule occurs, then reports should be emailed to all designated shop owners with the correct performance metrics and trends.

Shop owners can access historical service rating reports through the AutoWatch app.

Given the shop owner is logged into the AutoWatch app, when they navigate to the reporting section, then they should be able to view and download past service rating reports for any specified period.

Automated Reporting includes comparative analyses of customer satisfaction ratings.

Given the Automated Reporting feature has run, when the report is generated, then it should include a section that compares current service ratings with previous periods to highlight performance changes.

Reports generated by the Automated Reporting feature are user-friendly and easy to interpret.

Given the report is generated, when the shop owner opens the report, then it should contain visual elements like charts or graphs that clearly present service rating trends and performance metrics.

Shop owners receive notifications if the Automated Reporting fails to generate a report.

Given the Automated Reporting is scheduled, when it fails to produce a report due to any error, then the system should send an immediate notification to the shop owner detailing the issue.

Automated Reporting system updates regularly based on new service rating data.

Given new customer service ratings are entered into the system, when the Automated Reporting feature runs, then it should reflect the most recent data without any manual intervention required.

Customer Feedback Integration

"As a shop owner, I want to automatically collect and analyze customer feedback so that I can identify trends and improve my service delivery based on real-time data."

Description

Customer Feedback Integration will enable the automatic collection of service ratings from various sources such as customer surveys, social media reviews, and direct feedback forms. This feature aims to centralize customer feedback into the AutoWatch platform, providing shop owners with a holistic view of customer sentiments. By utilizing AI-driven analytics, this integration will help identify common themes and issues in customer feedback, facilitating targeted improvements in service delivery. The integration ensures that clients are continuously informed with real-time data, fostering a culture of continual enhancement in service quality.

Acceptance Criteria

Integration of customer feedback from surveys, social media, and direct feedback forms into the AutoWatch platform.

Given the user has set up the customer feedback sources, when feedback is collected, then all data should be accurately reflected in the AutoWatch dashboard.

Analysis of collected customer feedback to identify common themes and issues.

Given the feedback is aggregated, when the user runs the AI analytics report, then it should highlight at least 5 common themes with supporting data for each.

Real-time availability of service ratings on the AutoWatch dashboard.

Given the user is logged into the AutoWatch platform, when they navigate to the service ratings section, then the dashboard should display the most recent service ratings updated within the last 24 hours.

Automated notifications sent to shop owners when customer satisfaction drops below a certain threshold after feedback collection.

Given the feedback is integrated and analyzed, when the average rating drops below a predefined percentage, then the shop owner should receive an automated notification via email and within the platform.

User interface for the shop owner to customize feedback sources and analytics parameters.

Given the user accesses the customization settings, when they add or remove a feedback source, then changes should be saved and reflected in the feedback integration section immediately.

User training on how to interpret the trends and make adjustments based on the feedback data.

Given the training materials have been created, when the user completes the tutorial, then they should be able to interpret trends and suggest changes based on service ratings with at least 80% accuracy.

Historical service rating data available for comparison over periods.

Given the user requests a comparison report, when they specify the timeframes, then the report should generate and display service ratings for both periods side by side for easy comparison.

Customizable Alerts

"As a shop owner, I want to receive customizable alerts on service rating changes so that I can quickly address any issues or optimize my services based on real-time insights."

Description

Customizable Alerts will notify shop owners about significant changes in service ratings or customer feedback trends. This feature will allow users to set thresholds for alerts, receiving instant notifications when ratings fall below a certain level or when notable positive shifts occur. By providing timely insights through notifications, shop owners can react promptly to emerging issues or capitalize on successful practices. This proactive communication tool will ensure that service quality remains a top priority, aligning shop operations more closely with customer expectations.

Acceptance Criteria

Shop owner sets a threshold alert for service ratings, triggering notifications if ratings drop below 3 stars.

Given the shop owner has selected a threshold of 3 stars for service ratings, When the service rating drops below this threshold, Then an instant notification is sent to the shop owner's registered email and app.

Shop owner customizes alerts for positive shifts in customer feedback trends.

Given the shop owner has set alerts for service ratings to notify on increases of 1 star or more, When a rating increases from 3 to 4 stars, Then an instant notification is sent to the shop owner's registered email and app.

Shop owner reviews and modifies existing alert thresholds.

Given the shop owner has set an initial threshold for service ratings, When the shop owner accesses the alert settings, Then they should be able to view, modify or delete the existing threshold settings without any errors.

Notification delivery system is functioning for alert conditions set by the shop owner.

Given that alerts have been configured by the shop owner, When a threshold alert condition is met, Then notifications should be delivered within 5 minutes via email and app notifications without delay or errors.

Shop owner receives a summary report of alerts triggered over the past month.

Given the customizable alert feature is enabled, When the shop owner requests a summary report for the past month, Then the report should accurately reflect all alert instances and include the date, time, and nature of each alert.

User interface accommodates seamless setup for customizable alerts.

Given the user is in the alert setup section, When they navigate through the alert configuration options, Then the interface should be intuitive, and easy to follow with clear instructions for each step of the setup process.

Shop owner assesses the impact of alerts on service quality.

Given that the shop owner has utilized the alerts for 3 months, When they analyze service quality metrics post-alert implementation, Then there should be a measurable improvement in service ratings or customer feedback trends compared to the previous 3 months.

Trend Correlation Analysis

"As a shop owner, I want to analyze how service ratings relate to operational metrics so that I can make data-driven decisions that enhance overall service quality."

Description

Trend Correlation Analysis will provide tools for shop owners to explore the relationship between service ratings and other operational metrics, such as wait times, repair times, and customer interaction quality. By leveraging advanced analytics, this feature will allow for the identification of factors that significantly impact customer satisfaction. Implementing this analysis will empower shop owners to adjust their operational strategies based on empirical evidence, ensuring continuous improvement in service delivery that directly correlates with enhanced customer experiences.

Acceptance Criteria

Shop owners utilize the Service Rating Trends analysis tool to assess past service ratings in relation to customer wait times during the peak season.

Given that service ratings and wait times data are available, when the shop owner accesses the Trend Correlation Analysis tool, then a correlation graph between service ratings and wait times should be displayed, allowing for visual interpretation of the data.

Shop owners want to identify how customer interaction quality impacts service ratings using the Trend Correlation Analysis feature.

Given that service ratings and customer interaction quality data are available, when the shop owner inputs the relevant data into the Trend Correlation Analysis tool, then the system should generate a report highlighting the correlation coefficient between customer interaction quality and service ratings.

After implementing operational changes based on identified trends, shop owners check if there is an improvement in service ratings over the next quarter.

Given a set of operational changes implemented based on previous Trend Correlation Analysis, when the owner reviews the service ratings after three months, then there should be a positive increase in service ratings compared to the previous quarter, as reflected in a comparison report.

Shop owners analyze how seasonal promotions affect service satisfaction levels over the span of the year.

Given that seasonal promotion data and service ratings are tracked, when the shop owner requests a Trend Correlation Analysis of seasonal promotions against service ratings, then a detailed chart indicating the impact of promotions on service ratings throughout the year should be generated and visually presented.

Shop owners need to compare regular service ratings with ratings during promotional campaigns to understand campaign effectiveness.

Given historical service ratings and promotional campaign periods, when the owner utilizes the Trend Correlation Analysis feature, then they should be able to view a side-by-side comparison of service ratings during regular periods versus promotional periods in a clear graphical format.

Customer Journey Insights

Customer Journey Insights maps out the entire customer interaction experience, from booking to service completion. This feature highlights key touchpoints and customer responses at each stage, providing invaluable perspective on customer engagement and highlighting opportunities for improvement in service processes.

Requirements

Touchpoint Mapping

"As a shop owner, I want to visualize the customer touchpoints in our service journey so that I can identify areas for improvement in customer interactions and enhance customer satisfaction."

Description

The Touchpoint Mapping requirement involves developing a visual representation of all the essential interactions between the customer and the auto repair shop throughout their journey. This includes stages from initial booking, service notifications, and feedback requests. This feature aims to help shop owners identify critical moments in the customer experience, understand customer sentiment at each stage, and ensure that they meet customer expectations effectively. By illustrating these touchpoints, the shop can implement improvements and optimize communication strategies, ultimately enhancing customer satisfaction and loyalty.

Acceptance Criteria

Initial booking process when a customer schedules a service online through AutoWatch.

Given a customer accesses the booking interface, When they select a service and submit their booking, Then a confirmation notification should be sent to the customer, and the booking should appear in the shop's schedule.

During the service notification phase where updates are communicated to the customer about their vehicle's status.

Given a service is underway, When the shop updates the status of the vehicle's service, Then the customer should receive an automated notification with the status update within 10 minutes.

Feedback request sent to the customer after they pick up their vehicle.

Given a customer has completed their service and picked up their vehicle, When the feedback request email is sent, Then it should include a link to a survey and be sent within 24 hours of pickup.

Mapping the customer interactions visually for a shop owner to review all key touchpoints.

Given all customer interactions have been logged, When a shop owner views the Touchpoint Mapping dashboard, Then all touchpoints should be displayed clearly from booking to feedback including durations and sentiments.

Identifying areas for improvement in customer interaction after analyzing feedback data.

Given feedback data has been collected for a set period, When the shop owner reviews the analysis, Then the system should highlight at least three key areas for service improvement based on customer sentiments.

Real-time monitoring of customer touchpoints during an ongoing service process.

Given a service is currently in progress, When the customer accesses their account, Then they should see real-time updates of their vehicle's repair status and estimated completion time.

Integrating customer journey insights with marketing automation tools for targeted follow-ups.

Given a customer has completed a service, When the Touchpoint Mapping identifies a critical touchpoint for follow-up, Then a targeted marketing email should be automatically queued for sending within 48 hours of service completion.

Feedback Loop Integration

"As a customer, I want to easily provide feedback on my service experience so that the shop can improve their services based on my suggestions."

Description

The Feedback Loop Integration requirement focuses on establishing a mechanism for collecting customer feedback at various stages of the service process. This feature will allow customers to provide instant feedback digitally or through automated text messages after key interactions, such as booking confirmation and service completion. By integrating feedback systems into the customer journey, the shop can receive real-time insights into customer satisfaction, pinpoint service gaps, and adjust their processes to better meet customer needs.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer provides feedback after booking confirmation via automated text message.

Given a customer books a service, When the booking is confirmed, Then an automated text message is sent to the customer requesting feedback on their booking experience and the customer can submit their feedback within 24 hours.

Customer receives a feedback request after service completion via digital platform.

Given a customer completes a service, When the service is marked as complete in the system, Then a digital feedback request is sent to the customer through the AutoWatch platform, and the customer can submit their feedback within 24 hours.

Shop owner reviews compiled customer feedback metrics for service improvements.

Given the feedback collected from customers, When the shop owner accesses the feedback dashboard in AutoWatch, Then the dashboard displays a visual summary of customer satisfaction metrics and identifiable service gaps based on the collected feedback.

Feedback submission prompts an acknowledgment response to the customer.

Given a customer submits feedback, When the feedback is successfully recorded in the system, Then an acknowledgment response is sent to the customer thanking them for their feedback.

Integration of feedback collection into the existing customer journey.

Given the customer journey insights feature is active, When feedback collection mechanisms are integrated at key touchpoints, Then the system successfully captures customer feedback without disrupting the service process.

Automatic categorization of feedback into actionable insights for the shop owner.

Given the feedback is collected, When the feedback is analyzed by the system, Then it categorizes feedback into positive, negative, and neutral insights, which the shop owner can review for further action.

Engagement Analytics Dashboard

"As a shop owner, I want to review engagement analytics to understand customer satisfaction trends, so that I can make data-driven decisions to enhance service quality."

Description

The Engagement Analytics Dashboard requirement entails creating a central interface for shop owners to review and analyze customer engagement data throughout the customer journey. This will include visual reports on customer responses at each touchpoint, satisfaction scores, and feedback trends over time. By having access to this comprehensive data, shop owners can make informed decisions and adaptations to their service strategies, ensuring they continuously improve their customer experience and retain clients effectively.

Acceptance Criteria

Engagement Analytics Dashboard displays visual reports on customer engagement data for a specific time period, allowing shop owners to analyze trends.

Given the shop owner selects a specific date range, when they access the Engagement Analytics Dashboard, then visual reports for customer responses, satisfaction scores, and feedback trends during that period should be accurately displayed.

The Engagement Analytics Dashboard presents satisfaction scores that reflect customer feedback seamlessly integrated from various touchpoints.

Given a customer completes a service, when the satisfaction score data is updated in the dashboard, then the satisfaction score should accurately reflect the average feedback rating of all completed services over the past month.

Shop owners receive real-time notifications on significant changes in customer engagement metrics, allowing for prompt response to customer needs.

Given that there is a 20% decrease in customer satisfaction scores, when this change occurs, then the shop owner should receive an automated notification within one hour to address the issue.

The dashboard enables shop owners to export engagement reports in multiple formats for easy sharing and analysis with team members or stakeholders.

Given the shop owner is on the Engagement Analytics Dashboard, when they choose to export the report, then the report should be available in at least three formats: PDF, Excel, and CSV without loss of data integrity.

The Engagement Analytics Dashboard provides filters for shop owners to segment customer engagement data based on various demographics such as age and service type.

Given the shop owner applies the demographic filter on the Dashboard, when they select a specific age group and service type, then only the relevant engagement data should be displayed on the dashboard.

The Engagement Analytics Dashboard displays a user-friendly interface with intuitive navigation for accessing various engagement metrics.

Given the shop owner accesses the dashboard, when they navigate through different sections, then the interface should be responsive and allow easy access to all key metrics without confusion.

The Engagement Analytics Dashboard incorporates data visualization techniques to enhance understanding of customer engagement metrics.

Given the shop owner is viewing the dashboard, when they examine the engagement metrics, then there should be appropriate visual representations such as graphs and charts for clarity of insights.

Customer Notifications System

"As a customer, I want to receive timely notifications about my service appointments so that I can stay informed and prepared for my visit to the shop."

Description

The Customer Notifications System requirement is designed to automate communication with customers at critical points in their service journey, such as booking confirmations, service reminders, and follow-up messages post-service. By implementing this feature, auto repair shops can ensure that customers are informed and engaged throughout their journey, which enhances transparency and improves overall customer satisfaction. This system aims to reduce missed appointments and improve feedback rates by keeping customers informed and connected.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer receives a booking confirmation via email immediately after scheduling an appointment through the AutoWatch platform.

Given that a customer schedules an appointment, When the scheduling is completed, Then the customer should receive an email confirmation within 5 minutes.

Customers are sent service reminders 24 hours before their scheduled appointment to reduce no-shows.

Given that an appointment is scheduled, When the scheduled appointment is 24 hours away, Then the customer should receive a text message reminder.

After service completion, customers receive a follow-up email requesting feedback on their experience.

Given that a service has been completed, When the completion of the service is recorded in the system, Then the customer should receive a feedback request email within 1 hour of service completion.

Customers can opt-in or opt-out of receiving notifications through their user profile settings.

Given that a customer accesses their profile settings, When they choose to change their notification preferences, Then the system should update their preferences immediately and reflect the changes in future notifications.

The system logs all sent notifications for audit and analysis purposes.

Given that a notification has been sent, When the notification is processed, Then it should be recorded in the system's log with a timestamp and status of the delivery success.

Personalized Experience Feature

"As a customer, I want to receive personalized service recommendations that suit my needs, so that I feel valued and understood by the shop."

Description

The Personalized Experience Feature requirement focuses on utilizing customer data to customize interactions based on past behavior and preferences. This feature will allow shop owners to tailor service recommendations and communication styles for individual customers, providing a more personal touch that builds customer loyalty and satisfaction. By leveraging data analytics to create personalized journeys, the shop can offer services that align with customer expectations, fostering better relationships.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer receives personalized service recommendations after booking an appointment online.

Given a customer selects their vehicle type and previous service history when booking an appointment, When the booking is submitted, Then the customer should receive three personalized service recommendations via email that align with their vehicle's needs.

Customer is notified about service updates based on their preferences.

Given a customer has opted in for communication preferences and service updates, When a change occurs during the service process, Then the customer should receive an SMS update reflecting their preferred communication method in real-time.

Shop owner utilizes customer behavior data to create tailored marketing campaigns.

Given the shop owner accesses the marketing dashboard, When they apply customer data filters based on past service interactions, Then they should be able to generate a customized campaign that targets customers with relevant promotions.

Customer provides feedback on personalized service experience.

Given that a customer completes a service after receiving personalized recommendations, When they receive a follow-up survey, Then they should be able to submit feedback with a rating of their satisfaction level regarding the personalization of their experience.

Shop owner reviews the impact of personalized communications on customer retention rates.

Given a defined period to analyze customer retention, When the shop owner analyzes the metrics, Then they should see an increase of at least 15% in repeat customers who received personalized communications versus those who did not.

System prompts users to update preferences at least once a year.

Given that a customer has not updated their communication preferences in over a year, When they log into their account, Then the system should prompt them to review and update their preferences to ensure continued relevance.

Customer receives a birthday greeting with a tailored service offer.

Given a customer's birthday is approaching, When the system schedules an automated birthday greeting, Then the customer should receive an email including a special service offer based on previous services utilized.

Comparative Performance Metrics

This feature provides comparative performance metrics benchmarking against industry standards or similar businesses. Shop owners can analyze how their satisfaction scores stack up against peers, fostering a competitive spirit while identifying areas to excel and innovate for better customer service.

Requirements

Performance Benchmarking Dashboard

"As a shop owner, I want to access a performance benchmarking dashboard so that I can compare my shop's metrics against industry peers and recognize areas for improvement in customer satisfaction and efficiency."

Description

The Benchmarking Dashboard will provide a centralized interface that displays comparative performance metrics for auto repair shops. This requirement entails developing visual representations of data, such as graphs and charts, to help shop owners understand their operational performance against industry standards and competitors. The dashboard will compile key performance indicators (KPIs) including customer satisfaction scores, service times, and sales figures. This feature will enhance the decision-making process by allowing users to visualize their performance over time, identify trends, and spot areas for improvement. Integration with the existing data collection systems will be vital to ensure an accurate and real-time analysis of performance metrics, thus driving actionable insights and enabling shop owners to make informed modifications to enhance service quality and operational efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

Shop owner accesses the Performance Benchmarking Dashboard to review their customer satisfaction scores and compares them against industry averages.

Given the shop owner is logged into the AutoWatch platform, when they navigate to the Performance Benchmarking Dashboard, then they should see their customer satisfaction scores displayed alongside industry averages and a visual representation such as a bar graph.

A shop owner wants to review their service times and understand how they stack up against competitors in their area.

Given the shop owner is on the Performance Benchmarking Dashboard, when they select the service times metric, then the dashboard should display a chart that compares their service times to those of similar businesses within the industry.

A shop owner checks their sales figures over the past quarter to identify trends and areas for improvement.

Given the shop owner accesses the Performance Benchmarking Dashboard, when they filter the data to show sales figures for the past quarter, then they should be able to view a line graph indicating sales trends over time with comparative industry performance for the same period.

The shop owner desires a summary report that consolidates their KPIs into an easy-to-read format.

Given the shop owner is viewing the Performance Benchmarking Dashboard, when they request a summary report, then they should receive a downloadable PDF that includes key performance indicators such as customer satisfaction scores, average service times, and sales figures with comparative metrics.

A shop owner intends to customize their dashboard view to focus on specific metrics that matter most to their business.

Given the shop owner is on the Performance Benchmarking Dashboard, when they click on the customization options, then they should be able to select and rearrange the KPIs displayed on their dashboard according to their preferences.

The shop owner wants to receive notifications if their performance metrics fall below a certain threshold.

Given the shop owner has set performance thresholds in their dashboard settings, when their metrics fall below those thresholds, then they should receive an automated alert via email or app notification alerting them of the change.

Customer Feedback Loop

"As a shop owner, I want to implement a customer feedback collection system so that I can gather insights on customer satisfaction and use that data to enhance my services and compare against industry standards."

Description

The Customer Feedback Loop requirement focuses on the integration of a mechanism for collecting and analyzing customer feedback following their service experience. This feature will include tools for survey distribution, feedback collection, and data aggregation. The goal is to understand customer satisfaction levels in reference to various service attributes like speed, quality, and overall experience. The collected data will contribute to the comparative performance metrics, allowing shop owners to see how their customer feedback stands against industry benchmarks. Effective implementation will not only enhance the service level but also provide valuable insights, leading to improved customer experiences and loyalty.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer Feedback Submission Post-Service Interaction

Given a customer has completed a service, when they receive a feedback survey via email, then they should be able to submit their feedback rating on a scale of 1 to 5 for service speed, quality, and overall experience, which is successfully recorded in the system.

Feedback Data Aggregation for Performance Metrics

Given customer feedback has been collected, when it is aggregated for analysis, then the system should display overall satisfaction scores and key metrics that can be compared against industry benchmarks.

Notification of Feedback Completion to Shop Owners

Given a customer has submitted their feedback, when the feedback is processed, then the shop owner should receive a notification summarizing the customer ratings and comments for that service.

Ease of Access to Feedback Reports

Given that feedback has been collected over a period, when the shop owner accesses the analytics dashboard, then they should be able to view and filter feedback reports by date, service type, and performance metrics.

Survey Customization Options for Different Services

Given the need for tailored feedback, when the shop owner accesses the feedback loop settings, then they should be able to customize survey questions based on different service types and customer demographics.

Integration of Feedback into Performance Metrics Dashboard

Given customer feedback data has been collected, when the shop owner reviews the performance metrics dashboard, then the dashboard should include a dedicated section for customer satisfaction scores and trends over time.

User Training for Effective Use of Feedback Mechanism

Given the implementation of the feedback loop, when training sessions are conducted for shop owners and employees, then at least 90% of participants should report understanding how to utilize the feedback system effectively for enhanced service quality.

Real-time Performance Notifications

"As a shop owner, I want to receive real-time notifications about my performance metrics so that I can respond quickly to any changes and maintain high service quality."

Description

The Real-time Performance Notifications requirement aims to create a system that alerts shop owners whenever their performance metrics fluctuate beyond set benchmarks. This includes notifications for both positive and negative performance changes, enabling shop owners to react quickly to emerging trends. The notifications can be customized based on user-defined thresholds for specific metrics such as customer satisfaction scores or service turnaround times. By facilitating immediate awareness of performance status, this requirement empowers shop owners to take proactive measures, address potential issues rapidly, or replicate successful strategies based on high performance. The feature will enhance operational agility and responsiveness, contributing significantly to customer satisfaction and retention.

Acceptance Criteria

Shop owners receive notifications for customer satisfaction scores that fall below the predefined threshold, prompting them to investigate and address any issues.

Given the shop owner has set a threshold for customer satisfaction scores, when the satisfaction score drops below that threshold, then a notification is sent to the shop owner immediately via their preferred communication method (email, SMS, etc.).

Shop owners are notified when their service turnaround times improve and exceed their predefined performance benchmarks, allowing them to capitalize on this success.

Given the shop owner has established a benchmark for service turnaround time, when the turnaround time is recorded as being superior to that benchmark, then a positive performance notification is dispatched to the shop owner.

Notifications are customized based on user-defined thresholds for both positive and negative performance changes, ensuring relevance and practical response options for shop owners.

Given that shop owners can set individual thresholds for various performance metrics, when these thresholds are breached (either positively or negatively), then the system sends them relevant notifications that provide actionable insights for each specific instance.

Shop owners receive real-time performance notifications on their mobile devices, allowing them to stay informed while away from their desks.

Given the real-time performance notifications feature is enabled, when a performance metric fluctuates beyond the set thresholds, then the notification is received on the shop owner's registered mobile device within 5 minutes.

A summary report is generated weekly, compiling all the performance notifications received, helping shop owners track trends and actions taken.

Given that shop owners opt for weekly summaries, when the week concludes, then a report is generated detailing all notifications received regarding performance metrics, highlighting actions taken by the owner in response.

Competitive Analysis Reporting

"As a shop owner, I want to generate competitive analysis reports so that I can understand my standing in the industry and develop strategies to improve our performance and service offerings."

Description

The Competitive Analysis Reporting requirement includes the development of a report generation tool that allows shop owners to generate detailed reports comparing their performance to that of similar businesses in the industry. This tool will encompass an analysis of various metrics across a set timeframe, offering insights into market positioning. The report will assist shop owners in identifying strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats in relation to their competitors. Implementation will involve the integration of market data and potentially external sources to provide a holistic view of the competitive landscape. By understanding their place in the market, shop owners can formulate strategies to boost performance and customer satisfaction based on real-world benchmarks.

Acceptance Criteria

Shop owner initiates a request to generate a competitive analysis report to understand how their performance stacks against competitors in the auto repair industry.

Given the shop owner is logged into the AutoWatch platform, when they select the 'Generate Competitive Analysis Report' option, then the system should create a report that includes performance metrics for at least the last six months, comparing the shop's metrics against industry standards and three similar businesses.

After generating a competitive analysis report, the shop owner views the report to identify areas where they outperform or underperform compared to competitors.

Given a report has been generated, when the shop owner views the report, then it should display key performance indicators (KPIs) such as customer satisfaction, average repair time, and revenue, with clear visual indicators (charts/graphs) for comparison.

The shop owner needs to export the generated competitive analysis report for sharing with their team during a strategy meeting.

Given the report is displayed, when the shop owner selects the 'Export Report' option, then the system should generate a PDF file of the report that is downloadable and includes all relevant charts and metrics accurately summarized.

The shop owner accesses historical performance data to compare it within the competitive analysis report.

Given the shop owner has access to historical performance data, when they select previous timeframes in the report generation tool, then the system should allow comparisons across different time periods, highlighting trends and changes in performance over time.

The shop owner looks to integrate external market data into their competitive analysis report for a more comprehensive view.

Given the competitive analysis tool is equipped with integration capabilities, when the shop owner configures the tool to pull in external market data from at least two verified APIs, then the generated report should reflect this data alongside internal performance metrics.

Following the generation of a competitive analysis report, the shop owner wants to receive automated notifications for any significant changes in competitor performance metrics.

Given the shop owner has opted into notifications, when any competitor's metrics significantly change, then the system should send automated alerts to the shop owner summarizing the changes and potential implications for their business.

Historical Performance Analytics

"As a shop owner, I want to analyze my shop's historical performance data so that I can identify trends and make informed decisions for future improvements and strategies."

Description

The Historical Performance Analytics requirement focuses on creating a robust analytics engine that allows shop owners to view and analyze their performance data over time. This includes the ability to track historical trends in key metrics such as sales, customer feedback, and service completion times. Users will be able to isolate specific periods to see how changes in operations or marketing strategies have impacted their performance. By providing this historical context, the analytics engine will enable shop owners to make data-driven decisions regarding future operational strategies and investments. It will bolster long-term planning and strategy formulation based on empirical data, enhancing the shop's sustainability and growth potentials.

Acceptance Criteria

Shop owners want to access and analyze their performance data for the last quarter to understand the trends in customer feedback and service completion times.

Given the shop owner selects the last quarter in the historical analytics dashboard, when they view the performance metrics, then they should see a comparative analysis of sales, customer feedback, and service completion times for that period.

A shop owner needs to isolate specific periods to analyze the impact of a recent marketing campaign on their sales.

Given the shop owner selects a custom date range that aligns with the marketing campaign, when they generate the report, then they should receive data showing the total sales and customer acquisition during that period compared to the previous period.

The shop owner desires to understand how their service completion times compare to industry benchmarks over the past year.

Given the shop owner accesses the comparative performance metrics section, when they select the past year for analysis, then they should see their average service completion times displayed alongside industry benchmarks for contextual comparison.

A shop owner wants to track historical trends in customer satisfaction scores over the last two years to gauge improvements.

Given the shop owner navigates to the historical performance metrics section and selects the last two years, when they view their customer satisfaction scores, then they should see a graphical representation of trends indicating growth or decline over that period.

Shop owners are interested in viewing the relationship between sales fluctuations and their marketing efforts throughout the historical data available.

Given the shop owner retrieves historical sales data, when they apply filters for marketing efforts, then they should see a correlation graph showing the effect of marketing campaigns on sales fluctuations.

The shop owner needs to evaluate the effectiveness of operational changes on performance metrics.

Given the shop owner adjusts operational strategies and saves changes, when they access historical performance metrics, then they should be able to see the key metric changes reflected in the dashboard, comparing data from before and after the changes.

A shop owner is using the analytics engine to prepare a presentation on performance improvements for stakeholders.

Given the shop owner generates a performance report from the analytics engine, when they download the report, then the report should include key metrics, trends, and visual aids clearly summarized for easy presentation.

Real-time Alerts and Notifications

Real-time Alerts and Notifications keep shop owners informed of significant changes in customer satisfaction levels or sudden drops in service ratings. By promptly alerting management to potential issues, this feature enables swift responses to enhance customer services and mitigate dissatisfaction.

Requirements

Customer Satisfaction Monitoring

"As a shop owner, I want to monitor customer satisfaction in real-time so that I can quickly address any issues before they escalate and ensure positive customer experiences."

Description

The Customer Satisfaction Monitoring requirement involves setting up a system that continuously tracks customer satisfaction levels through feedback forms, surveys, and ratings. This requirement aims to gather real-time data that reflects customer experiences and highlights areas for improvement. By integrating this feature within AutoWatch, management can enhance decision-making processes through actionable insights delivered in an easy-to-understand dashboard. The system will alert management of significant changes in customer feedback, allowing for swift corrective actions to prevent long-term dissatisfaction and improve service quality.

Acceptance Criteria

As a shop owner, I need to receive real-time alerts when customer satisfaction ratings drop below a predefined threshold, so that I can take immediate action to resolve issues and improve service quality.

Given the customer satisfaction monitoring system is in place, when the average customer rating drops below 3 out of 5, then an alert is sent to the management team's email within 5 minutes.

As a customer service manager, I want to view a dashboard of customer feedback ratings to identify trends in satisfaction over time, enabling us to make more informed decisions about service improvements.

Given that customer feedback has been collected, when I access the dashboard, then I should see the average customer satisfaction rating displayed along with a trend graph for at least the last 3 months.

As a shop owner, I need to receive notifications when a customer submits a feedback form, so that I can quickly address any concerns raised and improve customer relationships.

Given a customer submits a feedback form, when the form is submitted, then a notification is sent to the shop owner's mobile app immediately after submission.

As a management team, we want to set up alerts for significant changes in customer satisfaction ratings, ensuring we can react swiftly during service quality fluctuations.

Given the customer satisfaction tracking system is operational, when a significant change of more than 1 point occurs in the average rating within a week, then an alert is triggered and sent to the management team.

As a shop owner, I need to filter customer feedback by service type on the dashboard, so I can pinpoint which services have the highest and lowest satisfaction ratings.

Given I am on the customer feedback dashboard, when I select a specific service type from the filter options, then only the relevant feedback for that service type is displayed, along with the average rating.

As a service manager, I want to compile weekly reports on customer satisfaction levels based on collected data to assess the effectiveness of any service improvements made.

Given that customer feedback has been collected over the past week, when I generate the weekly report, then it should include average ratings, total feedback received, and any notable trends or comments in a downloadable format.

Service Rating Alerts

"As a shop manager, I want to receive alerts when service ratings drop so that I can take immediate action to investigate and resolve service issues."

Description

This requirement focuses on creating alerts that notify shop management when service ratings fall below a pre-defined threshold. By integrating this feature within AutoWatch, shop owners will be promptly informed of any decline in service quality as highlighted by customer feedback. The alerts will provide specific insights about the service leading to low ratings, allowing the management team to dive into operational issues immediately. The ultimate goal is to ensure continuous improvement in service and maintain high customer satisfaction levels.

Acceptance Criteria

Service Rating Drops Below Threshold Alert Notification

Given a shop management system with service rating thresholds set, when a service rating falls below the defined threshold, then an alert notification should be sent to the shop owner via email and SMS within 5 minutes.

Detailed Service Insights in Alerts

Given an alert is triggered for a low service rating, when the alert is sent to the management team, then the alert should include specific information such as service type, customer feedback comments, and rating score in the notification.

Historical Rating Comparison

Given that a service rating alert has been triggered, when the shop owner opens the alert details, then a comparison of current service rating with historical data for the past 6 months should be displayed to identify trends.

Response Acknowledgment upon Receiving Alerts

Given that an alert notification has been sent to the shop management, when the shop owner acknowledges the alert by clicking an 'Acknowledge' button, then the system should log the acknowledgment timestamp and optionally allow for notes to be added.

Escalation Process for Unacknowledged Alerts

Given an alert notification for a low service rating remains unacknowledged for more than 1 hour, when the shop owner hasn't responded, then an escalation email should automatically be sent to the shop owner's supervisor or designated manager.

User Customization of Alert Thresholds

Given a shop owner accesses the settings page, when they adjust the threshold limits for service rating alerts, then the system should save the updated thresholds and reflect these changes in the alerting mechanism immediately after saving.

Feedback Loop for Alert Effectiveness

Given a service rating alert has been triggered and addressed, when the shop owner resolves the service issue, then a follow-up survey should be sent to the affected customer to gather feedback on service improvements made in response to the initial low rating alert.

Automated Notification System

"As a business owner, I want to receive automated notifications about changes in customer sentiment so that I can proactively engage with my customers and improve their experiences."

Description

The Automated Notification System requirement entails the development of a feature that sends timely notifications to shop owners regarding significant shifts in customer sentiment based on collected data. This feature will analyze satisfaction metrics and trends, automatically triggering alerts for sudden changes. Implementing this within the AutoWatch platform allows for proactive engagement with customers based on the feedback analysis. This can lead to better relationship management, ensuring that issues are addressed before they result in customer churn.

Acceptance Criteria

Notification Triggering During Service Rating Decline

Given that customer satisfaction data is being continuously monitored, When there is a sudden drop in service ratings below a predefined threshold, Then an automated notification should be sent to shop owners within 5 minutes of the data event occurring.

Daily Summary Alerts for Customer Sentiment

Given that the automated notification system is implemented, When the end of the day arrives, Then a summary report of customer sentiment trends should be generated and sent to the shop owner via email.

Real-time Alerts for Customer Feedback Changes

Given that customer feedback is being collected in real-time, When a significant change in feedback is detected (positive or negative), Then an immediate alert should be sent to the shop owner via the application dashboard and as a push notification on their mobile app.

Alert Escalation for Unresolved Issues

Given that an alert regarding customer sentiment has been triggered, When there is no action taken by the shop owner within 24 hours, Then an escalation notification should be sent to the shop manager or a designated team member.

User Interface for Managing Notifications

Given that the automated notification system is operational, When a shop owner accesses the notification management interface, Then they should be able to customize notification settings, including thresholds for alerts and preferred alert channels (email, SMS, in-app notifications).

Feedback Loop Confirmation from Shop Owner

Given that an alert has been sent regarding customer sentiment, When the shop owner interacts with the notification, Then there should be a confirmation mechanism for the shop owner to acknowledge receipt and action taken on the notification.

Feedback Analysis Dashboard

"As a shop owner, I want to have a visual representation of customer feedback trends so that I can easily identify areas for improvement to enhance service quality."

Description

The Feedback Analysis Dashboard will provide an intuitive interface for shop owners to visualize customer feedback and service ratings over time. This requirement focuses on collating data from customer interactions and presenting it in a user-friendly format—such as graphs or heat maps—allowing for easy identification of trends and issues. Integration within AutoWatch will enable shop owners to analyze feedback efficiently and derive actionable insights to refine their operations, enhancing customer satisfaction and driving service improvements.

Acceptance Criteria

Real-time analysis of customer feedback gathered after service completion.

Given that a customer has completed a service and provided feedback, when the shop owner accesses the Feedback Analysis Dashboard, then they should see the latest customer feedback reflected in real time and visible trends over the last month should be updated accordingly.

Visual representation of service ratings over the last six months.

Given that the shop owner wants to analyze service ratings, when they open the Feedback Analysis Dashboard, then they should see a graph displaying service ratings for the past six months, with clear indicators for the highest and lowest ratings received.

Identification of trends in customer feedback through visual heat maps.

Given that feedback data has been aggregated, when the shop owner views the heat map on the Feedback Analysis Dashboard, then they should be able to easily identify areas of concern that are indicated by color variations representing customer satisfaction levels across different service types.

Customizable dashboard layout for shop owners.

Given that a shop owner wants to personalize their dashboard preferences, when they access the dashboard settings, then they should be able to customize the arrangement of various visual elements such as graphs and heat maps to their liking.

Accessibility of historical feedback data for analysis.

Given that historical feedback data is stored, when the shop owner navigates to the Feedback Analysis Dashboard, then they should be able to retrieve and view feedback data from the past year, allowing for comparative analysis with current data.

Notification of significant drops in service ratings.

Given that the feature of Real-time Alerts and Notifications is active, when a service rating drops below the threshold defined by the shop owner, then an immediate alert should be sent to the owner’s dashboard as well as via email.

Integration with existing inventory and customer management systems.

Given that AutoWatch needs to interface with other systems, when the Feedback Analysis Dashboard is accessed, then it should seamlessly sync with the inventory and customer management systems in place, ensuring data consistency across platforms.

Incident Response Protocol

"As a shop manager, I want to have a clear incident response protocol for handling customer satisfaction alerts so that my team can respond effectively to service issues."

Description

The Incident Response Protocol defines the steps to be taken when alerts regarding falling customer satisfaction are triggered. This requirement includes guidelines on how to address specific service failures, escalate issues to the right personnel, and track the resolution process. Including this functionality in AutoWatch will help standardize the response to service issues, ensuring that management responds swiftly and effectively to preserve customer relationships and business reputation.

Acceptance Criteria

Triggering Alerts for Customer Satisfaction Drops

Given a drop in customer satisfaction ratings, when the threshold is breached, then an alert should be sent to the management's dashboard immediately.

Escalation of Service Failures

Given an incident alert regarding service failure, when the issue is not resolved within 30 minutes, then the system should automatically escalate the issue to the designated senior staff member.

Tracking Resolution Process of Alerts

Given that an incident alert has been triggered, when management initiates a response, then the timeline of actions taken must be logged and accessible for review.

Customer Notification of Actions Taken

Given a resolution action has been initiated for service failure, when the action is completed, then any affected customers must receive a notification outlining the steps taken to address their concerns.

Reporting on Incident Response Effectiveness

Given multiple incidents have been logged, when the reporting tool is accessed, then management should be able to view metrics and analysis on response times and resolution outcomes for the last month.

User Training on Incident Response Protocol

Given new staff are onboarded, when training is completed, then each user must pass a knowledge retention assessment on the Incident Response Protocol with an accuracy of 90% or better.

Integration with Existing Systems for Alert Management

Given the requirement to integrate with existing business systems, when an alert is triggered, then it should be reflected in all other operational platforms used by the business in real-time.

Actionable Insights Toolkit

The Actionable Insights Toolkit gives users tailored recommendations based on customer feedback and service performance. From staff training suggestions to process enhancements, this feature transforms raw data into practical strategies that directly contribute to improved customer satisfaction.

Requirements

Customer Feedback Analysis

"As an auto repair shop manager, I want to analyze customer feedback easily so that I can identify areas for improvement and enhance customer satisfaction."

Description

The Customer Feedback Analysis requirement involves gathering, categorizing, and analyzing customer feedback data collected through various platforms such as surveys and direct comments. This functionality will enable the Actionable Insights Toolkit to convert qualitative feedback into quantitative data, thus identifying key trends and areas for improvement. Integration with the existing system ensures that managers have a comprehensive understanding of customer sentiments and can tailor service improvements accordingly. Its primary benefit lies in enhancing the shop's response to customer needs, ultimately leading to increased satisfaction and retention rates.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer Feedback is Gathered and Categorized from Multiple Platforms

Given customer feedback is collected from surveys and direct comments, when the feedback is analyzed, then it should be categorized into predefined sentiments (positive, negative, neutral) and key themes are identified with at least 80% accuracy.

Integration of Feedback with Actionable Insights Toolkit

Given that customer feedback has been successfully categorized, when the data is integrated with the Actionable Insights Toolkit, then users should receive tailored recommendations for service improvements based on identified trends within 24 hours.

Feedback Analysis Report Generation

Given that customer feedback has been analyzed, when the report is generated, then it should provide a summary of key trends, customer sentiment scores, and actionable items which can be exported in PDF format.

Real-Time Notifications for Managers on Customer Feedback Trends

Given that real-time feedback is available, when a significant trend (positive or negative) is detected, then managers should receive an automatic notification within 5 minutes of the trend emerging.

User Interface for Viewing Customer Feedback Summary

Given the Customer Feedback Analysis feature is accessed, when a user navigates to the feedback summary page, then they should find a user-friendly interface displaying metrics such as average sentiment score, top three customer concerns, and service performance indicators.

Follow-Up Actions Based on Customer Feedback

Given that a feedback report is generated, when a user selects an actionable insight, then the system should allow them to create a follow-up task with deadlines assigned for implementation within 48 hours.

Performance Metrics Dashboard

"As a shop owner, I want to have a performance metrics dashboard so that I can easily visualize our operational efficiency and make data-driven decisions to improve our service."

Description

The Performance Metrics Dashboard will consolidate key performance indicators (KPIs) related to service performance, staff efficiency, and customer satisfaction into a single, user-friendly interface. This requirement focuses on visual representation of data points, enabling users to quickly interpret trends and make informed decisions based on real-time data. Integration with existing reporting systems will ensure that actionable insights are derived from historical data and present operational performance in an accessible format. The dashboard aims to facilitate better strategic planning and quicker response times in addressing customer issues.

Acceptance Criteria

User navigates to the Performance Metrics Dashboard to review service performance for the past month.

Given the user has logged into the AutoWatch platform, when they access the Performance Metrics Dashboard, then they should see key performance indicators including service completion rates, customer satisfaction scores, and employee efficiency metrics displayed clearly and accurately.

User wants to filter performance metrics by specific time frames and services.

Given the user is on the Performance Metrics Dashboard, when they select a filter for the last quarter and choose 'Oil Change' under services, then the dashboard should update to show only the relevant metrics for that service and time period.

User expects to receive visual representations of data trends on the dashboard.

Given the user is viewing the Performance Metrics Dashboard, when they look at the graphical representation of KPIs, then they should see line charts for trends, pie charts for distribution, and bar graphs for comparisons, all updating in real-time as data changes.

User wants to utilize historical data for strategic planning.

Given the user has accessed the Performance Metrics Dashboard, when they view historical data points from the last year, then they should be able to select and export this data into a CSV format for external analysis.

User looks for actionable insights derived from displayed metrics.

Given the user is on the Performance Metrics Dashboard, when they click on any specific KPI, then the platform should provide actionable recommendations based on the selected performance metric to improve operations.

User needs to integrate data from existing reporting systems with the new dashboard.

Given the user has linked their existing reporting systems, when they refresh the Performance Metrics Dashboard, then the dashboard should display updated metrics reflecting the latest data from the integrated sources.

User wants to assess the responsiveness of the dashboard during peak usage times.

Given multiple users are logging into the Performance Metrics Dashboard simultaneously, when any user accesses the dashboard, then all users should experience loading times of less than 3 seconds and a responsive interface.

Automated Recommendations Engine

"As a service advisor, I want to receive automated recommendations on customer service needs so that I can proactively reach out to customers and improve their experience with our shop."

Description

The Automated Recommendations Engine requirement will leverage machine learning algorithms to provide tailored service recommendations based on historical service data, customer preferences, and trend analysis. This functionality aims to offer predictive insights and specific recommendations for service upgrades, maintenance reminders, and customer engagement strategies. Integration with the Actionable Insights Toolkit will enable the engine to automatically suggest actionable steps to the users, facilitating timely engagement with customers and improved service offerings. The primary benefit of this engine is the enhancement of customer relationships and maximization of service opportunities.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives personalized service recommendations after a customer visits the shop and provides feedback on their experience.

Given a customer feedback has been submitted, when the Automated Recommendations Engine processes the feedback, then the system should generate three personalized recommendations for services based on the customer’s feedback and historical service data.

The system automatically sends maintenance reminders to customers based on their vehicle's service history.

Given a customer’s vehicle has a service due based on historical data, when the Due Date is one week away, then the Automated Recommendations Engine should trigger an automatic maintenance reminder email to the customer.

Users can access actionable insights related to staff performance based on customer feedback.

Given that customer feedback has been collected over the past month, when the user accesses the Actionable Insights Toolkit, then the system should display a report summarizing staff performance insights and suggest training areas.

The system identifies trends in customer preferences over time and suggests updates to service offerings accordingly.

Given the last six months of service data has been analyzed, when the trend analysis is performed, then the system should output at least three service upgrade suggestions based on emerging customer preferences.

Users can view and track the impact of implemented recommendations on service metrics.

Given that a recommendation has been implemented, when a user accesses the service performance dashboard, then the system should display a comparison of service metrics before and after implementation for the last quarter.

The Automated Recommendations Engine provides insights for new customer engagement strategies based on seasonal trends.

Given that historical data for the current season has been analyzed, when the engine generates recommendations, then the system should suggest at least two engagement strategies tailored to attract more customers during the examined season.

Satisfaction Benchmark Reports

Satisfaction Benchmark Reports generate periodic reports comparing current customer satisfaction metrics to previous periods and industry standards. These reports are designed to assist shop owners in tracking their performance over time and setting achievable goals for improved customer experience.

Requirements

Automated Report Generation

"As a shop owner, I want automated reports on customer satisfaction so that I can quickly assess performance and make necessary adjustments without spending excessive time on data compilation."

Description

The Automated Report Generation requirement enables the system to automatically collate customer satisfaction data, metrics, and insights into comprehensive reports at predefined intervals (e.g., monthly, quarterly). This feature will reduce manual data handling, ensure timely insights for shop owners, and help them focus on business operations and improvements. The automation will also ensure that data remains consistent and reliable, leading to better decision-making and improved customer experience.

Acceptance Criteria

Automated generation of monthly customer satisfaction reports for a shop owner to evaluate trends over the last month.

Given the automated report generation is scheduled for monthly reports, when the reporting period ends, then a report summarizing customer satisfaction metrics for the previous month is generated and sent to the shop owner via email.

A shop owner requires a quarterly satisfaction benchmark report to compare their metrics against industry standards.

Given the system is set for quarterly reporting, when the quarter concludes, then the system compiles a report comparing customer satisfaction metrics to previous quarters and available industry benchmarks, making it available for download.

Shop owner wants to access a report at any time to check real-time satisfaction data and trends.

Given that the automated report system is functional, when the shop owner requests access to the satisfaction benchmark reports, then the system presents the latest report in an accessible format through the dashboard interface.

The automated reporting system should notify the shop owner of any errors in data collection before generating a report.

Given the automated report generation process, when an error is detected in data collection, then the system alerts the shop owner to review the reported issues before the report is generated.

The system should retain historical satisfaction benchmark reports for shop owners to review over time.

Given that reports are generated periodically, when the shop owner accesses the historical reporting section, then the system displays all past reports sorted by date, allowing for comparison across different time frames.

A shop owner needs to customize the frequency of report generation to suit their business needs.

Given the settings for report generation are available, when the shop owner selects a custom reporting frequency (monthly, bi-monthly, quarterly), then the system updates the report generation schedule accordingly.

Comparative Industry Analysis

"As a shop owner, I want to compare my satisfaction metrics against industry standards so that I can identify areas for improvement and enhance my service offerings effectively."

Description

The Comparative Industry Analysis requirement provides shop owners with the ability to compare their customer satisfaction metrics against industry standards and benchmarks. This feature will include data visualization tools to highlight gaps and areas for improvement, enabling shop owners to understand their performance in context and optimize strategies accordingly. This functionality is crucial for helping businesses align with industry best practices and remain competitive.

Acceptance Criteria

Shop owners need to generate a Satisfaction Benchmark Report after the latest customer satisfaction survey results have been processed.

Given that the shop owner is logged into the AutoWatch platform, when they navigate to the Satisfaction Benchmark Reports section and select 'Generate Report', then the system should create a report that includes comparative metrics against industry standards for the latest survey results.

A shop owner wants to review the visual representation of the customer satisfaction metrics over the last year to assess performance trends and identify areas for improvement.

Given that the shop owner is in the Comparative Industry Analysis section, when they select the time frame of the last year, then the data visualization tools should display a clear chart or graph that shows the trend of customer satisfaction metrics over that period compared to industry benchmarks.

After reviewing the Satisfaction Benchmark Report, a shop owner aims to set achievable goals based on the insights provided.

Given that the Satisfaction Benchmark Report has been generated, when the owner reviews the report, then they should be able to identify at least three specific actionable goals for improving customer satisfaction that are based on the gaps highlighted in the report.

A shop owner is interested in sharing the Satisfaction Benchmark Report with their management team to facilitate strategy discussions.

Given that the Satisfaction Benchmark Report has been generated, when the shop owner selects the 'Share' option, then the system should allow them to generate a PDF and send it via email to specified team members, with all metrics accurately represented.

The shop owner receives feedback from the management team regarding the clarity and usability of the Satisfaction Benchmark Report.

Given that the management team has reviewed the report, when they provide feedback through the AutoWatch feedback form, then at least 80% of the feedback should indicate that the report is clear, useful, and actionable for their strategic planning.

The shop owner wants to ensure that the comparative metrics in the report are up-to-date with the latest industry standards.

Given that the Satisfaction Benchmark Report is generated, when the shop owner checks for updates, then the system should reflect the most recent industry standards and benchmarks available within the last 30 days.

User-Friendly Dashboard

"As a shop owner, I want a user-friendly dashboard that presents my customer satisfaction metrics clearly so that I can quickly grasp insights and trends without feeling overwhelmed by data."

Description

The User-Friendly Dashboard requirement entails creating an intuitive, visually appealing dashboard that presents customer satisfaction metrics and benchmark reports in an easily digestible format. The dashboard will feature customizable widgets that allow shop owners to choose the data points they want to monitor. This requirement is key for ensuring that vital information is readily accessible and actionable, contributing to informed decision-making.

Acceptance Criteria

Dashboard displays customer satisfaction metrics for the last quarter.

Given the user is logged into the AutoWatch platform, when they navigate to the User-Friendly Dashboard, then they should see customer satisfaction metrics for the last quarter in a graphical format.

User can customize dashboard widgets to display specific customer satisfaction metrics.

Given the user is on the User-Friendly Dashboard, when they select and customize the widgets they want to display, then the dashboard should update to show the selected metrics without any errors.

Dashboard provides comparison of current customer satisfaction metrics against industry standards.

Given the dashboard is loaded, when the user views the satisfaction benchmark reports, then they should see a clear comparison of their customer satisfaction metrics against the latest industry standards.

User can export satisfaction benchmark reports in different formats.

Given the user is on the Satisfaction Benchmark Reports page, when they choose to export the report, then they should have the option to download it in PDF, Excel, and CSV formats successfully.

Dashboard refreshes customer satisfaction data in real-time.

Given the user is viewing the User-Friendly Dashboard, when new customer satisfaction data is recorded in the system, then the dashboard should refresh within 5 seconds to display the latest data.

Dashboard is accessible on mobile devices without loss of functionality.

Given the user is using a mobile device, when they access the AutoWatch platform, then the User-Friendly Dashboard should remain fully functional and visually appealing on the mobile interface.

Users receive timely notifications for significant changes in customer satisfaction metrics.

Given the user has set up notification preferences, when there is a significant change in customer satisfaction metrics, then the user should receive a real-time notification via email or SMS regarding the change.

Goal Setting and Alerts

"As a shop owner, I want to set specific satisfaction targets and receive alerts if I’m falling short so that I can address any issues before they escalate."

Description

The Goal Setting and Alerts requirement introduces a functionality that allows shop owners to set customer satisfaction goals and receive alerts if metrics fall below target levels. This proactive feature will help shop owners maintain their focus on customer experience while allowing them to take prompt action in case of declining satisfaction. It integrates seamlessly with other reporting features to provide a comprehensive view.

Acceptance Criteria

Shop owner sets a customer satisfaction goal for the upcoming quarter through the AutoWatch dashboard.

Given the shop owner is logged into AutoWatch, when they navigate to the Goal Setting section and enter a target satisfaction score, then the goal should be saved, and a confirmation message should appear.

The system triggers an alert when the customer satisfaction score drops below the set target for the first time.

Given the shop owner has set a customer satisfaction goal, when the system calculates the satisfaction score and it falls below the set goal, then an alert notification should be sent to the shop owner's registered email and displayed on their dashboard.

The shop owner reviews the historical satisfaction data along with current performance metrics through the Satisfaction Benchmark Reports feature.

Given the shop owner accesses the Satisfaction Benchmark Reports, when they select the desired date range, then the system should display a report comparing the current satisfaction score with previous periods and industry standards in a clear and understandable format.

The system allows the shop owner to adjust customer satisfaction goals based on the insights from the reports.

Given the shop owner has reviewed the Satisfaction Benchmark Reports, when they decide to update their customer satisfaction goal in the Goal Setting section, then the new goal should be saved and reflected in future alerts and reports.

The shop owner receives a summary notification at the end of each month regarding progress towards their customer satisfaction goals.

Given the shop owner's satisfaction goals are set, when a month ends, then the shop owner should receive an automated summary email highlighting the current satisfaction score, whether goals were met, and trends compared to previous months.

The system allows the shop owner to track changes in customer satisfaction scores over time.

Given the shop owner accesses the historical data of customer satisfaction scores, when they view the trend analysis, then the system should present a visual graph showing changes in satisfaction scores over the selected period.

Data Export Options

"As a shop owner, I want to export my satisfaction reports in different formats so that I can share them easily with my team and stakeholders for review and analysis."

Description

The Data Export Options requirement enables users to export their satisfaction benchmark reports and underlying data in various formats (e.g., PDF, Excel, CSV). This feature will facilitate easier sharing with stakeholders, external auditors, or for integration with other analytics tools. Convenience and flexibility in reporting are vital for enabling data-driven decisions and maintaining transparency with stakeholders.

Acceptance Criteria

Exporting Benchmark Reports in Multiple Formats Successfully

Given a user is logged in and has generated a satisfaction benchmark report, when the user selects the export option and chooses PDF, then the system should generate a PDF file of the report that is properly formatted and includes all relevant data.

Verifying Data Integrity in Exported Reports

Given a user has exported a satisfaction benchmark report in Excel format, when the user opens the file, then the data within the file should match the metrics displayed in the AutoWatch application without any discrepancies.

Sending Reports to Stakeholders via Email

Given a user has successfully exported a satisfaction benchmark report, when the user chooses to send the report via email, then the system should allow the user to input recipient email addresses and send the report successfully with a confirmation message.

Exporting Reports from the Dashboard

Given a user is on the satisfaction benchmark reports dashboard, when the user clicks the 'Export' button, then a dropdown should appear with options for PDF, Excel, and CSV formats, allowing selection for report export.

Accessing Historical Exported Reports

Given a user has previously exported satisfaction benchmark reports, when the user navigates to the data export section, then the user should have access to a list of all previous exports with the ability to download them again.

Error Handling for Failed Exports

Given a user attempts to export a report and the export fails due to technical reasons, when the user receives an error message, then the message should clearly state the nature of the error and provide options for troubleshooting or retrying the operation.

Exporting with Custom Date Range

Given a user wants to analyze customer satisfaction data from a specific date range, when the user selects custom dates and exports the report, then the exported data should reflect only the metrics from the selected date range.

Maintenance Reminder

The Maintenance Reminder feature automatically alerts customers when it's time for their next maintenance check based on their subscription plan. This ensures that vehicles receive regular service, enhancing their performance and longevity, while reducing the risk of unexpected breakdowns. Customers appreciate the convenience of proactive reminders, leading to better vehicle upkeep and increased satisfaction.

Requirements

Automatic Notification System

"As a vehicle owner, I want to receive automatic reminders for my scheduled maintenance services so that I can keep my car in good condition and avoid unexpected repairs."

Description

The Automatic Notification System allows the platform to send alerts to customers when their next maintenance service is due, based on the data pulled from their subscription plans. This feature integrates seamlessly into the AutoWatch platform, leveraging existing customer data and notifications settings to customize alerts via email, SMS, or app notifications. By implementing this system, the AutoWatch platform enhances customer engagement and ensures that vehicle maintenance is timely, which can lead to improved customer satisfaction and loyalty. Furthermore, this proactive approach to maintenance helps reduce the likelihood of unexpected vehicle breakdowns, allowing auto repair shops to streamline operations and maintain better relationships with their customers.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer receives a maintenance reminder notification via email, SMS, or app push notification based on their maintenance schedule.

Given a customer has a subscription plan with a scheduled maintenance due date, When the due date approaches, Then the customer should receive a notification through their preferred channel (email, SMS, app).

The notification system accurately reflects the correct maintenance due date based on customer subscription data.

Given a customer has an active subscription plan, When the maintenance duration is updated in the system, Then the next reminder notification should display the correct due date based on this update.

Customers can select their preferred notification channel in their account settings and receive reminders accordingly.

Given a customer navigates to their account settings, When they select a preferred notification channel (email, SMS, app), Then they should receive maintenance reminders exclusively through the selected channel.

The system sends reminders at configurable intervals before the maintenance due date, allowing customers flexibility.

Given a customer opts for reminders, When they choose an interval (e.g., 1 week or 3 days before) in their account settings, Then the system should send reminders according to the specified interval.

The notification includes clear information about the required maintenance and associated details.

Given a customer receives a reminder notification, When they open the notification, Then it should contain essential details such as service type, due date, and contact information for the shop.

The notification system tracks customer interactions with maintenance reminders for improvement analytics.

Given a customer interacts with a maintenance reminder, When they click on the notification or open it, Then this interaction should be logged and available for analysis to improve future notifications.

Subscription Management Enhancements

"As a customer, I want to manage my subscription plan easily so that I can adjust my maintenance services according to my needs and preferences."

Description

This requirement focuses on enhancing the capability to manage customer subscription plans within the AutoWatch platform. It will allow customers to easily view, update, or modify their subscription details, such as service frequency and types of services included. Additionally, it will streamline the process of onboarding new customers into subscription plans, ensuring that users can quickly get started with vehicle maintenance scheduling. By improving the subscription management feature, AutoWatch aims to boost user satisfaction and retention while providing valuable insights to shop owners regarding customer preferences and service utilization patterns.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer views their subscription plan details in AutoWatch.

Given the customer is logged into their AutoWatch account, when they navigate to the 'Subscription Management' section, then they should see a summary of their current subscription plan, including service frequency and types of services included.

Customer updates their subscription plan to change service frequency.

Given the customer is in the 'Subscription Management' section, when they select a new service frequency and submit the changes, then their subscription plan should be updated successfully, and a confirmation message should be displayed.

New customer onboarding into a subscription plan.

Given a new customer is registering for AutoWatch, when they complete the onboarding process and choose a subscription plan, then they should receive a confirmation email outlining their selected plan and the scheduled maintenance reminders.

Shop owner views insights on customer preferences and service utilization patterns.

Given the shop owner is logged in to the AutoWatch dashboard, when they navigate to the 'Customer Insights' section, then they should see aggregated data on customer subscription preferences and usage patterns.

Customer receives an automated maintenance reminder notification.

Given a customer has an active subscription plan and their maintenance check is due, when the reminder notification is triggered, then the customer should receive a notification via their preferred method (SMS/email) at least 24 hours before the scheduled date.

Customer modifies the types of services included in their subscription.

Given the customer accesses their 'Subscription Management' section, when they select additional services to include in their subscription and confirm the changes, then their subscription details should reflect the updated services and the next billing cycle should adjust accordingly.

Intuitive Dashboard Interface

"As a shop owner, I want an easy-to-navigate dashboard so that I can quickly see all customer maintenance schedules and follow up with them proactively."

Description

The Intuitive Dashboard Interface provides a user-friendly view of maintenance alerts, upcoming service dates, and subscription details all in one central location. This dashboard will allow both customers and shop owners to quickly access relevant information, track their service history, and understand maintenance trends for different vehicles. By prioritizing an intuitive design, AutoWatch can enhance user experience and empower customers and shop owners with actionable insights, which in turn may lead to improved decision-making and increased loyalty towards the service.

Acceptance Criteria

User logs into the AutoWatch platform and views the Intuitive Dashboard Interface after receiving a maintenance reminder notification.

Given the user has an active subscription and a scheduled maintenance reminder, when the user logs into the AutoWatch platform, then the dashboard should display the current maintenance alerts, upcoming service dates, and subscription details clearly and prominently.

A customer receives an automatic notification for an upcoming maintenance service based on their vehicle's schedule and subscription plan.

Given the customer's vehicle is due for maintenance according to the schedule, when the notification is sent, then the customer should receive an email and SMS alert with the details of the upcoming maintenance appointment at least 7 days in advance.

A shop owner accesses the dashboard to review service history and identify maintenance trends for vehicles.

Given the shop owner is logged in, when they navigate to the service history section of the dashboard, then they should be able to view complete service history for all customer vehicles along with clear trends displayed visually, such as charts or graphs.

The Intuitive Dashboard Interface is used on a mobile device by a customer checking their service schedule on the go.

Given the customer accesses the AutoWatch platform from a mobile device, when they open the Intuitive Dashboard Interface, then the dashboard should render responsively, providing a user-friendly experience with accessible navigation and readable content.

A customer wants to edit their subscription details from the dashboard.

Given the customer is on the Intuitive Dashboard Interface, when they initiate the process to edit their subscription details, then they should be able to access a form that allows them to update their subscription preferences, and upon submission, the changes should be saved successfully with a confirmation message displayed.

A new user gets onboarded to the AutoWatch platform and uses the dashboard for the first time.

Given the user is new to the platform, when they log in for the first time, then a tutorial or guided walkthrough should be presented to help them understand how to navigate the Intuitive Dashboard Interface, highlighting key features such as maintenance alerts and service history.

Multi-Channel Notification Delivery

"As a customer, I want to receive my maintenance reminders through my preferred communication method, whether that's text, email, or in-app, so that I'm more likely to keep up with my vehicle maintenance."

Description

The Multi-Channel Notification Delivery feature allows the AutoWatch platform to send maintenance reminders through various channels, including email, SMS, and in-app notifications. This ensures that customers receive alerts through their preferred communication method, increasing the likelihood that they will see and act upon the reminders. The implementation of this feature not only enhances user engagement but also allows for better tracking of notification effectiveness across different channels, enabling further optimization of communication strategies to maximize customer outreach.

Acceptance Criteria

A customer with a service subscription receives a maintenance reminder through their selected communication channel 10 days before their scheduled service date.

Given a customer has an active subscription and has opted for SMS notifications, when the maintenance reminder is triggered, then the customer should receive an SMS notification 10 days prior to their service date.

A customer changes their preferred method of notification from email to in-app notifications after initially subscribing to the service.

Given a customer updates their notification preferences in the AutoWatch platform, when the maintenance reminder is triggered, then the customer should receive an in-app notification instead of an email notification.

A customer receives multiple notifications for their scheduled maintenance check across different channels (email, SMS, in-app) based on their preferences and settings.

Given a customer has selected both email and SMS notifications, when the maintenance reminder is triggered, then the customer should receive both an email and an SMS notification at the same time.

A customer opts to disable notifications for their vehicle maintenance and subsequently does not receive any reminders.

Given a customer has opted out of all notifications, when the maintenance reminder is scheduled, then the customer should not receive any communications regarding their next maintenance check.

A customer interacts with their maintenance reminder via a notification channel and confirms their appointment through that channel.

Given a customer receives an in-app notification for their upcoming maintenance, when they click 'Confirm Appointment' in the reminder, then their service appointment should be updated in the system as confirmed.

System administrators want to analyze the effectiveness of different notification channels after a specified period.

Given the maintenance reminder feature has been running for two months, when the administrators review the notification engagement metrics, then they should see a report detailing the number of reminders sent and the engagement rates for SMS, email, and in-app notifications.

Performance Analytics Integration

"As a product manager, I want to track the effectiveness of maintenance reminders so that I can make informed decisions on how to improve our customer engagement strategies."

Description

The Performance Analytics Integration involves data collection and reporting tools that analyze maintenance reminders' effectiveness and overall customer engagement with the AutoWatch platform. This feature will track metrics such as reminder open rates, follow-through rates, and customer feedback on the usefulness of reminders. With these insights, AutoWatch can refine its approach to customer notifications, continuing to improve service offerings based on real user data. This requirement seeks to enhance the decision-making process for service operations while fostering a culture of data-driven improvements within the platform.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer receives an automated maintenance reminder via email based on their subscription plan at least one week prior to the scheduled maintenance date.

Given a customer with an active subscription, when the scheduled maintenance date is one week away, then the customer should receive a reminder email detailing the upcoming service.

The maintenance reminder email includes a clear call-to-action button for scheduling the service appointment directly online.

Given the maintenance reminder email, when the customer opens the email, then the email should contain a functional button that links to the online scheduling system.

Analytics dashboard displays real-time statistics about reminder open rates and follow-through rates by the end of each month.

Given the analytics dashboard in the AutoWatch platform, when the data for reminders is analyzed monthly, then the open rates and follow-through rates should be presented in a clear visual format and accessible to administrators.

Customer feedback is collected on the usefulness of maintenance reminders after service appointments are completed.

Given a service appointment is completed, when the customer receives a follow-up survey, then the survey should include questions related to the maintenance reminder's usefulness and satisfaction rating.

The system sends reminders without any errors or delays based on the defined schedule in the customer's profile.

Given a customer’s profile with a defined maintenance schedule, when the scheduled reminder time arrives, then the system must send the reminder within the designated time window without failure.

Subscriber Loyalty Rewards

Subscriber Loyalty Rewards incentivizes regular service subscriptions by offering points or discounts based on subscription duration and frequency of maintenance checks. This feature nurtures long-term relationships with customers, encouraging them to remain loyal to the shop while reaping the benefits of lowered service costs. It also enhances the shop's ability to forecast demand, leading to improved inventory management.

Requirements

Loyalty Points System

"As a regular subscriber, I want to earn points for every service I receive so that I can redeem rewards and save money in the long run."

Description

The Loyalty Points System enables subscribers to earn points for each maintenance check or service they utilize based on the duration and frequency of their subscription. This system will allow shop owners to track points accumulation seamlessly and present transparent benefits to customers. It enhances customer engagement by rewarding loyalty, fostering repeat business. Additionally, the system will provide analytics to shop owners, helping them to understand customer behavior and tailor marketing strategies accordingly.

Acceptance Criteria

Loyalty Points Accumulation During Maintenance Checks

Given a subscriber has an active subscription, when they complete a maintenance check, then the system should automatically update their loyalty points based on the predefined points structure for that service.

Loyalty Points Redemption Process

Given a subscriber has accumulated loyalty points, when they choose to redeem points for a discount on a service, then the system should apply the correct discount to their bill and update their points balance accordingly.

Customer Notification of Points Accumulation

Given a customer completes a service, when the points are added to their loyalty account, then an automated notification should be sent to the customer confirming their new points balance and total points available for redemption.

Analytics Dashboard for Shop Owners

Given the shop owner accesses the analytics dashboard, when they view loyalty points data, then they should see accurate reports on points accumulation, redemption rates, and customer engagement metrics over the selected time period.

Integration with Subscription Management

Given that a customer subscribes to a service plan, when their subscription duration or frequency changes, then the loyalty points system should automatically adjust their points accumulation rate based on the new subscription details.

Points Expiration Policy Implementation

Given a subscriber with accumulated loyalty points, when the points reach their expiration date, then the system should automatically reduce the points balance and notify the subscriber about the expiration.

Reward Redemption Mechanism

"As a loyal customer, I want an easy way to redeem my points for discounts so that I can enjoy the benefits of my loyalty without hassle."

Description

The Reward Redemption Mechanism allows customers to redeem their accumulated loyalty points for discounts or special offers on future services. This feature should be user-friendly, enabling customers to easily apply their points during the checkout process. Integrating this mechanism into the existing billing system will streamline transactions and enhance customer satisfaction by providing a tangible benefit for their loyalty.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer chooses to redeem loyalty points during the online booking process for a service appointment.

Given the customer is logged in and has accumulated loyalty points,When they select a service and proceed to checkout,Then they should see an option to redeem loyalty points and a clear display of the available points and corresponding discounts.

Customer attempts to use loyalty points that exceed their available balance during checkout.

Given the customer has 100 loyalty points,When they try to redeem 150 points at checkout,Then they should receive an error message indicating insufficient points to redeem.

Customer successfully redeems loyalty points for a discount during the service checkout process.

Given the customer has sufficient loyalty points,When they apply their points at checkout,Then the discount should be correctly reflected in the total amount due and the points balance should be updated accordingly.

Customer receives a confirmation of their loyalty points redemption via email.

Given the customer has completed a successful redemption of loyalty points,When the transaction is finalized,Then they should receive an email confirmation detailing the points used and the new points balance.

Shop owner views reports on customer loyalty points redemption trends.

Given the shop owner accesses the loyalty rewards dashboard,When they check the redemption statistics,Then they should see an accurate report of points redeemed over a specified timeframe and their correlation with service appointments.

Redemption mechanism is integrated with the billing system without discrepancies.

Given the integration of the loyalty rewards feature with the billing system,When a redemption occurs,Then all transactional data should sync accurately without manual intervention and reflect real-time updates in both systems.

Customer can easily navigate to the loyalty points redemption feature on the autopay dashboard.

Given the customer accesses their autopay dashboard,When they select the loyalty rewards section,Then the interface should be intuitive, displaying points balance, redemptions options, and instructions clearly.

Subscription Management Dashboard

"As a shop owner, I want a dashboard that shows customer subscription details and reward statuses so that I can manage my loyalty program effectively."

Description

The Subscription Management Dashboard provides shop owners with a centralized interface to manage customer subscriptions, including tracking service frequency, duration, and redemption activities. This dashboard will empower shop owners with insights into customer behavior and loyalty trends, helping them make informed decisions regarding marketing and service offerings. Implementation should ensure an intuitive layout that simplifies navigation and enhances usability for shop owners.

Acceptance Criteria

Subscription Management Dashboard allows shop owners to view all active subscriptions in a consolidated list format.

Given I am a shop owner logged into the AutoWatch platform, When I navigate to the Subscription Management Dashboard, Then I should see a list of all active customer subscriptions displaying customer names, subscription durations, and service frequencies.

Shop owners can filter subscription data by subscription type, duration, and frequency to analyze trends.

Given I am on the Subscription Management Dashboard, When I apply filters for subscription type, duration, and frequency, Then the dashboard should refresh to display only the subscriptions matching the selected criteria.

The dashboard provides visual analytics such as charts and graphs representing customer loyalty trends over time.

Given I am viewing the Subscription Management Dashboard, When I navigate to the analytics section, Then I should see visual representations of customer loyalty trends, including charts for subscription renewals and redemption rates, updated in real-time.

Shop owners can easily manage the redemptions of loyalty points tied to subscriptions.

Given I am on the Subscription Management Dashboard, When I select a customer subscription, Then I should see an option to view and manage loyalty points and redeem them against services.

The dashboard notifies shop owners of upcoming subscription expirations or renewal dates to encourage customer engagement.

Given current date is within 30 days of a subscription expiration, When I view the Subscription Management Dashboard, Then I should see a notification alerting me about the impending subscription expirations for my customers.

Shop owners can export subscription data for external reporting or accounting purposes.

Given I am on the Subscription Management Dashboard, When I select the export option, Then I should be able to download all subscription data in a CSV format.

The dashboard allows for quick edits and updates to individual customer subscription details.

Given I am viewing a specific customer subscription on the Subscription Management Dashboard, When I make an edit and save changes, Then the updated subscription details should be reflected immediately in the dashboard.

Automated Notification System

"As a subscriber, I want to receive notifications about my upcoming services and points status so that I stay informed and do not miss out on rewards."

Description

The Automated Notification System sends timely reminders to subscribers regarding their upcoming service appointments and loyalty points status. This proactive communication mechanism should also notify customers of any opportunities to redeem their loyalty points, fostering engagement and reducing missed appointments. The notifications can be sent via email or SMS based on user preferences, enhancing customer experience and operational efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

Automated reminders for upcoming appointments are sent to customers based on their subscription frequency and preferences via selected communication channels.

Given a customer has a scheduled service appointment, when the appointment date is 2 days away, then an automated reminder is sent via the customer's preferred communication channel (email or SMS).

Loyalty points status notifications are sent to subscribers immediately after their service completion, updating them on their current points balance.

Given a customer completes a service appointment, when the service is marked as completed, then an automated notification is sent to the customer indicating their new loyalty points balance.

Customers receive notifications regarding potential loyalty points redemption opportunities, emphasizing available discounts.

Given a customer has accrued loyalty points, when a redemption opportunity arises (e.g., expiring points or new offers), then a notification is sent to the customer to encourage points use.

A system feature allows customers to adjust their notification preferences for service appointment reminders and loyalty points notifications.

Given a customer has access to their profile settings, when the customer updates their notification preferences, then the system reflects these changes immediately and applies them to future notifications.

Automated notifications are tracked to ensure successful delivery and customer engagement.

Given a notification is sent, when a customer opens or interacts with the notification, then this interaction is logged in the system for analytics purposes to measure effectiveness.

Feedback mechanism is in place for customers to report issues related to notifications received.

Given a customer receives a notification, when the customer detects an issue with the notification content or delivery, then the customer should be able to report the issue easily through the app or website which logs it for review.

The system should ensure that notifications are not sent during specified opt-out times set by the customer (e.g., do not disturb hours).

Given a customer sets 'do not disturb' hours in their profile, when the scheduled notification time overlaps with these hours, then the notification is postponed until the end of these hours.

Customer Feedback Integration

"As a customer, I want to be able to give feedback about my experiences with the rewards program so that I can help improve future service quality."

Description

The Customer Feedback Integration feature enables subscribers to provide feedback on their service experiences, particularly regarding the rewards program. Feedback collected will be analyzed to identify areas for improvement within the loyalty program and service delivery overall. This requirement promotes continual enhancement of the program and ensures that customer needs and expectations are being met effectively.

Acceptance Criteria

A customer finishes a maintenance service and receives a notification to provide feedback on the rewards program through an automated email.

Given a customer has completed a service, when they receive the automated email, then they should be able to click a link that directs them to a feedback form related to the rewards program within 24 hours of the service.

After submitting feedback, the customer wants to ensure their feedback data is collected and available for analysis.

Given a customer submits feedback through the form, when they submit it, then their feedback should be stored in the database and categorized for analysis, ensuring it can be accessed by the management team for review within 48 hours.

Management needs a report on feedback collected from customers regarding the Subscriber Loyalty Rewards program for strategic decisions.

Given feedback is collected continuously, when a management user requests a report, then the system must generate a report that includes quantitative and qualitative data from the last month, displaying trends and areas for improvement, within 1 business day.

A customer wants to know how their feedback will affect their experience with the loyalty program.

Given a customer submits feedback, when they check the status of their feedback through their account interface, then they should see a message indicating that their feedback is acknowledged and currently under review with an expected response time of 5 business days.

After the feedback period ends, management needs to evaluate customer input to refine the rewards program.

Given the feedback collection period has concluded, when the management team reviews the feedback data, then they should identify at least three actionable insights to improve the rewards program based on customer suggestions and challenges.

Subscribers report issues with the feedback form functionality after maintenance.

Given that subscribers are accessing the feedback form, when they try to submit their feedback, then at least 95% of submissions should successfully process without errors and receive a confirmation response, tracked over the duration of one month.

Parts Inventory Forecasting

Parts Inventory Forecasting utilizes historical subscription data to predict which parts will need replacement or maintenance based on customer vehicle profiles. By streamlining supply chain management, this feature ensures that the right parts are always available, reducing wait times and improving service efficiency. This proactive approach enhances the overall customer experience and prevents service delays.

Requirements

Predictive Parts Analysis

"As a shop owner, I want to predict which parts my customers will need based on their vehicle profiles so that I can minimize wait times and enhance overall customer satisfaction."

Description

The Predictive Parts Analysis requirement focuses on developing algorithms to analyze historical subscription data of customer vehicle profiles. By integrating this analysis into AutoWatch's core functionality, the system will predict which parts are likely to require replacement or maintenance in the near future. This proactive inventory management approach allows auto repair shops to stock the right parts efficiently, reducing lead times and ensuring higher service quality. The resulting benefit for users includes increased operational efficiency, improved customer satisfaction due to reduced wait times for parts, and ultimately enhancing the shop’s profitability. This requirement also necessitates a seamless connection with existing inventory management systems, ensuring data flows smoothly for accurate forecasting.

Acceptance Criteria

Auto repair shop owner receives a notification about the predicted need for parts replacement based on the analysis of historical subscription data for a customer's vehicle profile.

Given that the owner accesses the predictive parts analysis tool, when the tool analyzes historical data, then it should identify the parts that are likely to require replacement within the next 30 days.

The auto repair shop integrates the predictive parts analysis feature with their existing inventory management system to facilitate better stock management.

Given that the integration is set up, when the predictive analysis identifies a high likelihood of parts needing replacement, then it should automatically update inventory levels in the management system to reflect this forecast.

A service technician uses the predictive parts analysis during a customer vehicle inspection to prepare for necessary repairs.

Given that the technician inputs the customer vehicle profile into the system, when the system processes the data, then it should display a list of all parts that are predicted to be required for upcoming service appointments within the next month.

The shop manager reviews monthly reports on parts forecast accuracy to assess the effectiveness of the predictive analysis.

Given that monthly data is compiled, when the manager runs the report, then it should provide a summary of accurately predicted parts replacements versus actual parts used, with an accuracy rate of at least 90%.

A customer receives an automated notification regarding upcoming maintenance needs predicted by the system based on their vehicle’s historical data.

Given that a customer's vehicle profile has been analyzed, when the predictive system identifies needed parts, then a notification should be sent to the customer detailing the parts needed and the recommended maintenance schedule within 24 hours.

The auto repair shop conducts a training session for staff on utilizing the predictive parts analysis tool effectively.

Given that the training materials are prepared, when the staff attends the training session, then they should be able to demonstrate the ability to use the predictive analysis tool, showing at least 80% proficiency in a follow-up assessment.

Inventory personnel use the predictive parts analysis to optimize restock orders for parts based on predicted needs.

Given that personnel review the predictive parts analysis report, when they prepare restock orders, then the orders should align with the predicted parts needs and show a reduction in excess stock items by at least 25% over the following month.

Automated Notifications for Low Stock

"As a shop owner, I want to receive automated alerts when my parts inventory is low so that I can reorder in time and avoid any service delays."

Description

The Automated Notifications for Low Stock requirement is designed to alert shop owners and inventory managers when specific parts reach a predefined low stock threshold. This feature will ensure that auto repair shops can maintain optimal inventory levels and avoid service interruptions due to out-of-stock parts. The implementation will involve an alert mechanism that triggers notifications via email or within the AutoWatch platform, helping shops stay ahead of inventory needs. By keeping parts stocked according to forecasted demand, this feature will prevent delays in services and enhance customer trust and loyalty to the shop. Integration with the inventory management system is essential to ensure accurate monitoring of stock levels based on historical usage data.

Acceptance Criteria

Triggering Automated Notifications for Low Stock on Critical Parts

Given the inventory level of a critical part is below the predefined low stock threshold, When the system checks inventory levels, Then an automated notification should be sent to the inventory manager via email and displayed on the AutoWatch platform.

Receiving Notifications for Low Stock Parts

Given an automated notification for low stock has been triggered, When the inventory manager receives the notification, Then the notification should include the part name, current stock level, and necessary reorder quantity.

Integration with Inventory Management System

Given the Automated Notifications for Low Stock feature is implemented, When the inventory management system updates stock levels based on historical usage data, Then the notifications should accurately reflect the current stock levels in real-time.

Customizable Low Stock Thresholds

Given that different parts may have varying demand levels, When the inventory manager sets low stock thresholds for each part, Then the automated notifications should respect these thresholds for triggering alerts.

User Interface for Notification Settings

Given the need for user customization, When the inventory manager accesses the AutoWatch platform, Then they should be able to easily view and modify notification settings, including low stock thresholds and notification methods.

Stock Reordering System

"As a shop manager, I want to automate the reordering process for parts so that I can maintain optimal inventory levels without manual intervention."

Description

The Stock Reordering System requirement aims to automate the process of reordering parts when inventory levels fall below specified thresholds. By linking this system with the parts inventory forecasting feature, the reordering process can become highly efficient and proactive. Shop managers will be able to set parameters for automatic reordering based on predicted demand and current stock levels. This will reduce the manual effort involved in inventory management and ensure that the right parts are always on hand. The system will also allow for supplier integrations to expedite the ordering process, further enhancing operational efficiency. Ultimately, this capability will ensure that auto repair shops can provide timely service and meet customer expectations without inventory shortages.

Acceptance Criteria

When an inventory level for a specific part falls below the defined threshold, the Stock Reordering System triggers an automatic reorder process.

Given a set threshold for inventory levels, When the stock of a part falls below this threshold, Then an automatic reorder should be initiated with the predefined supplier.

Shop managers set specific parameters for automatic reordering based on historical data and customer vehicle profiles.

Given defined parameters for reorder quantities by part, When historical subscription data is analyzed, Then the system should forecast parts demand and adjust reorder levels accordingly.

The system integrates with supplier systems to facilitate expedited ordering of parts.

Given an integration setup with the supplier's REST API, When an automatic reorder is triggered, Then an order request should be sent to the supplier's system successfully without errors.

Shop managers receive notifications regarding the status of reorder requests and current inventory levels.

Given that a reorder request has been made, When the order is placed, Then a confirmation notification should be sent to the shop manager, and the updated inventory level should reflect in the system.

The Stock Reordering System provides a dashboard for shop managers to review and adjust reorder thresholds.

Given the Stock Reordering dashboard, When the shop manager accesses the dashboard, Then the current inventory levels and reorder thresholds should be displayed clearly for all parts.

Real-time updates on inventory levels are accurately reflected in the system after parts are reordered.

Given a successful reorder transaction, When parts are received and inventory is updated, Then the inventory levels in the system should reflect the newly received stock immediately.

Shop managers can override automated reorder decisions if necessary, allowing for flexibility in inventory management.

Given a scenario where a shop manager deems a predicted reorder unnecessary, When they choose to override the automated decision, Then the system should allow manual adjustment of the reorder quantity or prevent the reorder from being triggered.

Historical Data Analytics Dashboard

"As a shop owner, I want a dashboard that visualizes historical inventory usage and vehicle part trends so that I can make data-driven decisions for future inventory purchases."

Description

The Historical Data Analytics Dashboard requirement seeks to provide users with a visual representation of past inventory usage, parts replacement trends, and customer vehicle profiles. By consolidating data into an easy-to-read dashboard format, users can analyze patterns over time, helping them make informed decisions regarding inventory purchases and stock management. This requirement integrates with the parts inventory forecasting feature by providing insights that validate and refine forecasts based on real usage data. By utilizing business intelligence techniques, this dashboard can greatly assist shop owners in optimizing parts stocking strategies, ultimately enhancing customer service and operational efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

Dashboard displays a visual representation of past inventory usage for various vehicle profiles over a defined time frame.

Given that the user selects a specific vehicle profile and a date range, when they view the dashboard, then the dashboard must show inventory usage data as a bar graph that accurately reflects parts usage trends during that time frame.

Users can identify trends in parts replacement across different vehicle types from the dashboard.

Given that the user has accessed the Historical Data Analytics Dashboard, when they filter the data by vehicle type, then the dashboard must display a summary of parts replacement trends specific to the selected vehicle type with accurate percentages for each part.

Integrating data from the historical analytics dashboard with the parts inventory forecasting feature streamlined for inventory management.

Given the dashboard has generated its analytics report, when the user reviews the report, then the report must provide actionable insights linked to the parts inventory forecasting feature that suggest necessary stock adjustments based on past usage patterns.

The dashboard allows users to compare current inventory levels with historical usage data.

Given that the user is on the dashboard, when they request a comparison between current inventory and historical usage data for a specific part, then the system must provide a side-by-side comparison chart highlighting discrepancies and trends.

Users receive automatic alerts generated by the dashboard for low inventory based on historical usage patterns.

Given that the dashboard analyzes historical usage data, when the system identifies inventory levels below the predefined threshold for a specific part, then the user must receive an email alert notifying them of the low stock level and recommending restock actions.

Supplier Performance Tracking

"As a shop manager, I want to track supplier performance metrics so that I can ensure I’m sourcing parts from the most reliable vendors and improving inventory efficiency."

Description

The Supplier Performance Tracking requirement is designed to evaluate the reliability and efficiency of suppliers from whom parts are procured. Integrating this feature with the existing inventory management system will allow users to assess key performance indicators such as delivery times, order accuracy, and quality of parts received. By tracking supplier performance, auto repair shops can establish more strategic relationships with high-performing suppliers and make informed decisions when selecting partners for future inventory purchases. This requirement will enhance operational efficiency by minimizing delays associated with poor supplier performance and ensuring that the best quality components are readily available for services.

Acceptance Criteria

Supplier Reliability Assessment for Parts Order Projections

Given that the Supplier Performance Tracking feature is integrated and functional, when a store manager views the supplier performance dashboard, then the dashboard should display their suppliers' delivery times, order accuracy rates, and quality ratings for the past six months, with a minimum of 90% accuracy in data representation.

Comparison of Supplier Performance Metrics

Given that multiple suppliers are being evaluated, when the user selects two or more suppliers for comparison, then the system should generate a comparative report displaying key performance indicators such as on-time delivery percentages and defect rates side by side for easy evaluation.

Integration with Inventory Management System

Given that the Supplier Performance Tracking feature is integrated with the inventory management system, when an inventory order is placed, then the system should automatically reference supplier performance metrics to suggest the best suppliers based on delivery reliability and product quality.

Automated Alerts for Supplier Performance Issues

Given that the supply chain data is being monitored, when a supplier's performance drops below a predefined threshold (e.g., 80% on-time delivery), then the system should automatically trigger an alert to the shop owner, enabling timely intervention and decision-making.

Supplier Relationship Evaluation Over Time

Given that the Supplier Performance Tracking system has been in use for six months, when the user accesses the long-term performance report, then the report should provide insights into trends in supplier performance, including improvement metrics and any historical issues that were reported.

User-Friendly Supplier Performance Dashboard

Given that the Supplier Performance Tracking feature has been developed, when users log into the system, then they should find a user-friendly dashboard that allows them to customize views, filter by date range, and access detailed supplier reports without requiring a tutorial.

Impact Analysis of Supplier Performance on Service Efficiency

Given that the Supplier Performance Tracking feature is functional, when users generate a report comparing service efficiency metrics over time, then the report should indicate any correlation between supplier performance and service turnaround times, all presented in a clear, graphical format.

User Role Management for Inventory Access

"As a shop owner, I want to assign different access levels to my staff regarding inventory management so that I can protect sensitive information and ensure only authorized users make changes."

Description

The User Role Management for Inventory Access requirement is focused on improving security and control within the AutoWatch platform by allowing different user roles to have customizable access rights to inventory data and management functionalities. This feature enables auto repair shop owners to safeguard sensitive information and ensure that only authorized personnel can make inventory adjustments or views sensitive data. By assigning roles such as admin, manager, or technician, the platform can provide tailored access based on the needs and responsibilities of each user category. This implementation is crucial for maintaining operational integrity and preventing unauthorized changes in inventory levels, thus fostering increased confidence in the data's accuracy.

Acceptance Criteria

Admin assigns specific inventory access rights to a technician for viewing certain parts data in AutoWatch.

Given an admin user assigns inventory access roles, when a technician attempts to view sensitive inventory data, then the technician should only see the parts data they have permission to access.

A manager changes the access level of a technician for inventory adjustments in AutoWatch.

Given a manager has access to user roles, when the manager changes a technician's access level, then the technician's previous permissions should be revoked and new permissions should be granted effectively immediately.

Technician tries to make adjustments to inventory levels without appropriate permissions in AutoWatch.

Given a technician attempts to adjust inventory levels, when they do not have the corresponding permissions, then the system should prevent the action and display a relevant error message indicating insufficient permissions.

An admin reviews the current access rights of all users in the inventory management module.

Given an admin accesses the user role management interface, when they request a report on inventory access rights, then a clear list of users and their respective access levels should be displayed accurately.

A new technician is onboarded and assigned a standard user role for inventory access.

Given a new technician is added to the system with standard access rights, when they log in for the first time, then they should only have access to the inventory data that aligns with their assigned role without additional administrative permissions.

Customizable Subscriptions

Customizable Subscriptions allow customers to tailor their service plans according to their unique needs and vehicle requirements. Users can select from various maintenance packages, add services, and adjust frequency, making the subscription as flexible as possible. This personalization enhances customer satisfaction, as they only pay for what they need, leading to a sense of control and enhanced value.

Requirements

Dynamic Package Selection

"As a vehicle owner, I want to be able to select a maintenance package that fits my needs so that I can ensure my car receives the right care without paying for unnecessary services."

Description

The Dynamic Package Selection requirement enables users to easily choose from a range of customizable service plans tailored to their vehicle's specific maintenance needs. This feature will allow shop owners to define various packages that users can select based on their preferences and requirements. Additionally, users will have the ability to view the details of each package, including pricing, services included, and any additional add-ons. This functionality enhances user satisfaction by providing them with a clear, straightforward option to tailor their maintenance services, ultimately leading to stronger customer loyalty and retention.

Acceptance Criteria

User selects a customizable service plan for their vehicle maintenance via the AutoWatch platform.

Given the user is logged into the AutoWatch platform, When they navigate to the 'Customizable Subscriptions' section and select a service plan, Then they should see a list of available packages tailored to their vehicle's maintenance requirements.

User modifies their selected service plan by adding an additional service package in the AutoWatch platform.

Given the user has previously selected a service package, When they choose to add an additional service, Then the system should update the package details and reflect the new total pricing in real-time.

User views detailed information about a selected package on the AutoWatch platform.

Given the user is on the 'Customizable Subscriptions' page, When they click on a specific service package, Then they should see the detailed information including pricing, services included, and any additional add-ons listed clearly.

User receives a confirmation notification after successfully customizing their subscription in AutoWatch.

Given the user has finalized their selected service package and proceeded to checkout, When the payment is processed successfully, Then the user should receive a confirmation notification via email and through the AutoWatch notification center.

Shop owner creates a new customizable service package on the AutoWatch platform.

Given the shop owner is logged into their account, When they navigate to the 'Service Package Management' section and create a new package, Then the new package should appear in the list of available packages for customers to choose from.

User cancels their subscription to a service package via the AutoWatch platform.

Given the user is logged in and navigates to their active subscriptions, When they select a subscription to cancel, Then the system should prompt for confirmation and subsequently remove the subscription, notifying the user of the successful cancellation.

Adjustable Frequency Settings

"As a busy working professional, I want to adjust the frequency of my vehicle's service appointments so that they fit my lifestyle and schedule, ensuring I am not wasting time or money."

Description

The Adjustable Frequency Settings requirement allows users to modify the frequency of service deliveries according to their unique schedules and usage patterns. Users can decide how often they need certain services, such as oil changes or tire rotations, and customize these settings within their profile. This flexibility helps users manage their vehicle maintenance aligned with their lifestyle, increasing customer engagement and satisfaction while ensuring that they are never over-committing to services they don't need or won’t use.

Acceptance Criteria

User modifies the frequency of their oil change service within the Adjustable Frequency Settings after receiving an automated reminder email.

Given the user has an active subscription for oil change service, when the user accesses their service settings, then they can adjust the frequency of oil changes between 1 to 12 months and the change is saved successfully.

User selects a new maintenance package and adjusts the frequency according to their vehicle usage after reviewing service history data.

Given the user is reviewing service history and has selected a new package, when the user sets the desired frequency for services included in that package, then the updates are reflected in their profile and notified to them via email.

User receives a confirmation notification after changing the frequency of tire rotation services in their subscription settings.

Given the user has modified the frequency of tire rotation services, when the user confirms the changes, then they receive a confirmation notification that outlines the new schedule and details of the updated service frequency.

User attempts to adjust the service frequency to a value outside the allowed limits for a specified service (e.g., less than 1 month or more than 12 months).

Given the user tries to set the frequency for a service to less than 1 month or more than 12 months, when they submit the changes, then they receive an error message indicating that the frequency is invalid.

User views their adjusted service frequency settings in their account dashboard one week after making changes.

Given the user has changed their service frequency settings, when they navigate to their account dashboard, then the updated frequencies should be accurately displayed in the service summary section.

User cancels a scheduled service that was adjusted in frequency, and checks if the cancellation is reflected in the service history.

Given the user cancels a scheduled service after adjusting the frequency, when they check their service history, then the canceled service should no longer appear in the upcoming services list and should show as canceled in the historical records.

User seeks help using the Adjustable Frequency Settings feature and accesses the help documentation provided within the AutoWatch platform.

Given the user accesses the help section, when they search for 'Adjustable Frequency Settings', then the system should display relevant documentation that explains how to use the feature including visual aids if applicable.

Integrated Notification System

"As a vehicle owner, I want to receive notifications for my vehicle's maintenance schedule so that I never miss an important service or renewal deadline and can keep my car in optimal condition."

Description

The Integrated Notification System requirement provides users with timely reminders and alerts regarding their upcoming maintenance services, subscription renewals, and any important updates related to their vehicle's health. This feature will be linked with the AutoWatch app to send notifications through multiple channels, including SMS, email, and in-app alerts. By keeping users informed, this system aims to reduce missed appointments and promote proactive vehicle care, resulting in improved customer satisfaction and higher retention rates.

Acceptance Criteria

The user sets up a new subscription with specific services and frequency through the AutoWatch app.

Given the user accesses the subscription setup, when they select services and set service frequency, then the user should be able to save their customized subscription, and the app should confirm the updated subscription details via in-app notification.

A user receives a reminder for an upcoming maintenance service scheduled through their subscription plan.

Given the user's upcoming maintenance service is scheduled, when the notification time is reached, then the user should receive the reminder through all selected notification channels (SMS, email, in-app alert).

The user wants to change the frequency of their subscription services after initial setup.

Given the user navigates to the subscription management section and selects a service to modify, when they adjust the frequency and confirm the changes, then the updated frequency should be reflected in their subscription details and confirmed with a notification.

A user is notified about their subscription renewal date via the Integrated Notification System.

Given the user's subscription renewal date is approaching, when the notification time for renewal is reached, then the user should receive a notification through all selected channels reminding them of the upcoming renewal and its associated payment.

The user has opted to receive notifications only via email and SMS but not through in-app alerts.

Given the user adjusts their notification preferences, when they deselect in-app alerts, then subsequent notifications regarding maintenance and subscriptions should only be sent via email and SMS, confirming the preference change.

The user reviews their vehicle health updates integrated with their subscription plan.

Given that the user has received a vehicle health update, when they access the notification through the app, then they should be able to view detailed information about their vehicle's health and any required maintenance actions.

A user needs to cancel their subscription before the next scheduled renewal.

Given the user wishes to cancel their subscription, when they confirm the cancellation process through the app, then the subscription should be marked as canceled, and the user should receive a confirmation notification of the cancellation.

Service Add-On Customization

"As a total car care enthusiast, I want to add extra services to my subscription plan so that I can ensure every aspect of my vehicle is well taken care of, reflecting my passion for maintenance."

Description

The Service Add-On Customization requirement allows users to enhance their selected packages by adding specific services according to their individual vehicle requirements. After selecting a base package, users can choose additional services like tire rotation, brake checks, or specialty cleaning. This capability increases the perceived value of the customizable subscription, as users can personalize their experience and ensure their vehicle's care reflects their personal preferences and needs.

Acceptance Criteria

User selects a base maintenance package and is prompted to view available service add-ons before finalizing their subscription.

Given a user has selected a base maintenance package, When they access the add-on customization page, Then they should be presented with a list of relevant available service add-ons that can be added to their package.

User adds a tire rotation service to their subscription and confirms the changes.

Given a user is on the service add-on customization page, When they select the tire rotation service and click 'Add', Then the tire rotation service should be reflected in their subscription summary before they proceed to checkout.

User attempts to add a service that exceeds the limit of add-ons allowed for their subscription tier.

Given a user is customizing their subscription, When they try to add more services than permitted for their selected package, Then they should receive a clear message indicating the maximum number of add-ons allowed for their tier.

User saves their subscription after customizing add-ons and checks if the changes persist for future access.

Given a user has added services to their subscription, When they save their customization, Then upon reopening their subscription management page, all previously added services should remain in the summary.

User wants to remove an added service from their subscription before finalizing the purchase.

Given a user has successfully added a service to their subscription, When they opt to remove that service, Then the service should be completely removed from their subscription summary without affecting other added services.

User accesses a help page for service add-on customization and finds relevant support resources.

Given a user requires assistance with modifying their subscription, When they navigate to the help page, Then they should find clear and useful instructions for adding or removing services from their subscription, along with FAQs.

User completes the subscription purchase after customizing their service add-ons.

Given a user has made all desired customizations and proceeds to checkout, When they complete their purchase, Then they should receive a confirmation email that includes details of their subscription and added services.

User-Friendly Dashboard

"As a tech-savvy car owner, I want an easy-to-navigate dashboard that centralizes all my vehicle maintenance information so that I can quickly see what services are available and understand my subscription at a glance."

Description

The User-Friendly Dashboard requirement provides users with an intuitive interface where they can manage their subscriptions, view maintenance history, and assess their upcoming services at a glance. This dashboard will serve as the central hub for users, making information easily accessible and navigable, thereby enhancing the overall user experience. A well-designed dashboard helps users feel empowered and in control of their vehicle's maintenance, maximizing user engagement and satisfaction with the AutoWatch platform.

Acceptance Criteria

User wants to view their current subscription details and upcoming maintenance appointments on the dashboard.

Given the user is logged into their AutoWatch account, When they access the User-Friendly Dashboard, Then they should see their current subscription details, including the selected services, frequency, and next scheduled appointment.

User needs to manage their subscription by adding a new service package from the dashboard.

Given the user is on their User-Friendly Dashboard, When they choose to add a service package and confirm the selection, Then the new service should be reflected immediately in their subscription details with the updated pricing and frequency.

User wishes to check their maintenance history through the dashboard.

Given the user is on the User-Friendly Dashboard, When they click on the maintenance history section, Then they should see a chronological list of all past services performed on their vehicle, including dates and services rendered.

User wants to customize their maintenance plan by changing the frequency of services on the dashboard.

Given the user is logged in and viewing their subscription on the User-Friendly Dashboard, When they select a new frequency option for their existing services and save the changes, Then the dashboard should reflect the updated frequency in their subscription details immediately.

User encounters an error while trying to access the User-Friendly Dashboard.

Given that the user attempts to access the User-Friendly Dashboard and receives an error message, When they refresh the page, Then the system should either resolve the error or provide a user-friendly message outlining the issue and possible next steps.

User needs to receive automated notifications for upcoming maintenance services through the dashboard.

Given that a service is scheduled in the user's subscription, When the service date approaches, Then the user should receive an automated notification via email and/or mobile app alert that reminds them of their upcoming service.

Exclusive Subscriber Discounts

Exclusive Subscriber Discounts offer special pricing on additional services and parts for customers enrolled in the Parts Subscription Service. This feature not only rewards loyal customers with cost savings but also encourages them to take advantage of additional shop services, boosting overall sales for the repair shop. It’s a win-win that enhances customer retention and satisfaction.

Requirements

Subscriber Discount Management

"As a loyal customer, I want to receive exclusive discounts on services and parts as a subscriber so that I can save money and feel valued by the auto repair shop."

Description

The Subscriber Discount Management requirement entails the development of a system that allows the auto repair shop to manage discounts offered to subscribers of the Parts Subscription Service. This includes setting, editing, and monitoring special pricing on additional services and parts that are exclusive to subscribers. The feature will enhance the customer experience by providing tailored pricing, encouraging more frequent shop visits and increased sales, which ultimately boosts retention and satisfaction metrics. The implementation will include back-end updates to track subscriber interactions and front-end updates to present available discounts to users in a user-friendly manner.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer logs into their account and navigates to the subscriber section to view available exclusive discounts.

Given a customer is logged in as a subscriber, when they navigate to the subscriber discounts page, then the system should display a list of all currently available discounts specific to the Parts Subscription Service.

An auto repair shop admin updates the discount percentage for a specific service offered to subscribers.

Given an admin is in the discount management section, when they change the discount percentage for an exclusive service and save the changes, then the updated percentage should be reflected in the subscriber discounts list immediately.

A subscriber attempts to redeem an exclusive discount while checking out for a service.

Given a subscriber has selected a service eligible for an exclusive discount, when they proceed to checkout, then the discount should be applied automatically to their total bill before final confirmation.

An auto repair shop manager reviews the performance metrics of the exclusive subscriber discounts feature.

Given a manager is in the analytics dashboard, when they filter the reports to show transactions utilizing subscriber discounts, then they should be able to view total savings, transaction counts, and increase in service engagement over a specified time period.

A customer cancels their Parts Subscription Service and inquires about their existing discounts.

Given a customer has canceled their subscription, when they access the account details page, then the system should clearly indicate that they no longer qualify for exclusive subscriber discounts with a date of cancellation.

A new subscriber signs up for the Parts Subscription Service and checks for available discounts.

Given a new customer has successfully subscribed to the Parts Subscription Service, when they access the subscriber discount page for the first time, then it should display a welcome message and the discounts applicable from the date of subscription.

An auto repair shop identifies a technical issue with the discount application process during checkout.

Given a customer attempted to use an exclusive discount but it was not applied, when the support team investigates, then there should be a log entry reflecting the transaction attempt and any errors involved in the discount application process.

Automated Discount Notifications

"As a subscriber, I want to receive notifications about my exclusive discounts so that I never miss an opportunity to save on my auto repair services."

Description

The Automated Discount Notifications feature is designed to send timely alerts to subscribers about their exclusive discounts on parts and services. This requirement focuses on implementing notifications via email, SMS, or in-app messaging to inform subscribers of new or expiring discounts, thereby driving engagement and encouraging them to utilize their benefits. The increased communication enhances customer awareness of their subscription value while likely increasing the quantity of shop service usage. The system will need to be integrated with the existing notification framework and require a schedule for automation.

Acceptance Criteria

Subscriber receives email notification about new exclusive discount on parts.

Given a subscriber has opted in for notifications, when a new discount is added, then an email notification should be sent within 5 minutes of the discount being created.

Subscriber receives SMS notification about expiring exclusive discount on services.

Given a subscriber has provided a phone number for notifications, when a discount is 24 hours from expiration, then an SMS should be sent to the subscriber's phone.

Subscriber views exclusive discount notifications in the app.

Given a subscriber opens the mobile app, when there are new notifications, then they should see a list of all discounts available to them with details on expiration dates and eligible services.

Automated notification system integrates with existing frameworks.

Given the new discount notification feature is implemented, when the notifications are triggered, then they should successfully be sent without errors through the existing notification framework.

Subscriber opts out of notification services.

Given a subscriber chooses to unsubscribe from notifications, when they confirm their choice, then the subscriber should no longer receive any notifications related to discounts.

Reporting on the effectiveness of discount notifications.

Given the automated notifications have been sent, when an admin generates a report on subscriber engagement, then the report should accurately reflect the number of notifications sent, opened, and the subsequent usage of the services by subscribers.

Subscription Service Enrollment

"As a potential customer, I want an easy and clear way to enroll in the Parts Subscription Service so that I can start receiving discounts and enjoy better services immediately."

Description

The Subscription Service Enrollment requirement involves creating an intuitive enrollment process for customers to sign up for the Parts Subscription Service directly through the AutoWatch platform. This will include a user-friendly interface for selecting subscription options, understanding terms, and integrating payment methods. By simplifying the enrollment process, the shop can grow its subscriber base effectively, ultimately leading to increased sales and customer loyalty. This requirement will require back-end adjustments for user management and front-end design improvements for the enrollment UI.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer Successfully Enrolls in Subscription Service

Given a user is on the AutoWatch enrollment page, When they select a subscription option and complete the enrollment form, Then they should receive a confirmation message and have their subscription recorded in the system.

Payment Processing for Subscription Enrollment

Given a user has filled out their payment information, When they submit their enrollment, Then the system should process the payment and provide a transaction receipt before confirming their subscription.

User Interface Usability for Enrollment Process

Given a user is navigating the enrollment process, When they interact with the enrollment UI, Then all elements should be clearly visible and accessible without any errors or confusion.

Display of Subscription Terms and Conditions

Given a user is on the enrollment page, When they click on the terms and conditions link, Then the terms should open in a readable format without any broken links or missing information.

Automatic Email Notification After Enrollment

Given a user has successfully enrolled in the Parts Subscription Service, When the enrollment is confirmed, Then the user should receive an automated email summarizing the subscription details within 5 minutes.

Integration of User Management System with Enrollment

Given a user enrolls in the subscription service, When the information is submitted, Then the user management system should automatically update with the new subscriber's information.

Visibility of Exclusive Discounts for Subscribers

Given a user is a current subscriber of the Parts Subscription Service, When they log into their AutoWatch account, Then they should see exclusive discounts applied to their account in the services and parts section.

Reporting and Analytics for Discounts

"As a shop owner, I want to see analytics on the impact of subscriber discounts so that I can make informed decisions on how to improve my service offerings."

Description

The Reporting and Analytics for Discounts feature enables repair shop owners to analyze the performance and effectiveness of the Exclusive Subscriber Discounts. This requirement includes developing dashboards and reports that track metrics such as subscriber engagement, discount utilization rates, revenue impact, and customer retention statistics. By using data-driven insights, shop owners can adjust their discount strategies, enhance service offerings, and improve overall profitability. Integration with existing analytics tools within AutoWatch is essential for seamless reporting and decision making.

Acceptance Criteria

Reporting on Subscriber Engagement Metrics

Given a dashboard for reporting, When a shop owner views the Subscriber Engagement report, Then they should see metrics including the number of active subscribers, engagement rate, and service uptake over the past month.

Utilization Rate of Discounts

Given the discount utilization tracking system, When the shop owner generates the Discount Utilization report, Then it should display the percentage of discounts used versus total discounts issued for the selected time period.

Revenue Impact Assessment

Given the revenue analytics tools, When a shop owner analyzes the report on revenue impact from Exclusive Subscriber Discounts, Then they should see a clear comparison of revenue before and after implementing the discounts.

Customer Retention Analysis

Given access to the retention analytics dashboard, When the shop owner reviews customer retention statistics, Then they must find metrics indicating retention rates of subscribers versus non-subscribers over the past six months.

Integration with Existing Analytics Tools

Given the AutoWatch system integrations, When the Reporting and Analytics for Discounts feature is activated, Then it should seamlessly pull data from existing analytics tools without errors or data discrepancies.

Dashboard Customization for Reports

Given the user interface for dashboard settings, When a shop owner customizes their reports, Then they should be able to add, remove, or adjust metrics according to their preferences and save these configurations successfully.

Alerts for Low Discount Utilization

Given the alert system settings, When applying thresholds for discount utilization rates, Then the system should trigger alerts to the shop owner when utilization falls below the pre-defined threshold.

User Feedback Mechanism for Discounts

"As a subscriber, I want to provide feedback on the discounts so that my input can help improve the service for myself and other customers."

Description

The User Feedback Mechanism for Discounts feature is aimed at collecting feedback from subscribers regarding the Exclusive Subscriber Discounts. This requirement involves creating channels (such as surveys or feedback forms) that enable subscribers to share their experiences and suggestions about the discount program. By capturing customer sentiments, shop owners can make necessary adjustments to the program to better meet customer needs, ultimately maintaining high satisfaction levels. This feature will require integration within the user interface and should ensure ease of access for users.

Acceptance Criteria

Subscriber accesses the feedback form after receiving an Exclusive Subscriber Discount notification.

Given that the subscriber has received a discount notification, when they click the link to the feedback form, then they should be directed to the feedback submission page without any errors.

Subscriber submits feedback regarding their experience with the Exclusive Subscriber Discounts.

Given that the feedback form is displayed, when the subscriber fills out and submits the form, then the system should confirm submission and send a thank-you email to the subscriber.

Shop owner reviews collected feedback for insights to improve the discount program.

Given that feedback has been collected over a month, when the shop owner accesses the feedback analytics dashboard, then they should see a summary of responses, trends, and actionable insights.

Subscriber attempts to access the feedback form but is not logged in.

Given that the subscriber is not logged in, when they try to access the feedback form, then they should be prompted to log in before being redirected to the feedback form.

Feedback form ensures users can easily provide suggestions for new discounts or improvements.

Given that the feedback form is designed to capture suggestions, when the subscriber opens the form, then they should find a dedicated field for suggestions that is easily accessible and clearly labeled.

Subscriber receives an automated notification regarding changes made based on collected feedback.

Given that feedback has been reviewed and changes have been implemented, when the shop owner decides to notify subscribers, then all subscribers should receive an email detailing the changes and thanking them for their feedback.

Feedback submission must comply with data protection regulations.

Given that the feedback form collects user data, when the subscriber submits the feedback, then the collected data must be stored securely according to GDPR guidelines, and users should be made aware of their data rights.

Multi-Vehicle Management

Multi-Vehicle Management allows customers with multiple vehicles to manage all their subscriptions under one account. This convenience simplifies scheduling and maintenance tracking, appealing to customers owning several cars. By making it easier to oversee vehicle care, this feature increases service usage and loyalty, while also driving consistent revenue for the shop.

Requirements

Multi-Vehicle Dashboard

"As a car owner with multiple vehicles, I want to see all my vehicles and their maintenance schedules in one place, so that I can manage them efficiently and avoid missing important service dates."

Description

The Multi-Vehicle Dashboard provides a unified interface for users to view all their vehicles registered under a single account. This dashboard simplifies navigation and enhances user experience by allowing customers to quickly access vehicle-related data such as service history, upcoming maintenance, and subscription details. The functionality emphasizes ease of use, offering comprehensive visibility over their vehicles at a glance, thus encouraging proactive maintenance and engagement with the auto shop services. This feature integrates seamlessly with AutoWatch’s existing modules, ensuring a consistent look and feel throughout the platform and maximizing its utility.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the Multi-Vehicle Dashboard after logging into their AutoWatch account.

Given the user is logged into their account, when they navigate to the Multi-Vehicle Dashboard, then they should see a list of all registered vehicles with their basic details (Make, Model, Year).

User clicks on a specific vehicle within the Multi-Vehicle Dashboard to view additional details.

Given the user clicks on a vehicle in the list, when the vehicle details page is loaded, then the user should see comprehensive data including service history, upcoming maintenance, and subscription details specific to that vehicle.

User tries to add a new vehicle to their Multi-Vehicle Dashboard.

Given the user selects the option to add a new vehicle, when they fill in the necessary vehicle details and submit, then the new vehicle should be added to their dashboard and visible in the vehicle list.

User wants to edit the details of a registered vehicle.

Given the user selects a vehicle to edit, when they update the vehicle details and save the changes, then the updated vehicle information should reflect correctly on the Multi-Vehicle Dashboard.

User interacts with the dashboard's features under various scenarios like maintenance reminders and subscription renewals.

Given the user is viewing the Multi-Vehicle Dashboard, when there are upcoming maintenance services or subscription renewals, then appropriate notifications should be displayed in a visually prominent manner.

User accesses the Multi-Vehicle Dashboard using a mobile device.

Given the user is logged into their account on a mobile device, when they access the Multi-Vehicle Dashboard, then the dashboard should maintain a responsive design that displays all vehicles and their details appropriately on the mobile screen.

User assigns a vehicle to a specific maintenance appointment from the Multi-Vehicle Dashboard.

Given the user selects a vehicle from their list and schedules a maintenance appointment, when the appointment is confirmed, then their selected vehicle should be associated with that appointment in the system.

Automated Maintenance Reminders

"As a vehicle owner, I want to receive reminders about upcoming maintenance services for my cars, so that I can ensure they receive regular care and stay in good condition."

Description

The Automated Maintenance Reminders feature sends proactive notifications to users regarding upcoming service dates, scheduled maintenance, and recommended inspections based on mileage or time intervals. By leveraging user data and vehicle specifications, these reminders help in facilitating timely services, thereby enhancing vehicle longevity and performance. This feature not only enhances customer satisfaction but also promotes regular engagement with the auto shop, ultimately leading to increased customer retention and service utilization. Integration with mobile and email notifications ensures that users receive timely updates across devices, contributing to a seamless user experience.

Acceptance Criteria

Single user receives an automated maintenance reminder for multiple vehicles due for service based on time intervals.

Given a user with multiple vehicles, when their subscription is active and the maintenance is due, then the user should receive automated email and mobile notifications for all vehicles simultaneously.

Users can view their scheduled maintenance reminders in a consolidated dashboard for all vehicles.

Given a user logs into the AutoWatch platform, when they navigate to the dashboard, then they should see a list of all scheduled maintenance reminders for each vehicle in one view.

A user proactively updates vehicle mileage to receive adjusted maintenance reminders.

Given a user updates the mileage for a specific vehicle, when the mileage reflects an increase past the reminder threshold, then the system should send an updated maintenance reminder based on the new mileage.

Users can configure notification preferences for maintenance reminders in their account settings.

Given a user accesses the account settings, when they select their notification preferences, then their choices should be saved, and the system should send reminders according to these preferences (e.g., email only, mobile only, both).

Users receive reminders for both scheduled maintenance and recommended inspections based on vehicle specifics.

Given a user has a vehicle registered, when the due date for maintenance or a recommended inspection approaches, then the system should send separate reminders for both types of alerts, including detailed information on each.

Users can report a maintenance completion after performing services on their vehicles.

Given a user receives a maintenance reminder, when they perform the maintenance and log it in the AutoWatch system, then their vehicle's status should update, and next maintenance reminders should adjust accordingly.

Automated reminders are sent in a timely manner based on user-defined intervals or factory recommendations.

Given a user has set specific intervals for maintenance notifications, when the time frame approaches, then the system should trigger and send reminders without delay based on those intervals.

Billing Consolidation for Multiple Vehicles

"As a customer with several cars, I want to receive a consolidated bill that includes all my vehicles' maintenance and repair services, so that I can manage my payments more efficiently."

Description

The Billing Consolidation feature allows customers to receive one single invoice for all vehicles managed under their account. This streamlining of billing not only simplifies the payment process but also enhances transparency regarding individual service charges and vehicle-specific expenses. By providing an easily digestible overview of all expenditures associated with each vehicle, this feature can improve customer satisfaction and enable better financial planning. It integrates directly into the existing billing system of AutoWatch to maintain consistency and accuracy in billing practices while ensuring that the client's needs are met.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer with multiple vehicles logging into their AutoWatch account to view their billing information for all vehicles managed under a single account.

Given a customer has multiple vehicles associated with their account, when they log in to their AutoWatch account, then they should see one consolidated invoice that lists all vehicles and their corresponding services.

After a customer selects a service for one of their vehicles, they should receive an updated consolidated invoice that reflects the new charges.

Given a customer has requested a service for a vehicle, when the service is completed, then the consolidated invoice should update to reflect the new charge along with a breakdown of costs for all vehicles.

Customer attempts to make a payment on their consolidated invoice through the AutoWatch platform.

Given a customer has a consolidated invoice, when they choose to make a payment, then the payment should be processed successfully, and a confirmation should be sent to the customer's email.

Customer reviews their past invoices for all vehicles under their account.

Given a customer requests to view their invoice history, when they navigate to the billing section, then they should see a list of past invoices with the ability to expand each for detailed information per vehicle.

Admin reviews the integration of the billing consolidation feature in the AutoWatch system.

Given an admin user checks the billing system, when they assess the vehicle billing integration, then the system should show correct mappings of services and charges to the right vehicles under the same account.

A customer wants to dispute a charge on their consolidated invoice.

Given a customer identifies a discrepancy on their invoice, when they submit a dispute request through the AutoWatch platform, then the system should log the dispute and notify the customer of the follow-up process.

Customer receives notifications via email regarding their consolidated billing statement each billing cycle.

Given a customer has opted into billing notifications, when a new consolidated invoice is generated, then they should receive an email outlining the invoice details and payment due date.

Vehicle History Reports

"As a multi-vehicle owner, I want to access the service history of each vehicle, so that I can track past repairs and ensure that all necessary services have been performed."

Description

The Vehicle History Reports feature allows users to access detailed service histories for each vehicle in their account. These reports include past maintenance records, repair services performed, and important parts replacement information. By providing an easily accessible history of services, this feature empowers customers to make informed decisions about future maintenance and encourages proactive vehicle care. This functionality aligns well with AutoWatch's goal of improving client engagement and promotes transparent communication regarding service history, maximizing trust and reliability.

Acceptance Criteria

Accessing Vehicle History Reports for a single vehicle

Given a user has logged into their AutoWatch account, when the user selects a vehicle, then the system should display the complete service history report, including maintenance records and parts replacement details.

Accessing Vehicle History Reports for multiple vehicles

Given a user has multiple vehicles under one account, when the user selects a vehicle from the list, then the system should accurately fetch and display the individual service history report for that vehicle without errors.

Viewing the date and details of past services

Given a user is viewing the Vehicle History Report, when the user scrolls through the report, then all past service dates and details should be presented chronologically and clearly labeled for easy understanding.

Downloading Vehicle History Reports

Given a user is viewing the Vehicle History Report, when the user clicks the 'Download' button, then the system should generate a PDF report of the service history, which can be saved to the user’s device without formatting issues.

Searching for specific service records

Given a user is viewing the Vehicle History Report, when the user uses the search function to find a specific service record, then the system should return relevant results that match the search criteria within 2 seconds.

Receiving timely notifications for new service updates

Given a user has set notification preferences, when a vehicle receives a new service or maintenance update, then the user should receive a notification within 10 minutes of the update being made in the system.

Custom Maintenance Plans

"As a vehicle owner, I want to create a custom maintenance plan for each of my vehicles, so that I can ensure my cars are properly maintained according to their unique needs."

Description

The Custom Maintenance Plans feature allows users to create tailored maintenance schedules tailored to the specific needs and usage patterns of each vehicle. Customers can set preferences based on mileage, driving conditions, and vehicle type, ensuring they receive customized service recommendations. This feature not only provides a personalized user experience but also helps shops optimize service offerings based on customer preferences, fostering long-term loyalty and commitment to the shop. Integration with the AutoWatch system ensures that maintenance plans remain dynamic and are adjusted as necessary based on usage and performance data.

Acceptance Criteria

User creates a custom maintenance plan for multiple vehicles under one account.

Given a user with multiple vehicles, when they access the custom maintenance plan feature, then they should be able to create and save tailored maintenance schedules for each vehicle based on individual usage patterns.

User receives notifications for upcoming maintenance based on their custom maintenance plans.

Given a user with an active custom maintenance plan, when the scheduled maintenance date approaches, then the user should receive an automated notification via their preferred communication method.

User can edit existing custom maintenance plans to adjust for changes in vehicle usage or conditions.

Given a user accesses their existing maintenance plan, when they modify any aspect of the plan (such as mileage or driving conditions), then the changes should be successfully saved and reflected in the current plan details.

System dynamically adjusts maintenance recommendations based on real-time vehicle performance data.

Given a vehicle integrated with performance sensors, when the system receives updated data, then it should automatically suggest adjustments to the custom maintenance plan that reflect the new usage and performance statistics.

User can view a summary of all custom maintenance plans for their vehicles on a single dashboard.

Given a user has created multiple custom maintenance plans, when they access their dashboard, then they should see a summary listing all plans along with key details such as next scheduled maintenance and overdue services.

User can delete a custom maintenance plan if they no longer need it.

Given a user accesses their custom maintenance plans, when they choose to delete a specific plan, then that plan should be removed from their account and not found in future listings.

24/7 Online Account Access

24/7 Online Account Access provides customers with anytime access to their subscription details, maintenance records, and upcoming service reminders. This transparency fosters trust and enhances customer engagement by allowing users to easily view their service history and upcoming needs, which further drives proactive vehicle maintenance and satisfaction.

Requirements

User Authentication System

"As a customer, I want to securely log in to my account so that I can access my subscription details and service history without worrying about my data being compromised."

Description

The User Authentication System enables secure login and registration for customers accessing their accounts online. It ensures that user data is protected through encryption, password strength validation, and secure session management. By implementing multi-factor authentication, the system adds an extra layer of security, which is crucial for maintaining customer trust and compliance with data protection regulations. This requirement enhances user experience by providing a seamless yet secure login process, allowing customers to manage their accounts with confidence.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer successfully registers a new account on the AutoWatch platform.

Given a new customer accesses the registration page, when they enter valid details and submit the form, then their account is created successfully and a confirmation email is sent to their registered email address.

Customer logs in with valid credentials.

Given an existing customer is on the login page, when they enter their valid username and password, then they gain access to their account dashboard.

Customer attempts to log in with invalid credentials.

Given a customer is on the login page, when they enter an incorrect username or password, then an error message is displayed indicating that the login attempt has failed.

Customer successfully retrieves their forgotten password.

Given a customer is on the login page, when they click on the 'Forgot Password' link and submit their email address, then they receive an email with password reset instructions.

Customer enables multi-factor authentication for their account.

Given a customer is logged into their account, when they navigate to the security settings and enable multi-factor authentication, then they must complete the verification process successfully before it is activated.

Customer views their account details after logging in.

Given a customer is logged into their account, when they navigate to the account details page, then they can view their subscription information, service records, and upcoming reminders without any errors.

Customer logs out of their account securely.

Given a customer is logged into their account, when they click the 'Logout' button, then they are logged out of the system and redirected to the login page, ensuring that their session is terminated.

Maintenance Reminder Notifications

"As a customer, I want to receive notifications about my vehicle's upcoming maintenance so that I can keep my car in optimal condition and avoid any last-minute issues."

Description

The Maintenance Reminder Notifications feature automatically alerts users about upcoming scheduled services and important maintenance tasks for their vehicles. Using email and SMS notifications, the system keeps customers informed about when they need to bring their vehicles in for service, helping them maintain their vehicles better and reducing the risk of potential breakdowns. This capability not only enhances customer engagement but also drives business to the auto repair shops by encouraging timely servicing.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives a maintenance reminder notification for an upcoming oil change.

Given a user has a vehicle with an upcoming oil change scheduled, when the notification time occurs, then the user receives an email and SMS reminder 48 hours before the scheduled service.

User can access their maintenance reminder history through their online account.

Given a user logs into their online account, when they navigate to the 'Maintenance Reminders' section, then they should see a complete history of all past reminders including dates and services due.

User updates their preferred notification method for maintenance reminders.

Given a user is in their account settings, when they change their notification preference from email to SMS, then they should receive a confirmation message indicating the preference has been updated successfully.

User does not receive a reminder if the maintenance service has been completed.

Given a user marks their scheduled service as complete in the system, when the scheduled service time arrives, then no maintenance reminder notification should be sent to the user.

User receives a reminder for a service that was rescheduled.

Given a user has a vehicle service that was previously scheduled and has been rescheduled, when the new date approaches, they should receive an email and SMS reminder 48 hours before the new scheduled service date.

User accesses the notification settings through the mobile app.

Given a user is logged into their account via the mobile app, when they navigate to the 'Notification Settings', then they should see options to customize their maintenance reminder notifications, including frequency and method of delivery.

Service History Overview

"As a customer, I want to see a detailed history of my vehicle's services so that I can understand my car's maintenance needs and budget for upcoming repairs."

Description

The Service History Overview provides customers with a comprehensive view of their vehicle's maintenance and repair history. This feature allows users to track past services, including dates, services performed, and costs associated with each service. By offering a clear timeline of service events, this requirement helps customers make informed decisions about future maintenance, fosters trust in the repair shop, and encourages them to return for additional services.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer logs into their AutoWatch account during regular business hours to check their vehicle's service history.

Given the customer enters valid login credentials, When they navigate to the Service History section, Then the system should display a comprehensive list of all past services, including dates, services performed, and costs associated with each service.

The customer accesses their AutoWatch account during the evening to review recent repairs conducted on their vehicle.

Given the customer is logged into their account, When they select a specific date range for their service history, Then the system should accurately filter and display only those services performed within the selected date range.

A customer wants to verify the details of the last maintenance performed for their vehicle before scheduling a new appointment.

Given the customer has successfully accessed their account, When they view the Service History Overview, Then the system should highlight the most recent service entry and display the necessary details including date, services performed, and total cost.

A customer is using a smartphone to access their service history on the AutoWatch platform.

Given the customer is using a mobile device, When they log into their account and navigate to the Service History section, Then the service history should be displayed responsively, ensuring all information is easily readable and accessible on a mobile interface.

A customer wishes to compare service costs from different visits to their vehicle at their convenience.

Given the customer is on the Service History page, When they select at least two service entries, Then the system should present a side-by-side comparison of services performed, dates, and costs, enabling an easy analysis of past expenses.

An existing customer is reviewing their service history after receiving a notification about upcoming maintenance needs.

Given the customer receives a service reminder notification, When they access their Service History overview, Then they should see all relevant past repair details that aid in making an informed decision on the needed upcoming repairs.

A customer is dissatisfied with the service records displayed in their account and wants to provide feedback.

Given the customer accesses the Service History and notes inaccuracies, When they fill out a feedback form specifying the issues, Then their feedback should be submitted successfully and recorded in the system for further review.

Account Settings Management

"As a customer, I want to manage my account settings so that I can keep my information up-to-date and receive notifications in my preferred way."

Description

The Account Settings Management capability allows users to easily update their personal information, notifications preferences, and payment methods within their accounts. This feature promotes user autonomy by giving customers control over their accounts, ensuring they can manage their personal data effectively and efficiently. Ensuring easy access to modify settings enhances user satisfaction and fosters continued engagement with the AutoWatch platform.

Acceptance Criteria

User successfully updates their personal information in the account settings.

Given a logged-in user navigates to Account Settings, when they enter valid data in the personal information fields and click 'Save', then the system updates the information and displays a success message confirming the changes.

User modifies their notification preferences and saves the changes.

Given a logged-in user is on the Account Settings page, when they change their notification preferences and click 'Save', then the system applies the new settings and shows a confirmation of the updated preferences.

User adds a new payment method to their account.

Given a logged-in user accesses the Payment Method section in Account Settings, when they fill in the necessary fields for a new payment method and click 'Add', then the system saves the new payment method and displays it in the user's payment methods list.

User deletes an existing payment method from their account.

Given a logged-in user is viewing their saved payment methods, when they select a payment method and click 'Delete', then the system removes the selected payment method and confirms the action with a success message.

User tries to update personal information with invalid data.

Given a logged-in user attempts to enter invalid data in the personal information fields, when they click 'Save', then the system displays error messages indicating which fields contain invalid data and prevents the update.

User accesses the account settings and wants to view their history of changes.

Given a logged-in user is on the Account Settings page, when they click on the 'Change History' link, then the system displays a log of all previous changes made to their account settings.

User changes their password and successfully logs in with the new password.

Given a logged-in user is on the Account Settings page, when they enter a new password in the password change fields and click 'Save', then they should be able to log out and log in again using the new password successfully.

Real-Time Chat Support

"As a customer, I want to chat with support in real-time so that I can get quick answers to my questions without having to wait for an email response."

Description

Real-Time Chat Support enables instant communication between customers and support representatives, providing timely assistance with account issues, service inquiries, or technical difficulties. This feature will enhance customer experience by reducing wait times and offering direct, personalized support. Integrating a chat system into the platform promotes proactive engagement and helps resolve customer issues quickly, ultimately leading to higher customer satisfaction rates.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the real-time chat support feature from the AutoWatch dashboard during business hours to ask a question about billing.

Given the user is logged in, when they click on the chat support icon, then a chat window should open, displaying the current support representative's name and a prompt for the user's inquiry.

Customer initiates a chat after business hours to inquire about service reminders and receives a response.

Given the chat support is available 24/7, when a customer sends a message during off-business hours, then they should receive an automated response acknowledging their question and stating a support agent will follow up as soon as possible.

A user sends a chat request for technical support regarding system issues while attempting to access their account.

Given the user types their technical issue in the chat, when they submit the chat, then the system should log the request and an available representative should be alerted to engage within 1 minute.

A customer is in the middle of a chat discussion and has to leave the website.

Given the user has an active chat session, when they navigate away from the chat window, then the chat should retain the conversation history upon their return within the same session.

User provides feedback on the chat support experience after resolving their issue.

Given the chat has concluded, when the customer clicks on the feedback form link, then they should be presented with a satisfaction survey rating their experience from 1 to 5 stars, along with an optional comments section.

A user utilizes the chat support feature on a mobile device while on the go.

Given the user is on a mobile device, when they click on the chat support icon, then the chat interface should be fully responsive and easy to navigate, allowing for seamless interaction.

Customer Segmentation

This feature automatically categorizes customers based on their behavior, preferences, and service history. By creating tailored segments, shop owners can deliver highly personalized marketing campaigns, ensuring messages resonate with specific groups and improving engagement rates.

Requirements

Automated Customer Categorization

"As an auto repair shop owner, I want to automatically categorize my customers based on their behavior and service history, so that I can send personalized marketing campaigns that resonate with their specific needs and preferences."

Description

This requirement entails the implementation of an automated system that categorizes customers based on various criteria such as service history, behavioral patterns, and preferences. The system will utilize data analytics to segment customers into tailored groups, enabling auto repair shop owners to approach their marketing strategies with precision. By categorizing customers effectively, shop owners can enhance their marketing efforts, thereby increasing engagement and customer satisfaction. The integration of this feature within the AutoWatch platform will streamline operations, eliminate the need for manual segmentation, and ensure that marketing messages resonate more effectively with each customer group, significantly improving overall campaign performance.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer segmentation based on service history

Given a customer service history with various service records, when the system processes this data, then customers should be accurately categorized into segments such as 'frequent service users', 'seasonal users', and 'new customers'.

Customer segmentation based on behavioral patterns

Given customer interaction data, when the system analyzes behavior such as response rates to previous campaigns, then it should segment customers into groups like 'high engagement', 'low engagement', and 'inactive'.

Customer segmentation based on preferences

Given data on customer preferences collected through surveys, when the system categorizes these preferences, then customers should be divided into segments such as 'preferred contact method: email', 'preferred service type', and 'preferred appointment time'.

Automated marketing campaign targeting specific segments

Given a predefined marketing campaign aimed at a specific customer segment, when the campaign is launched, then the system should send personalized messages to the appropriate segment and track engagement metrics such as open rate and click-through rate.

Integration of customer segmentation with existing marketing tools

Given the existing marketing tools used by the auto repair shop, when the customer segmentation feature is integrated, then it should be able to seamlessly import and export customer data to and from these tools without data loss.

Real-time update of customer segments

Given that a customer's service history and preferences change, when the system detects these changes, then it should automatically reassign the customer to the appropriate segment in real-time, ensuring the segments are always current.

Analytics on the effectiveness of segmented marketing campaigns

Given that segmented marketing campaigns have been executed, when the system analyzes the outcomes, then it should provide reports on customer engagement, sales conversion rates, and return on investment for each segment to determine campaign effectiveness.

Behavioral Analytics Dashboard

"As a shop owner, I want to access a dashboard that displays behavioral analytics of my customers, so that I can understand their preferences and adjust my services and marketing strategies accordingly."

Description

This requirement involves the creation of a comprehensive dashboard designed to provide shop owners with insights into customer behavior through visual analytics. The dashboard will display metrics related to customer interactions, service choices, and engagement levels. By leveraging real-time data analytics, shop owners will be able to monitor trends and improve their service offerings based on customer preferences. This feature not only enhances decision-making but also assists in resource allocation by identifying which services are most popular within specific customer segments. Ultimately, it empowers shop owners to create targeted strategies that foster loyalty and improve operational efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

Viewing Customer Behavior Trends

Given that the shop owner is logged into the AutoWatch platform, when they navigate to the Behavioral Analytics Dashboard, then they should see visual graphs displaying customer interactions and service choices over the past six months.

Segmenting Customers for Targeted Marketing

Given that the shop owner has access to customer data, when they select a specific customer segment on the Behavioral Analytics Dashboard, then they should be able to view detailed metrics and insights related to that segment.

Comparing Engagement Levels Across Services

Given that the Behavioral Analytics Dashboard is displaying customer engagement metrics, when the shop owner filters the data by service type, then they should see engagement levels for each service compared side by side in the dashboard.

Generating Custom Reports

Given that the shop owner is using the Behavioral Analytics Dashboard, when they select the option to generate a report based on customer behavior data, then they should be able to download a custom report in PDF format containing the specified metrics.

Real-Time Data Refresh

Given that the shop owner is viewing the Behavioral Analytics Dashboard, when new customer interactions occur, then the dashboard should automatically refresh to reflect the most current data without requiring a manual refresh.

Identifying Popular Services Among Customer Segments

Given that the dashboard displays service popularity metrics, when the shop owner looks at the data, then they should be able to see which services are most favored by each customer segment, allowing for informed decision-making.

Utilizing Data for Enhanced Marketing Strategies

Given that the shop owner has accessed customer behavioral data from the dashboard, when they analyze this data, then they should be equipped to develop tailored marketing campaigns based on customer preferences and engagement levels.

Personalized Marketing Campaigns

"As a marketer for the auto repair shop, I want to create personalized marketing campaigns based on customer segmentation, so that I can enhance engagement and drive conversions with more relevant messages."

Description

This requirement focuses on enabling the system to create dynamic marketing campaigns that are tailored to specific customer segments. Utilizing the data generated by the customer segmentation feature, the platform will allow users to design and deploy campaigns that correspond to the interests and behaviors of each segment. This personalization will result in higher engagement rates and better conversion as campaigns are more relevant to recipients. By integrating this capability with email and SMS marketing tools, shop owners can automate outreach efforts, saving time and resources while effectively reaching their audience. The implementation of this requirement is crucial for enhancing customer experience and driving revenue growth.

Acceptance Criteria

Creating a New Personalized Marketing Campaign

Given a user is logged into the AutoWatch platform, when they select the 'Create Campaign' option and choose customer segments based on behavior and service history, then the system should allow the user to customize campaign content and schedule delivery.

Previewing a Marketing Campaign Before Sending

Given a user has created a marketing campaign, when they click on the 'Preview' button, then the system should display a realistic representation of the email and SMS format as it will appear to customers with all dynamic content rendered correctly.

Sending Campaigns to Customer Segments

Given a user has finalized marketing campaigns for specific customer segments, when they click 'Send Now', then the system should successfully deliver the campaigns to all intended recipients without errors and log the delivery status.

Tracking Engagement Metrics of Campaigns

Given that campaigns have been sent, when the user views the 'Campaign Analytics' dashboard, then the system should display metrics such as open rates, click-through rates, and conversion rates for each segment within 24 hours of sending.

Modifying an Active Marketing Campaign

Given a marketing campaign is currently active, when the user selects the option to edit the campaign, then the user should be able to update the content, schedule, or target segments without requiring a new campaign creation process.

Automated Customer Feedback Collection Post-Campaign

Given a marketing campaign has been executed, when the campaign concludes, then the system should automatically send a feedback survey to customers, tracking responses and displaying aggregated results in the campaign analytics.

Dynamic Content Creation

Dynamic Content Creation allows for the automatic generation of customized marketing materials based on individual customer data. This ensures that each recipient receives relevant content—be it promotions, service reminders, or educational materials—enhancing the likelihood of engagement and response.

Requirements

Personalized Marketing Automation

"As a shop owner, I want to automatically create personalized marketing materials based on customer data so that I can increase customer engagement and retention."

Description

The Personalized Marketing Automation feature will enable auto repair shops to automatically generate tailored marketing materials based on specific customer data. This includes variable content for emails, SMS promotions, service reminders, and educational resources. By utilizing customer purchase history, preferences, and location, the system can create relevant content that speaks directly to the customer's needs, thereby increasing engagement rates and driving repeat business. This integration will streamline the marketing process, making it easier for shop owners to retain customers and attract new ones, ultimately enhancing customer satisfaction and loyalty.

Acceptance Criteria

Generate personalized email marketing campaigns for customers based on their purchase history and preferences.

Given a customer with a purchase history and preferences, when the shop owner uses the Personalized Marketing Automation feature to create a campaign, then the generated email should include tailored promotions and service reminders relevant to the customer's past interactions.

Send automated SMS reminders for upcoming services based on customer data.

Given a customer's scheduled service date, when the system generates an SMS reminder, then the SMS should be sent 24 hours prior and include service details, and the customer's name for personalization.

Create and distribute marketing materials for specific customer segments based on location and preferences.

Given a set of customers segmented by location and preferences, when the shop owner selects a target segment for a marketing campaign, then the system should generate content tailored to that segment and ensure distribution to selected customers' preferred communication channels.

Provide shop owners with analytics on the performance of personalized marketing campaigns.

Given a completed marketing campaign, when the shop owner accesses the analytics dashboard, then it should display engagement metrics such as open rates, click rates, and conversion rates for each type of communication sent.

Enable customization of marketing content templates for different types of communications.

Given a shop owner accessing the marketing automation interface, when they edit a content template for email promotions, then the changes should be saved and reflected across all future communications using that template.

Integrate customer feedback into the marketing automation process to refine future campaigns.

Given collected customer feedback from previous campaigns, when the shop owner inputs this feedback into the system, then the marketing automation feature should use this data to adjust targeting and content for upcoming campaigns

Real-Time Analytics Dashboard

"As a shop owner, I want to see a real-time dashboard of my business performance so that I can make timely decisions to optimize operations."

Description

The Real-Time Analytics Dashboard will provide shop owners with an instant overview of their business metrics. This includes tracking sales performance, customer engagement, service completion rates, and inventory levels in real time. The dashboard will enable users to visualize data through graphs and charts that can help in identifying trends and making informed decisions quickly. This feature aims to empower shop owners with actionable insights to improve operational efficiency and profitability, allowing them to respond dynamically to their business environment.

Acceptance Criteria

Shop owner logs into the Real-Time Analytics Dashboard to check daily sales performance after the morning shift.

Given the shop owner is on the dashboard, when they view the sales performance section, then they should see total sales figures for the current day and a comparison with the previous day's sales.

The shop owner wants to analyze customer engagement metrics at the end of the week.

Given the shop owner accesses the dashboard at the end of the week, when they select the customer engagement metrics, then they should see graphical representations of customer interactions and feedback over the past week.

Inventory management is crucial during a busy service day, and the owner needs to check current inventory levels on the dashboard.

Given the shop owner views the Real-Time Analytics Dashboard, when they navigate to the inventory section, then they should see the real-time stock levels of products and alerts for low stock items highlighted.

After completing a service, the shop owner wants to measure the service completion rates through the dashboard.

Given the shop owner is on the dashboard, when they look at the service completion section, then they should see the completion rates of their services alongside average time taken for each service type.

The shop owner needs to track the profitability of their services as quarterly reports are being prepared.

Given the shop owner selects the profitability metrics on the dashboard, when they review the data, then they should see a breakdown of profits by service type and a comparison with previous quarters.

During a strategic meeting, the shop owner wants to present the monthly sales trends using the dashboard.

Given the shop owner is viewing the dashboard, when they choose the monthly view option in the sales section, then they should see a line graph illustrating monthly sales trends for the past six months.

The owner wants to ensure that the dashboard is user-friendly for quick access to data during busy hours.

Given the shop owner is navigating the dashboard, when they attempt to access any section (sales, customer engagement, inventory), then the response time should not exceed three seconds and the layout should be intuitive.

Automated Customer Notifications

"As a customer, I want to receive automated notifications about my service appointments so that I can manage my schedule effectively and not miss important updates."

Description

Automated Customer Notifications will allow auto repair shops to send timely updates to their customers regarding service appointments, reminders for maintenance due, or notifications for special promotions. This feature will ensure that customers are kept in the loop without requiring manual input from shop staff, reducing no-show rates and improving customer satisfaction. Notifications can be sent via email, SMS, or through the app, allowing for flexibility in communication preferences, thus enhancing the overall customer experience.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer receives a service appointment reminder via their preferred communication method (email/SMS/app notification) 24 hours prior to their appointment.

Given a customer with a scheduled appointment, When the appointment is 24 hours away, Then the customer should receive a notification through their selected channel.

Customer receives a maintenance reminder based on their vehicle's service history at least one week before the maintenance due date.

Given a customer with upcoming maintenance due, When the due date is one week away, Then the customer should receive a reminder notification.

Customer receives notification of a special promotion tailored to their service history and preferences.

Given a customer eligible for a promotion, When the promotion is activated, Then the customer should receive a personalized notification via their chosen method.

Shop staff can view records of all notifications sent to customers, including timestamps and delivery statuses.

Given the shop staff is logged into the system, When they access the notifications history, Then they should see a comprehensive log of all notifications sent to customers.

Customer can opt-in or opt-out of notification types anytime through the app.

Given a customer accesses their notification settings, When they select the preferences, Then their choices should be saved and reflected in future notifications.

System must handle errors in notification delivery gracefully and inform the shop staff.

Given a notification fails to send, When the system detects the failure, Then an alert should notify the shop staff of the issue immediately.

Customer receives a feedback request notification after a service appointment.

Given a completed service appointment, When the appointment is marked complete, Then the customer should receive a feedback request notification within 48 hours.

Integration with Social Media Platforms

"As a shop owner, I want to automatically post promotions on social media platforms so that I can reach a larger audience and increase brand visibility."

Description

The Integration with Social Media Platforms feature will allow auto repair shops to seamlessly connect their marketing efforts with popular social media channels. This feature will enable users to share promotional content and service reminders directly from AutoWatch to platforms like Facebook, Twitter, and Instagram. This integration will also facilitate audience engagement and interactivity, allowing shops to promote special events and offers to a wider audience, thus driving traffic to their physical location and online platforms.

Acceptance Criteria

Sharing promotional content on social media platforms for a special event.

Given a user has created a promotional content message in AutoWatch, when the user selects the 'Share on Social Media' option and chooses Facebook, then the content should be published on the auto repair shop's Facebook page with no errors and should display correctly.

Automating service reminders to customers via social media.

Given a user has entered customer data and scheduled a service reminder in AutoWatch, when the reminder is triggered, then the system should automatically create a post on the selected social media platforms reflecting the scheduled service date and time with the appropriate customer tagging.

Analytics tracking for social media engagements driven by AutoWatch posts.

Given that promotional and service reminder posts have been made via AutoWatch, when the user checks the engagement analytics in their AutoWatch dashboard, then the system should accurately reflect the number of likes, shares, and comments received within a defined time frame.

Integrating multiple social media platforms for posting.

Given a user has an active AutoWatch account and linked social media platforms, when the user attempts to post content, then the system should allow posting to multiple platforms (Facebook, Twitter, Instagram) simultaneously without any integration issues.

Customizing content for different social media formats.

Given a user is preparing promotional content in AutoWatch, when the user selects 'Format for Social Media', then the system should automatically adjust the content to fit the required formats for Facebook, Twitter, and Instagram, ensuring all posts meet platform-specific guidelines.

User notifications for successful social media integration activities.

Given a user has performed an action to share content via social media from AutoWatch, when the action is completed, then the user should receive a confirmation notification indicating the status of the share (successful or failed) along with relevant details.

Customer Segmentation Tools

"As a shop owner, I want to segment my customers based on their behavior so that I can create targeted marketing campaigns that resonate with each group."

Description

The Customer Segmentation Tools will enable shop owners to categorize their customers based on various criteria such as service frequency, type of services availed, and customer feedback. This feature will allow owners to conduct targeted marketing campaigns tailored to specific segments of their customer base, enhancing the relevance of their communications. By addressing the unique needs of different groups, shop owners can improve customer relationships and optimize their marketing efforts for greater effectiveness.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer Segmentation for targeted email marketing campaigns

Given the shop owner accesses the Customer Segmentation Tools, When they define a segmentation criterion (e.g., service frequency), Then the system should categorize customers accordingly and allow the owner to view segmented lists for targeted email campaigns.

Creating promotional content for specific customer segments

Given a customer segment has been created based on service type, When the shop owner selects this segment to generate promotional material, Then the system should produce a customized promotional email that reflects the services relevant to that segment's customers.

Analyzing effectiveness of customer segments in marketing campaigns

Given the shop owner executes a marketing campaign targeted at a specific customer segment, When they access the reporting dashboard, Then the system should display metrics showing engagement rates (e.g., open rates, click-through rates) for that specific segment campaign.

Adjusting parameters for customer segmentation

Given that a shop owner wants to modify existing segmentation criteria, When they update the parameters for a specific segment in the Customer Segmentation Tools, Then the system should automatically re-categorize customers according to the new criteria within 5 minutes.

Ensuring accurate data integration from customer database

Given that customer data is imported from an external database, When the data import process is complete, Then the system should confirm that the number of customers segmented matches the expected count based on the imported data for each defined criterion.

Automated customer feedback collection for segmentation

Given that a shop owner activates automated feedback requests after service completion, When customers submit their feedback, Then the system should categorize these customers into segments based on their feedback scores and types within 24 hours.

Campaign Performance Dashboard

The Campaign Performance Dashboard provides real-time analytics on marketing campaigns, showcasing metrics such as open rates, click-through rates, and conversion statistics. This enables shop owners to measure the effectiveness of their efforts, identify areas for improvement, and adjust strategies for maximum impact.

Requirements

Real-time Analytics Display

"As a shop owner, I want to view real-time analytics on my marketing campaigns so that I can understand their effectiveness and make informed decisions to optimize future campaigns."

Description

The Campaign Performance Dashboard requires a real-time analytics display that showcases key marketing metrics such as open rates, click-through rates, and conversion statistics in a visually engaging manner. This feature will allow users to easily interpret the performance of their campaigns through graphs and charts. The dashboard will be integrated with existing marketing tools within AutoWatch, pulling data automatically to provide up-to-date insights. The implementation of this feature is crucial as it enhances the decision-making process for shop owners by presenting data in an easily digestible format, leading to informed strategy adjustments and operational improvements.

Acceptance Criteria

View Real-time Analytics on the Campaign Performance Dashboard.

Given that the user has logged into the AutoWatch platform and accessed the Campaign Performance Dashboard, when they view the dashboard, then they should see real-time metrics for open rates, click-through rates, and conversion statistics displayed in visually engaging graphs and charts, updated every minute.

Filter Analytics by Date Range on the Dashboard.

Given that the user is on the Campaign Performance Dashboard, when they select a specific date range from the filter options, then the displayed metrics for open rates, click-through rates, and conversion statistics should adjust accordingly to reflect data only within the selected date range.

Integration of Marketing Tools for Data Pulling.

Given that the marketing tools within AutoWatch are set up and configured, when a user accesses the Campaign Performance Dashboard, then the real-time analytics should automatically pull data from these marketing tools without requiring manual updates or inputs.

Receive Notifications for Campaign Performance Changes.

Given that the user is monitoring their marketing campaigns, when there is a significant change in key metrics (e.g., a drop or spike in open rates), then the system should automatically send a notification to the user through the platform, alerting them to the performance change.

Download Campaign Performance Reports.

Given that the user is on the Campaign Performance Dashboard, when they click the 'Download Report' button, then a CSV or PDF file containing the current metrics and visual representations should be generated and downloaded successfully.

Customize Dashboard Metrics Display.

Given that the user is on the Campaign Performance Dashboard, when they access the customization settings, then they should be able to select which specific metrics to display (e.g., open rates, click-through rates) and in what format (e.g., graph, chart) without errors.

Ensure Data Accuracy in Metrics Displayed.

Given that the user is viewing the metrics on the Campaign Performance Dashboard, when they cross-verify displayed metrics against the source marketing tool data, then the numbers should match exactly within a tolerance of +/- 2% for verifying the accuracy of the analytics.

Customizable Reporting Options

"As a shop owner, I want to create customizable reports that focus on the metrics that matter most to me so that I can easily share insights with my team."

Description

The Campaign Performance Dashboard should feature customizable reporting options that allow shop owners to tailor their analytics reports based on specific metrics or time frames. Users should be able to select and filter the data they wish to analyze, enabling a deeper dive into campaign performance. This functionality will support better analysis by focusing on areas that are most relevant to the shop’s goals. Custom reports can be generated and exported in multiple formats, such as PDF or Excel, facilitating easy sharing with team members or stakeholders. This flexibility enhances the usability of the dashboard, ensuring that it meets diverse business needs.

Acceptance Criteria

Shop owner wants to generate a customizable report for their recent marketing campaign, focusing on the last month’s performance metrics such as open rates and conversion statistics.

Given the shop owner has accessed the Campaign Performance Dashboard, when they select the custom reporting options and filter by the last month, then the dashboard should display the relevant metrics for the specified time frame.

The marketing manager needs to analyze the effectiveness of multiple campaigns over a specified period in order to present findings at a team meeting.

Given the marketing manager has chosen multiple campaigns and selected a date range, when they generate the report, then the report should include data for all chosen campaigns within the specified period and be downloadable in PDF format.

A shop owner wishes to share campaign performance metrics with stakeholders using various formats such as PDF and Excel.

Given the shop owner has generated a custom report on the Campaign Performance Dashboard, when they select the export option, then they should be able to download the report in either PDF or Excel format without errors.

A user wants to refine their campaign analysis by including or excluding certain data points based on specific metrics.

Given the user is on the custom reporting options, when they add or remove metrics from the report criteria, then the report generated should accurately reflect these changes in reported data.

A shop owner wants to verify the reliability of the data displayed in their customizable report.

Given the shop owner has viewed the generated report, when they compare the displayed metrics against the raw data from the database, then the metrics in the report should match the corresponding raw data values accurately.

The marketing coordinator is tracking ongoing campaign performance and wants to adjust the reporting period frequently.

Given the marketing coordinator is viewing the Campaign Performance Dashboard, when they change the reporting period several times in succession, then the dashboard updates the metrics displayed accurately for each adjusted period without delay.

Automated Campaign Alerts

"As a shop owner, I want to receive automated alerts about my campaign performance so that I can quickly respond to significant changes and maximize my marketing effectiveness."

Description

The Campaign Performance Dashboard must include an automated alert system that notifies shop owners of significant changes in their campaign metrics. This feature will help users stay informed about performance peaks or drops, ensuring that they can react promptly to emerging trends or issues. Alerts can be configured based on user-defined thresholds for key metrics, such as sudden decreases in engagement or conversion rates. This proactive communication will empower users to optimize their campaigns in real-time, ultimately enhancing their effectiveness and driving better results.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives an alert when their email campaign's open rate drops below a user-defined threshold.

Given the shop owner sets a threshold open rate of 20%, when the actual open rate drops to 19%, then the user should receive an immediate notification alerting them of the decrease.

User is notified when their social media engagement rates significantly increase beyond the defined target metric.

Given the shop owner sets a target engagement rate of 50%, when the actual engagement rate rises to 70%, then the user should receive a notification indicating the success of their campaign.

User can configure multiple alerts for different metrics on the Campaign Performance Dashboard.

Given the user is on the settings page, when they configure alerts for open rates, click-through rates, and conversion rates, then all configured alerts should save successfully and be reflected in the dashboard.

User can view historical data associated with any triggered alerts for trend analysis.

Given the system sends an alert for a significant change in metrics, when the user clicks on the alert, then they should see the historical performance data leading up to the alert event.

User's alerts are consistent and accurate over time with no false positives.

Given the shop owner has set specific thresholds, when they regularly review alerts over a month, then there should be no instances of alerts being triggered erroneously without significant changes in metrics.

User can turn on or off alerts dynamically based on their preference.

Given the user is on the alert settings page, when they toggle an alert type from 'on' to 'off', then the alert should be disabled and not trigger for future metric changes until re-enabled.

User receives alerts via multiple channels for better visibility.

Given the user has subscribed to receive alerts through emails and SMS, when an alert is triggered, then the user should receive notifications through both channels simultaneously.

Integration with CRM Systems

"As a shop owner, I want to integrate my Campaign Performance Dashboard with my CRM system so that I can analyze customer engagement alongside my marketing efforts."

Description

The Campaign Performance Dashboard should have the ability to integrate with existing Customer Relationship Management (CRM) systems used by shop owners. This integration will allow for a seamless data flow between marketing campaigns and customer data, providing a holistic view of campaign effectiveness. By synchronizing with CRM systems, users can track how marketing efforts translate into customer interactions, ultimately leading to improved targeting and engagement strategies. This requirement is critical as it ensures that the dashboard provides actionable insights that are directly linked to customer behavior and preferences.

Acceptance Criteria

Successful integration with popular CRM systems like Salesforce and HubSpot.

Given that the user is logged into AutoWatch and has provided CRM credentials, when the user initiates the integration process, then data from the CRM should flow into the Campaign Performance Dashboard without errors, and key customer metrics should be displayed accurately.

User experience of setting up the CRM integration.

Given that the user is on the CRM integration setup page, when the user selects a CRM system and follows the provided prompts, then the setup should complete in under 5 minutes, and a confirmation message should be displayed indicating success or failure of the integration.

Real-time updates on marketing campaign performance after CRM integration.

Given that the integration with the CRM system is established, when a marketing campaign is executed, then the dashboard should update in real time to reflect new metrics such as open rates, click-through rates, and conversions generated from the campaign within 1 minute of data receipt.

Validation of data accuracy post-integration.

Given that data is flowing from the CRM into the Campaign Performance Dashboard, when the user compares the dashboard metrics to the CRM records over a 30-day period, then the metrics shown on the dashboard should match the CRM data within a 5% margin of error.

User feedback on the overall integration experience.

Given that the user has completed the CRM integration, when the user navigates to the feedback section and rates their experience, then at least 80% of users should report a satisfaction rating of 4 or higher on a scale of 1 to 5.

Error handling during CRM integration failures.

Given that the user attempts to integrate with a CRM system that is currently offline, when the user tries to initiate the integration, then an appropriate error message should be displayed, explaining the issue and suggesting steps for resolution.

Reviewing customer interaction statistics derived from integrated CRM data.

Given that the CRM data is successfully integrated, when the user accesses the customer interaction statistics report, then the report should display insights about customer engagement trends and responses to marketing campaigns over the last 6 months, tailored to each campaign type.

User Training and Support Resources

"As a new user, I want access to training resources and support for the Campaign Performance Dashboard so that I can effectively understand and utilize its features for my marketing needs."

Description

The Campaign Performance Dashboard should include comprehensive user training and support resources to assist shop owners in leveraging the full capabilities of the dashboard. This feature will provide users with tutorials, FAQs, and customer service support to enhance their understanding of campaign performance metrics and dashboard functionalities. Well-designed training materials will empower users to make the most of their analytics tools, ultimately improving their marketing strategies. The inclusion of these resources is essential for user adoption and satisfaction, encouraging active use of the dashboard features.

Acceptance Criteria

Accessing User Training and Support Resources

Given the user is on the Campaign Performance Dashboard, when they click on the 'Help' button, then they should be redirected to a dedicated training and support resources page containing tutorials and FAQs.

Viewing Tutorials on Campaign Performance Metrics

Given the user accesses the training and support resources page, when they select a specific tutorial, then they should be able to view the video or document detailing the use of that particular campaign performance metric.

Searching for FAQs Related to Campaign Performance and Dashboard Use

Given the user is on the training and support resources page, when they enter a keyword in the FAQ search bar, then the page should display relevant FAQ entries pertaining to campaign performance and dashboard functionality.

Contacting Customer Service for Support

Given the user is on the training and support resources page, when they click the 'Contact Support' option, then they should be presented with a form to submit their inquiry and receive a confirmation that their request has been received.

User Feedback on Training Materials

Given the user has completed a tutorial or reviewed support resources, when prompted to provide feedback, then they should be able to submit a rating and a comment about the usefulness of the materials provided.

Accessing Mobile-Friendly Training Resources

Given the user is on the training and support resources page using a mobile device, when they navigate the page, then the layout should be responsive and easy to use without loss of functionality.

Recording User Engagement with Training Materials

Given the admin views the dashboard analytics, when they select the training resources report, then they should see metrics showing user engagement statistics such as the number of views and time spent on each tutorial.

Behavioral Trigger Campaigns

Behavioral Trigger Campaigns automatically send targeted messages based on specific customer interactions or milestones, such as birthdays or vehicle anniversaries. This timely communication fosters a personal connection, encouraging repeat visits and enhancing customer loyalty.

Requirements

Automated Message Segmentation

"As an auto repair shop owner, I want to segment my customers based on their behaviors and milestones so that I can send them personalized messages that improve my customer engagement and loyalty."

Description

This requirement focuses on developing a system that automatically segments customers into targeted groups based on their interactions and behaviors, such as service history, preferences, and milestones like birthdays or vehicle anniversaries. This feature will enhance personalization of communication, ensuring that messages sent to customers are relevant and timely, which is crucial for driving engagement and loyalty. The implementation will require integration with existing customer databases and real-time analytics tools to monitor customer behaviors and interactions effectively. The expected outcome is a significant increase in customer response rates and a stronger relationship between the shop and its customers.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer receives an automated birthday message based on their profile data.

Given a customer's birthday is approaching, when the system analyzes customer profiles, then the customer should receive a personalized birthday message via email or SMS at least one week before their birthday.

Customer is segmented into a group based on service history and receives targeted promotions.

Given a customer has completed a service in the last three months, when the system reviews service history data, then the customer should be automatically grouped and receive a promotional message for related services.

Milestone notifications are sent based on vehicle anniversaries.

Given a customer's vehicle anniversary is within the current month, when the system identifies the anniversary date, then the customer should receive an automated reminder and special offer related to their vehicle.

Real-time analytics are utilized to adjust customer segments dynamically.

Given new customer interaction data is collected, when the system processes this data, then customer segments should reflect updates within 24 hours to ensure timely messaging.

Feedback on automated messages is collected to improve future campaigns.

Given a customer receives an automated message, when they respond with feedback, then the feedback should be logged and analyzed for insights into message effectiveness.

Customer preferences for communication channels are respected during segmentation.

Given a customer prefers SMS communications, when the system segments customers for messaging, then the customer should only receive communications via their preferred channel.

Integration with existing customer databases is seamless and effective.

Given the existing customer database is updated, when the segmentation system accesses the database, then it should retrieve customer data without errors and apply segmentation rules as designed.

Customizable Message Templates

"As an auto repair shop owner, I want to have customizable message templates so that I can create brand-aligned communications for my customers and improve my engagement with them."

Description

The ability to create and manage customizable message templates is vital for this requirement. This feature enables shop owners to design messages that reflect their brand voice and tailor content specific to different customer segments or occasions. By providing drag-and-drop functionality for designing these templates, shop owners can easily create visually appealing and relevant communications without advanced technical skills. This aligns with the goal of strengthening the business's relationship with customers while maintaining a consistent brand image across all communications. The outcome will be professional-looking messages that can significantly improve customer engagement rates.

Acceptance Criteria

Shop owners want to create a birthday message template to send personalized greetings to customers on their birthdays.

Given a shop owner is logged into the AutoWatch platform, when they navigate to the 'Message Templates' section and select 'Create New Template', then they should be able to use drag-and-drop functionality to add text, images, and special offers, and save the template with a customizable title and subject line.

A shop owner needs to edit an existing message template to better reflect their current branding and promotional offers.

Given a shop owner is in the 'Message Templates' section, when selecting an existing template and clicking 'Edit', then they should be able to change the content, layout, and design elements of the template, and save the changes without errors.

After creating a new message template, the shop owner wants to preview the template before sending it out to customers to ensure it appears correctly on different devices.

Given a shop owner has completed designing a new message template, when they select 'Preview', then the template should render accurately in a mobile view and a desktop view to ensure responsiveness and visual appeal.

The shop owner wants to create multiple message templates for various customer interactions, including service reminders and anniversaries.

Given the shop owner is creating message templates, when they successfully save multiple templates, then each template should appear in the 'Message Templates' list with the correct names and details, and should be easily selectable for future campaigns.

Shop owners need to ensure that messages are sent to the correct customer segments based on the message template they choose.

Given a shop owner has created a message template, when they set up a campaign using that template and choose the target customer segment, then the system should correctly identify and classify customers, as verified by a log of selected recipients.

Once a message template is designed, the shop owner would like to set automated triggers based on specific events (e.g., customer birthdays).

Given a shop owner has designed a message template, when they associate it with an automated trigger for customer events, then the system should confirm the setup with an overview indicating the trigger conditions and the template that will be sent.

The shop owner wants to analyze the performance of the sent campaigns using the created message templates.

Given that a shop owner has sent campaigns using message templates, when they check the analytics section of AutoWatch, then they should see engagement metrics such as open rates and click-through rates associated with each template used in the campaigns.

Multi-Channel Campaign Support

"As an auto repair shop owner, I want to support multiple communication channels for my behavioral campaigns so that I can engage with my customers on the platform they prefer."

Description

This requirement aims to implement multi-channel support for the behavioral trigger campaigns, allowing shop owners to send messages through various channels including email, SMS, and social media platforms. This broadens the reach and effectiveness of campaigns, as customers can receive messages through their preferred communication channels. Integration with existing marketing and communication platforms is essential to ensure seamless delivery. The anticipated benefit is an enhanced customer experience leading to increased retention and repeat visits, as customers will be reached in their preferred manner.

Acceptance Criteria

User Initiated Multi-Channel Campaign Creation for Customer Anniversaries

Given a shop owner logs into the AutoWatch platform, when they create a new behavioral trigger campaign for customer anniversaries targeting specific customer groups, then the campaign must be successfully created with options to select email, SMS, and social media platforms for message dissemination.

Automated Delivery of Messages Through Multiple Channels

Given a behavioral trigger campaign is scheduled for delivery on a customer’s anniversary, when the date of the anniversary arrives, then messages should automatically be sent to the customer via the selected channels without manual intervention, ensuring delivery confirmation is logged.

Integration Verification with Existing Marketing Platforms

Given that the AutoWatch platform integrates with major marketing and communication platforms, when a shop owner connects a campaign to an external marketing platform, then the recipient lists must sync correctly, and the campaign should function without errors across all platforms.

Reporting and Analytics for Multi-Channel Campaign Effectiveness

Given a shop owner runs a multi-channel campaign, when the campaign ends, then the platform must generate a report showcasing open rates, engagement metrics, and conversion rates per channel to measure the campaign's effectiveness accurately.

Customer Preference Management for Communication Channels

Given there is an option for customers to manage their communication preferences in AutoWatch, when a customer updates their communication preferences, then any future messages in trigger campaigns must respect these updated preferences.

Performance Testing for Message Delivery Timing

Given a scheduled multi-channel campaign message, when the message is triggered, then it must be delivered within a timeframe of no more than 5 minutes through each selected platform, with logs indicating successful delivery.

Performance Analytics Dashboard

"As an auto repair shop owner, I want a performance analytics dashboard to track the effectiveness of my messaging campaigns so that I can make data-driven decisions to improve customer engagement."

Description

A comprehensive performance analytics dashboard is required to track the success of behavioral trigger campaigns. This feature will offer insights into key metrics such as open rates, click-through rates, and conversion metrics for the sent messages. Integrating this functionality will allow shop owners to analyze the effectiveness of their campaigns in real-time, enabling data-driven decisions to optimize future messaging strategies. The expected outcome is improved campaign performance through insights that inform adjustments and refine ongoing marketing efforts, ultimately leading to increased customer retention and satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

Performance Analytics Dashboard displays key metrics for sent behavioral trigger campaigns.

Given a behavioral trigger campaign has been sent, When the shop owner accesses the Performance Analytics Dashboard, Then the dashboard should display metrics including open rates, click-through rates, and conversion metrics for that campaign.

Filtering options are available on the Performance Analytics Dashboard.

Given the shop owner is on the Performance Analytics Dashboard, When they select specific campaigns or date ranges, Then the dashboard should update to only show metrics relevant to the selected filters.

Real-time updates are reflected in the Performance Analytics Dashboard.

Given the shop owner is viewing the Performance Analytics Dashboard, When new data is received from a behavioral trigger campaign, Then the dashboard should automatically update the displayed metrics without requiring a page refresh.

The dashboard allows for export of performance metrics.

Given the shop owner wishes to review campaign performance, When they select the export option on the Performance Analytics Dashboard, Then a CSV file containing the key metrics should be generated and downloaded.

User authentication is required to access the Performance Analytics Dashboard.

Given a user attempts to access the Performance Analytics Dashboard, When they are not logged in, Then they should be redirected to the login page before accessing the dashboard.

The dashboard includes visual representations of data.

Given the Performance Analytics Dashboard is displayed, When the shop owner views the metrics, Then they should see graphs or charts illustrating open rates, click-through rates, and conversion metrics for better data understanding.

Performance trends over time are visible in the dashboard.

Given the shop owner accesses the Performance Analytics Dashboard, When they select a time period, Then the dashboard should display a trend line showing changes in open rates, click-through rates, and conversion rates over that selected period.

Trigger Event Configuration

"As an auto repair shop owner, I want to configure custom trigger events so that I can send timely and relevant messages to my customers based on their specific interactions."

Description

This requirement involves creating a user-friendly interface that allows shop owners to define custom trigger events for sending behavioral messages. For instance, users could set triggers for customer birthdays, appointment reminders, or vehicle maintenance due dates. This customization empowers businesses to adapt their communication approaches based on their specific customer interactions, enhancing the relevance and timing of communications. The implementation will ensure that the system can handle various conditions and complexities associated with trigger events. The anticipated outcome is an increase in timely and personalized communications which are more likely to drive repeat business.

Acceptance Criteria

Shop owner wants to create a trigger event for customer birthdays to send a personalized message one week before the customer's birthday.

Given the shop owner accesses the Trigger Event Configuration interface, when they select 'Birthday' as the trigger event type and set the notification to send one week in advance, then the system should save this configuration and display it in the list of active trigger events.

A shop owner configures a trigger for appointment reminders to be sent 24 hours before a scheduled service.

Given the shop owner configures a trigger event for appointment reminders, when they input the appointment date and time and select '24 hours before' as the notification timing, then the system sends a test notification to the owner's email to confirm correct timing and message formatting.

A shop owner needs to set up a vehicle maintenance due date trigger for customers, ensuring reminders are sent out appropriately.

Given the shop owner creates a trigger event for vehicle maintenance due dates, when they specify the type of maintenance service required and the appropriate due date, then the system should confirm the setup and allow for modifications or deletions in the user interface.

The shop owner wants to verify the functionality of multiple trigger events configured for different customer interactions.

Given multiple trigger events have been configured, when the shop owner accesses the dashboard, then it should display all active triggers with the correct details and allow the owner to test each trigger event to ensure timely notifications are sent.

A shop owner wishes to edit an existing trigger event for sending delayed notifications.

Given an existing trigger event is displayed, when the shop owner selects 'edit' and modifies the notification time, then the system should save the changes and confirm the update successfully via a notification message.

A shop owner needs to delete a trigger event that is no longer relevant.

Given the list of active trigger events, when the shop owner selects a specific trigger and chooses 'delete,' then the system should remove it from the list and confirm the deletion with a successful notification message.

A shop owner is testing the overall functionality of the Trigger Event Configuration regarding scheduled notifications.

Given the shop owner has set up several trigger events, when testing the system, it should send a notification for each trigger event based on the configurations, and log each sent message appropriately for auditing purposes.

A/B Testing Optimization

A/B Testing Optimization allows users to test different marketing messages or strategies to determine which performs better. By utilizing data-driven decisions, shop owners can refine their campaigns over time, ensuring maximum effectiveness and return on investment.

Requirements

Customizable A/B Testing Campaigns

"As a marketing manager, I want to customize A/B testing campaigns so that I can optimize my marketing messages for better performance and increase our customer acquisition rates."

Description

The Customizable A/B Testing Campaigns requirement allows users to create and manage unique A/B testing campaigns tailored to their specific marketing strategies. This includes functionalities such as the ability to easily switch between different variables (e.g., headlines, images, CTAs) and to select target demographics for each test. This feature integrates seamlessly with the existing AutoWatch user interface, ensuring that users can access all necessary tools from one central dashboard. The benefits include improved campaign performance through data-driven insights and the ability for users to optimize their marketing efforts more effectively over time, which ultimately enhances customer engagement and drives higher ROI.

Acceptance Criteria

User creates a new A/B testing campaign for their social media marketing strategy.

Given the user is logged into the AutoWatch platform, when they navigate to the A/B Testing section and click on 'Create Campaign', then they should be prompted to enter campaign details, including variants and target demographics.

User switches between different variants in an existing A/B testing campaign.

Given the user has an active A/B testing campaign, when they select a variant from the dropdown menu in the campaign dashboard, then the selected variant should be highlighted and the campaign analytics should refresh to reflect the selected variant's performance.

User views performance analytics for an A/B testing campaign.

Given the user has completed an A/B testing campaign, when they access the campaign results page, then they should see a comprehensive report displaying key metrics like conversion rates and engagement for each variant.

User selects specific demographics for their A/B testing campaign.

Given the user is creating an A/B testing campaign, when they reach the demographics selection stage, then they should be able to select multiple demographic filters (e.g., age, gender, location) from checkboxes that will apply to the campaign.

User edits an existing A/B testing campaign to update its message and variants.

Given the user is on the A/B testing campaign details page, when they make changes to the messaging or variants and click 'Save', then the updated campaign should reflect the changes without any errors.

User receives automated notifications about the progress of their A/B testing campaign.

Given the user has set up an A/B testing campaign, when the campaign reaches a specified milestone (e.g., end date), then the user should receive an email notification summarizing the campaign's performance.

User deletes an A/B testing campaign that is no longer needed.

Given the user is viewing the list of active A/B testing campaigns, when they click on 'Delete' for a specific campaign and confirm the action, then the campaign should be removed from the list without impacting other campaigns.

Real-time Performance Analytics

"As a shop owner, I want to view real-time performance analytics of my A/B tests so that I can make immediate adjustments to improve my campaign effectiveness."

Description

The Real-time Performance Analytics requirement provides users with instant access to the performance metrics of their A/B testing campaigns. This includes visual reports showing conversion rates, customer engagement levels, and comparative performance of different strategies in real-time. This functionality will allow users to quickly assess what is working and what needs adjustment, enabling seamless and timely decision-making for ongoing campaigns. Integration with existing reporting features in AutoWatch will ensure users can easily access their data. The outcome of this requirement will be more informed marketing strategies driven by accurate, timely data, contributing to improved campaign efficiencies and better allocation of marketing resources.

Acceptance Criteria

Real-time Performance Metrics for A/B Testing Campaigns

Given that the user is logged into the AutoWatch platform, when they access the A/B testing section, then they should be able to view real-time metrics including conversion rates and engagement levels for each campaign.

Comparative Performance Reports Generation

Given that a user has completed A/B testing campaigns, when they select the option to view comparative performance reports, then the system should generate and display visual reports that effectively compare the different strategies used in the campaigns.

Integration with Existing Reporting Features

Given that users are accessing the reporting features of AutoWatch, when they navigate to the analytics dashboard, then they should see integrated A/B testing performance analytics alongside other business metrics for seamless understanding.

User-Friendly Interface for Analytics Viewing

Given that the users are analyzing A/B testing performance, when they explore the real-time metrics dashboard, then they should find the interface intuitive, allowing easy navigation and comprehension of the data presented.

Alert System for Campaign Performance Thresholds

Given that the user is monitoring their A/B testing campaigns, when a campaign's performance reports drop below a predefined threshold, then the system should automatically notify the user via email and in-app alerts to take action.

Data Export Functionality for A/B Testing Results

Given that users require further analysis, when they complete viewing real-time performance analytics, then they should have the option to export the data in multiple formats (CSV, PDF) for reporting purposes.

Automated Recommendations for A/B Test Improvements

"As a data analyst, I want to receive automated recommendations for A/B test improvements so that I can enhance the effectiveness of future campaigns based on past performance."

Description

The Automated Recommendations for A/B Test Improvements requirement involves the development of an intelligent algorithm that analyzes past A/B test results and provides users with actionable insights and recommendations for future tests. The system uses machine learning to detect patterns in the data, suggesting potential changes and optimizations based on what has historically yielded the best outcomes. This feature not only simplifies the decision-making process but also enhances the overall effectiveness of the marketing strategies by applying data-backed adjustments. Integration with existing data collection processes in AutoWatch will ensure the recommendations are relevant and tailored to each user's specific context.

Acceptance Criteria

User wants to receive customized recommendations for their next A/B test after analyzing past test data.

Given the user has completed multiple A/B tests, When the user accesses the recommendation feature, Then they should see a list of actionable insights based on their previous tests.

User wants to understand the rationale behind the recommendations provided by the system.

Given the user views the recommendations, When they select a recommendation, Then they should see a detailed explanation of the reasoning and data that led to that suggestion.

User implements a recommended change from the automated suggestions and runs a new A/B test.

Given the user applies a recommendation and initiates a new A/B test, When the test is conducted, Then the system should track and display the performance metrics compared to previous tests for analysis.

User seeks to filter recommendations based on specific criteria related to their goals (e.g., increase conversions, engagement).

Given the user is in the recommendations section, When they set specific filtering parameters, Then the system should display only those recommendations that align with the user's goals.

User wants to ensure the recommendations are based on the latest available data and correctly integrated with existing data collection processes.

Given AutoWatch has been updated with new data, When the user accesses the recommendation engine, Then the recommendations should reflect the most recent test results and patterns identified from the updated data.

User needs to see a historical performance overview of their A/B tests alongside the recommended optimizations.

Given the user requests to see past test performance, When they review the results, Then the system should display a timeline with insights on how past recommendations affected test outcomes and what further optimizations are suggested.

User wants to receive alerts or notifications when new recommendations are available based on ongoing tests.

Given the user has ongoing A/B tests, When a new set of recommendations is generated, Then the system should automatically notify the user via email or in-app notification.

User-friendly A/B Test Setup Wizard

"As a small shop owner with limited marketing experience, I want a user-friendly A/B test setup wizard so that I can easily create and manage effective A/B tests without needing technical skills."

Description

The User-friendly A/B Test Setup Wizard requirement is focused on creating an intuitive, step-by-step interface that guides users through the A/B testing setup process. This wizard will allow even novice users to easily grasp how to initiate an A/B test, select variables, define objectives, and launch campaigns without requiring extensive technical knowledge. It enhances usability by streamlining the initial setup, reducing user frustration, and increasing the likelihood of engagement with the A/B testing features. This requirement aims to foster a more inclusive user experience, allowing all levels of users to benefit from A/B testing capabilities.

Acceptance Criteria

User launches the A/B Test Setup Wizard from the marketing dashboard to initiate a new A/B test for their latest promotional campaign.

Given the user is on the marketing dashboard, when they click on the 'A/B Test Setup' button, then the A/B Test Setup Wizard should open and display step-by-step instructions for setting up the test.

User selects variables such as different marketing messages to test within the A/B Test Setup Wizard.

Given the user is in step 2 of the A/B Test Setup Wizard, when they are prompted to choose variables, then they should be able to select from at least three marketing message options and preview each message before proceeding.

User defines the objectives of their A/B test to track its performance effectively.

Given the user is in step 3 of the A/B Test Setup Wizard, when asked to define the test objectives, then they should be able to enter measurable objectives, such as 'increase click-through rate by 20%.'

User completes the A/B test setup and launches the test successfully.

Given all steps in the A/B Test Setup Wizard have been completed, when the user clicks on 'Launch Test,' then the system should validate the input, display a confirmation message, and initiate the A/B test for the selected marketing variables.

User receives automated notifications about the ongoing A/B test and its performance metrics.

Given the A/B test is active, when the test has been running for a specified duration, then the user should receive automated notifications that summarize initial performance metrics and any necessary adjustments.

User accesses the A/B test results after completion to evaluate the effectiveness of different marketing messages.

Given the A/B test has concluded, when the user navigates to the results page, then they should see a detailed report comparing the performance of each message tested, highlighting the winner based on defined objectives.

Integration with CRM Systems for Targeted A/B Testing

"As a marketing strategist, I want to integrate my CRM system with AutoWatch to conduct targeted A/B tests so that I can deliver personalized marketing messages to segmented audiences for better results."

Description

The Integration with CRM Systems for Targeted A/B Testing requirement will enable AutoWatch users to synchronize their customer relationship management (CRM) systems with the A/B testing functionalities. This integration will allow users to segment their audience based on CRM data, ensuring that A/B tests can be tailored to specific customer profiles. The enhanced targeting facilitates better campaign results by ensuring that marketing messages resonate with the right audience. By leveraging existing CRM data, users can implement more effective and personalized marketing strategies, boosting engagement and improving conversion rates.

Acceptance Criteria

User segments their marketing list within the AutoWatch platform based on detailed CRM data to prepare for an A/B test campaign.

Given a user is logged into the AutoWatch platform, When the user selects their CRM system and chooses to segment their audience, Then the user should see a list of available segmentation options derived from their CRM data to customize their A/B test.

User creates a marketing message for an A/B test campaign using the segmented audience data.

Given the user has segmented their audience, When the user chooses to create a marketing campaign and inputs the relevant marketing messages for A/B testing, Then the system should allow the user to save both versions and confirm they are ready to deploy to the selected audience segments.

User deploys an A/B test campaign targeting the selected audience segments.

Given the user has created an A/B test campaign with segmented audience data, When the user initiates the campaign, Then the system should successfully dispatch both versions of the marketing message to their respective segments, confirming delivery to the targeted audience with tracking metrics available for each message.

User reviews the results of the A/B test to evaluate performance.

Given an A/B test has been completed, When the user accesses the reporting dashboard for the A/B test metrics, Then the user should see detailed analytics comparing the performance of both marketing messages based on open rates, click-through rates, and conversion rates clearly displayed.

User utilizes the insights from the A/B testing results to refine future marketing strategies.

Given the user has accessed the A/B test results, When they analyze the performance data and make adjustments to their marketing strategy, Then the system should allow them to save these new strategies for implementation in future campaigns, suggesting optimal messages based on prior performance.

User integrates additional CRM systems if required for further audience analysis and targeted A/B testing.

Given the user wishes to integrate another CRM system post-initial integration, When the user navigates to the integration settings and selects the new CRM, Then the system should allow the user to successfully authenticate and connect the additional CRM for ongoing campaign optimization.

Referral Program Automation

With Referral Program Automation, shop owners can effortlessly create and manage campaigns to reward customers for referring new clients. This feature incentivizes satisfied customers to promote the shop within their networks, driving new business and enhancing community engagement.

Requirements

Automated Campaign Creation

"As a shop owner, I want to create referral campaigns easily so that I can motivate my satisfied customers to refer their friends and family, increasing my client base and revenue."

Description

This requirement involves the ability for shop owners to create referral campaigns with customizable templates. Users must be able to easily set up parameters such as reward types (discounts, vouchers, or services), target referral counts, and campaign duration. This feature will enhance user satisfaction by making campaign management simple and effective, increasing the likelihood of referrals.

Acceptance Criteria

Shop owner successfully creates a referral campaign targeting existing customers through customizable templates.

Given a shop owner is logged into the AutoWatch platform, when they access the Referral Program Automation section and select 'Create Campaign', then they should be able to choose from multiple templates, input reward types (discounts, vouchers, services), set target referral counts, and campaign duration, and submit the campaign for activation.

Shop owner edits an existing referral campaign to change reward types and extension of duration.

Given a shop owner has an active referral campaign, when they navigate to the campaign settings and choose to edit, then they should be able to successfully modify reward types, extend the duration, and save the changes without errors.

Shop owner views the performance analytics of an active referral campaign to monitor referral success.

Given a shop owner has an active referral campaign, when they go to the 'Analytics' section for that campaign, then they should see metrics including the number of referrals made, total rewards claimed, and percentage of new customers acquired through the campaign.

Customers receive automated notifications about the referral program and its available rewards and campaigns.

Given a customer has opted into notifications, when a new referral campaign is created, then they should receive an automated email or SMS notification detailing the campaign, available rewards, and how to participate.

Shop owner deletes an inactive referral campaign and confirms its removal from the dashboard.

Given a shop owner is viewing their list of referral campaigns, when they choose to delete an inactive campaign, then they should be able to confirm the deletion and the campaign should no longer appear in their active campaigns list.

Shop owner sets specific eligibility criteria for participants in a referral campaign to target high-value customers.

Given a shop owner is creating a new referral campaign, when they set eligibility criteria such as minimum purchase amounts or customer membership status, then those criteria should be clearly displayed in the campaign parameters and enforced during participation.

Shop owner can access customer feedback on the referral program after a campaign ends.

Given a referral campaign has concluded, when the shop owner views the feedback section, then they should see aggregated responses from participants regarding their experience, suggestions for improvement, and overall satisfaction with the referral program.

Real-time Performance Tracking

"As a shop owner, I want to see real-time performance data for my referral campaigns so that I can quickly assess their success and make informed decisions about improvements or adjustments."

Description

This requirement focuses on providing shop owners with dashboards that display real-time analytics for their referral campaigns. It must track metrics such as the number of referrals generated, rewards redeemed, and overall campaign ROI. This functionality is essential for providing insights that allow shop owners to adjust their strategies and improve campaign effectiveness.

Acceptance Criteria

As a shop owner, I want to access a dashboard that displays the total number of referrals generated through my referral program over a specified time period, allowing me to evaluate the campaign's performance effectively.

Given the shop owner accesses the referral program dashboard, when they select a time range, then the dashboard should display the accurate total number of referrals generated during that period.

As a shop owner, I need to see the number of rewards redeemed by referred customers to assess the effectiveness of my incentives and make data-driven improvements to the referral program.

Given the shop owner is viewing the dashboard, when they check the rewards section, then the dashboard should display the exact number of rewards redeemed along with details of the related referrals.

As a shop owner, I want to view the return on investment (ROI) for my referral campaigns to determine the financial effectiveness of the program and justify my marketing budget.

Given the shop owner is on the dashboard, when they review the ROI section, then the analysis should calculate and display the ROI percentage based on the total rewards issued versus the revenue generated from referred customers.

As a shop owner, I want to have visual representations (graphs/charts) of the referral metrics to quickly understand trends and changes in my referral program's effectiveness.

Given the shop owner is on the referral program dashboard, when they look at the performance metrics, then the dashboard should provide clear graphs or charts for referrals generated, rewards redeemed, and ROI over time.

As a shop owner, I need the ability to filter referral data by customer demographics to tailor my marketing strategies effectively and increase referral success rates.

Given the shop owner is accessing the dashboard, when they apply filters based on customer demographics, then the dashboard should present analytics relevant to those demographic segments only.

As a shop owner, I wish to receive alerts or notifications when key performance indicators (KPIs) of my referral campaigns drop below a certain threshold to take immediate corrective actions.

Given the shop owner has set KPI thresholds within the dashboard settings, when any KPI drops below those thresholds, then the system should automatically send notifications to the shop owner's registered email or mobile device.

As a shop owner, I want to review historical data on past referral campaigns to analyze their performance and refine future strategies based on successful practices.

Given the shop owner accesses the historical performance section, when they select a past campaign, then the dashboard should display comprehensive data on referrals, rewards, and ROI for that specific campaign.

Automated Customer Notifications

"As a customer, I want to receive notifications about my referral rewards so that I can stay informed about the benefits and increase my likelihood of referring others."

Description

This requirement ensures that customers receive automated notifications about the referral program and any rewards available for their referrals. Notifications could include email alerts, SMS messages, or app-based messages that inform users of the details of the program and reward progress. This integration aims to enhance customer engagement and remind them of the benefits of participating in the referral program.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer receives automated email notification upon referral program enrollment.

Given a customer successfully enrolls in the referral program, when the enrollment process is complete, then an automated email notification should be sent to the customer confirming their enrollment and outlining the details of the referral program.

Customer receives SMS notification about reward milestones.

Given a customer has referred a new client, when the referral results in a successful transaction, then the customer receives an SMS notification updating them on their reward status and next steps.

Customer receives app notification when a reward is issued.

Given a customer has accumulated rewards, when the admin issues the reward, then the customer should receive an in-app notification informing them of the reward issuance and how to redeem it.

Customer can opt-out of automated notifications easily.

Given that a customer is receiving automated notifications, when they choose to opt-out via the provided link in any notification, then their opt-out preference should be recorded, and no further notifications should be sent to them.

Customers receive reminders about the referral program periodically.

Given customers have enrolled in the referral program, when a specified time period elapses (e.g., monthly), then they should receive a reminder notification about the program and the potential rewards.

Admin can customize notification content for the referral program.

Given that the admin has access to the notification settings, when they modify the notification templates for the referral program, then all future automated notifications sent to customers should reflect the updated content.

Seamless Client Registration

"As a new client, I want to use a referral link to sign up quickly and easily so that I can benefit from the reward offered by the person who referred me."

Description

This requirement encompasses the capability for referred clients to register easily via a unique referral link or code. The process should be streamlined, enabling new customers to come on board smoothly while attributing their registration to the referrer. This is crucial for tracking referrals accurately and encouraging existing customers to participate.

Acceptance Criteria

Successful Referral Client Registration via Unique Link

Given a referred client receives a unique referral link, when they click on the link, then they are redirected to the registration page with the referrer’s information pre-filled and successfully register in the system.

Successful Referral Client Registration via Unique Code

Given a referred client has a unique referral code, when they enter the code during registration, then their registration is attributed to the referrer, and they receive a confirmation email.

Seamless Registration User Experience

Given a referred client is on the registration page, when they fill out the required fields and submit the form, then the registration process should take less than 3 minutes to complete, ensuring ease of use.

Tracking Referrals Effectively

Given a successful registration of a referred client, when the referrer logs into their account, then they should see an update in their referral status, indicating that the referral was successful and any applicable rewards.

Error Handling During Registration

Given a referred client attempts to register with an invalid referral link or code, when they submit the registration form, then they should receive a clear error message explaining the issue and guiding them to a correct action.

Verification of Referral Attribution

Given a referred client completes their registration through a referral link or code, when the system checks the registration data, then it should confirm that the registration is correctly attributed to the referrer without any discrepancies.

Analytics on Referral Program Performance

Given multiple referrals are registered, when the shop owner accesses the referral program dashboard, then they should see detailed analytics including total referrals, successful registrations, and rewards issued, enabling data-driven decisions.

Reward Management System

"As a shop owner, I want to easily manage the rewards for my referral program so that I can adapt to customer preferences and maintain their interest in referring others."

Description

This requirement includes developing a system where shop owners can manage and customize the rewards offered for successful referrals. The ability to edit, add, or remove rewards seamlessly will allow them to keep the program fresh and enticing for customers. Additionally, it should document all reward transactions and statuses to ensure transparency and accountability.

Acceptance Criteria

Shop owner navigates to the Reward Management System to set up a new reward for referrals as part of the Referral Program Automation feature.

Given the shop owner accesses the Reward Management System, when they add a new reward with a title, description, and point value, then the new reward should be successfully saved and visible in the rewards list.

A shop owner wants to update an existing reward to make it more attractive to customers in the Referral Program.

Given the shop owner accesses the Reward Management System, when they edit an existing reward to change its point value or description, then the updated reward should reflect the new values immediately in the rewards list without errors.

The shop owner needs to remove a reward that is no longer relevant to the referral program requirements.

Given the shop owner accesses the Reward Management System, when they select a reward and choose to delete it, then the reward should be removed from the list and not appear in future reward listings or records.

A shop owner needs to review the history of rewards issued to ensure accurate tracking of customer referrals.

Given the shop owner accesses the Reward Management System, when they view the reward transaction history, then all entries should display the reward details, recipient, date issued, and current status in a clear manner.

The shop owner wants to validate that the system prevents overlapping reward criteria to maintain clarity for customers.

Given the shop owner is in the process of adding a new reward, when they attempt to use the same title or criteria as an existing reward, then the system should display a validation message preventing the duplication.

A shop owner wants to customize the notifications sent to customers when they earn rewards in the referral program.

Given the shop owner accesses the notification settings in the Reward Management System, when they update the message content for referral notifications, then the changes should reflect in future customer notifications with accurate details.

Seasonal Campaign Automation

This feature streamlines the creation of seasonal marketing campaigns, automatically adjusting promotions and messaging based on the time of year. Whether it’s summer service specials or winter maintenance reminders, this ensures timely and relevant communication to customers, maximizing engagement opportunities.

Requirements

Automated Campaign Scheduling

"As a marketing manager at an auto repair shop, I want to automate our seasonal marketing campaigns so that I can ensure timely promotions without manually adjusting them each season."

Description

This requirement involves the creation of a functionality that enables users to set up seasonal marketing campaigns that automatically adjust based on predefined dates and events. The system will intelligently recognize seasonal changes, allowing auto repair shops to generate relevant promotions such as summer tire changes or winter maintenance checks. This streamlines the marketing process, reduces manual intervention, and ensures communications are timely, enhancing overall customer engagement and increasing the effectiveness of promotional efforts.

Acceptance Criteria

User sets up a summer promotional campaign for tire changes that starts on June 1st and ends on August 31st.

Given the user has logged into the AutoWatch platform, When they navigate to the 'Campaign Scheduling' section and input the campaign details with a start date of June 1 and an end date of August 31, Then the system should confirm the campaign setup and list it under active campaigns with the correct seasonal tag.

User receives automated notifications during the promotional period when they have customers who have not scheduled their seasonal tire changes.

Given the summer campaign is active, When a customer who has a history of tire changes does not schedule a service by June 15th, Then an automated notification should be sent to the customer reminding them of the promotional offer.

User wants to create a winter maintenance reminder campaign that automatically triggers on October 1st and adjusts based on customer data.

Given the user accesses the 'Campaign Configuration' page, When they set up a winter maintenance campaign starting on October 1st and choose customer segmentation options based on previous service history, Then the system should create the campaign according to the specified parameters without manual intervention.

User checks the effectiveness of the summer campaign after its completion.

Given the summer promotional campaign has ended, When the user accesses the campaign performance dashboard, Then it should display metrics such as customer engagement rates, number of appointments booked, and total revenue generated related to the campaign.

User needs to edit the promotion details of an active campaign without disrupting the ongoing operations.

Given an active promotional campaign exists, When the user selects the campaign and updates the promotion details such as the discount percentage or messaging, Then the changes should reflect immediately on all customer notifications without errors or downtime.

User utilizes the system's ability to generate reports on the effectiveness of different seasonal campaigns over the year.

Given multiple seasonal campaigns have been executed over the past year, When the user navigates to the reporting section and selects 'Annual Performance Report', Then the system should generate a comprehensive report detailing the effectiveness of each campaign, highlighting key performance indicators such as ROI.

User creates a campaign that targets new customers specifically for winter maintenance services.

Given the user is in the campaign setup interface, When they specify the target audience as 'new customers' and set the campaign for winter services starting on December 1st, Then the campaign should be configured correctly to reach new customers only, with distinct messaging.

Dynamic Messaging Templates

"As an auto repair shop owner, I want to have access to dynamic messaging templates for seasonal campaigns so that I can engage my customers with relevant and personalized messages without starting from scratch each time."

Description

The requirement outlines the need for a repository of dynamic messaging templates that can automatically be populated with relevant information depending on the season and the specific promotions being offered. These templates will allow auto repair shops to communicate effectively with customers, ensuring that each message is personalized and contextually appropriate. This feature will save time and enhance communication consistency, reinforcing brand messaging while engaging customers effectively with timely service reminders.

Acceptance Criteria

User navigates to the seasonal campaign automation feature to select and customize a seasonal messaging template for their marketing outreach.

Given a user has access to the Seasonal Campaign Automation feature, when they select a messaging template, then the template should populate with the current seasonal data related to promotions for that time of year.

The user wants to send out a winter maintenance reminder using the dynamic messaging template to all registered customers.

Given that the user has a dynamic messaging template for winter maintenance, when they trigger the campaign, then all relevant customers should receive a personalized winter maintenance reminder via their preferred communication channel.

A user is reviewing the performance analytics after sending seasonal messages to assess engagement rates.

Given the user has sent out seasonal messaging campaigns, when they access the analytics dashboard, then they should see engagement metrics such as open rates, click-through rates, and customer responses specific to the seasonal campaigns sent.

The user intends to modify a dynamic messaging template to include a new promotion for spring tire services.

Given that a user is editing a dynamic messaging template, when they save the updated template, then the new information must be correctly integrated and displayed the next time the template is used.

An admin reviews the database of dynamic messaging templates to ensure compliance with branding guidelines.

Given that there is a repository of dynamic messaging templates, when the admin searches for templates, then all templates must align with the established branding guidelines and include updated promotional content for the current and upcoming seasons.

Performance Analytics Dashboard

"As a business owner, I want to access analytics on seasonal marketing campaigns so that I can evaluate their effectiveness and make informed decisions to improve future marketing efforts."

Description

This requirement focuses on the development of a performance analytics dashboard that provides users with insights into the effectiveness of their seasonal marketing campaigns. The dashboard will compile data such as customer engagement rates, conversion rates, and overall revenue generated from campaigns, allowing shop owners to analyze what works best and adjust strategies accordingly. By leveraging data-driven insights, businesses can improve their marketing efforts, enhance customer satisfaction, and ultimately increase revenue.

Acceptance Criteria

Dashboard User Access and Authorization

Given a user is logged in as a shop owner, When they navigate to the performance analytics dashboard, Then they should have access to view all performance metrics relevant to their seasonal marketing campaigns.

Engagement Rate Calculation

Given the seasonal marketing campaigns data is available, When the dashboard calculates the engagement rates for each campaign, Then the engagement rates should be accurately displayed as a percentage based on the number of customers contacted versus the number who engaged.

Revenue Tracking from Campaigns

Given seasonal campaign data is in the system, When the dashboard aggregates revenue generated from each seasonal campaign, Then the total revenue should be accurately reflected and match the sales data recorded during the campaign period.

Conversion Rate Analysis

Given the performance analytics dashboard is loaded, When the conversion rates for each campaign are displayed, Then the dashboard should show conversion rates as a percentage calculated from leads generated versus actual sales made.

Campaign Performance Comparison

Given multiple seasonal campaigns have been run, When a user selects two or more campaigns to compare, Then the dashboard should display a side-by-side performance comparison including engagement rates, conversion rates, and revenue generated for each campaign.

Real-Time Data Updates

Given the dashboard is open, When new data from ongoing campaigns is submitted, Then the dashboard should automatically refresh to include the latest performance metrics without user intervention.

User Interface Usability

Given a user accesses the performance analytics dashboard, When they interact with various elements of the dashboard, Then they should find the interface easy to navigate and understand, with clear labels and actionable insights.

Customer Segmentation Tool

"As a customer relationship manager, I want to segment our customer base effectively so that I can send tailored messages for seasonal campaigns to different customer groups based on their preferences."

Description

This requirement centers on developing a customer segmentation tool that allows auto repair shops to categorize their customers effectively based on previous interactions, service history, and preferences. The tool will support targeted marketing campaigns by enabling shops to send specific messages to distinct customer groups, thereby ensuring communications are relevant to each segment. This strategic targeting is anticipated to enhance customer engagement and promote higher conversion rates during seasonal campaigns.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer segmentation based on service history and preferences for seasonal campaigns.

Given a customer database with service history, when the segmentation tool is utilized, then customers should be categorized into distinct groups based on service frequency and type of services availed.

Utilizing customer segments for targeted marketing campaigns during seasonal promotions.

Given distinct customer segments created by the segmentation tool, when a seasonal campaign is launched, then specific promotional messages should be sent only to the relevant customer segments.

Tracking the engagement metrics of targeted campaigns sent to segmented customers.

Given a seasonal campaign executed using the customer segmentation tool, when engagement metrics are analyzed, then the open and click-through rates for messages sent to segmented groups should exceed the average rates from previous non-targeted campaigns.

Updating customer segmentation based on ongoing interactions and feedback.

Given a set of interactions logged in the system, when new customer feedback is received, then the system should automatically update customer segments to reflect changes in preferences and service history.

Evaluating the performance impact of customer segmentation on overall campaign success.

Given historical campaign data, when comparing campaigns that utilized customer segmentation to those that did not, then there should be a measurable increase in conversion rates and customer engagement for segmented campaigns.

Integrating customer segmentation tool with other AutoWatch features for operational efficiency.

Given the active use of the customer segmentation tool, when integrated with scheduling and billing features, then it should enhance the workflow by providing a cohesive view of customer interactions across all platforms.

Integration with Social Media Platforms

"As a social media manager, I want to integrate seasonal campaign functionality with our social media platforms so that I can reach more customers and promote special offers across channels effortlessly."

Description

The requirement outlines the necessity to integrate seasonal campaign features with popular social media platforms, allowing users to share promotions and updates effortlessly. This integration will enable auto repair shops to not only manage email marketing campaigns but also extend their reach via social media, maximizing visibility and engagement. Users will benefit from this cross-platform capability, allowing them to attract a wider audience and promote their seasonal services more efficiently.

Acceptance Criteria

User wants to create a summer service promotion campaign through AutoWatch and share it on Facebook.

Given the user has access to the Seasonal Campaign Automation feature, when the user selects 'Create Campaign' for summer services, then they should be able to successfully share it on Facebook with custom messaging and visuals.

User needs to schedule an automated email and social media post for a winter maintenance reminder campaign.

Given the user has created a winter maintenance reminder campaign in AutoWatch, when the schedule time arrives, then an email and a post should automatically be sent to the user's social media accounts without any manual intervention.

User wants to track the engagement metrics of the social media posts related to a holiday promotion.

Given the user has posted the holiday promotion on social media through AutoWatch, when the user checks the engagement dashboard, then they should see real-time statistics including likes, shares, and comments related to that post.

User is setting up a campaign that targets different seasonal promotions for different customer segments.

Given the user is using the Seasonal Campaign Automation feature, when they create a campaign for multiple customer segments, then the system should allow differing messaging and promotions for each segment to be automatically shared on designated social media platforms.

User wants to review the performance of past seasonal campaigns integrated with social media.

Given the user is looking to analyze results from previous campaigns, when they access the campaign performance report, then they should see a comprehensive summary of social media engagement and conversion data for each seasonal campaign.

User is trying to ensure that a campaign can be paused and resumed at any time without losing scheduled social media posts.

Given the user has activated a seasonal campaign, when they click 'Pause,' then all scheduled social media posts should be stored, and when they click 'Resume,' the campaign and its posts should reactivate seamlessly.

User wants to confirm that social media sharing settings can be customized for each campaign.

Given the user is creating a campaign in AutoWatch, when they access the social media sharing settings, then they should be able to customize which platforms to post on, the message for each platform, and the timing of posts.

Quick Pay

Quick Pay allows customers to complete their transactions with just a few taps on their smartphones. This feature reduces the time spent at the payment counter, enhancing customer satisfaction by providing an efficient and hassle-free checkout experience.

Requirements

Mobile Payment Integration

"As a customer, I want to pay for my auto repairs using my smartphone so that I can complete the transaction quickly and avoid waiting in line at the shop."

Description

The Mobile Payment Integration requirement focuses on the development of a seamless payment interface within the AutoWatch platform that allows customers to pay using their mobile devices. This integration must support multiple payment methods, including credit/debit cards, digital wallets, and other in-app payment solutions. The functionality should enhance user experience by enabling customers to pay quickly without needing to visit a physical payment counter, thereby reducing wait times and increasing customer satisfaction. Furthermore, it will streamline accounting processes by automatically updating transaction records in the system after a payment is confirmed, thus ensuring accurate financial tracking and reporting.

Acceptance Criteria

As a customer using the AutoWatch mobile application, I want to pay for my auto repair services directly through the app so that I can avoid long wait times at the payment counter.

Given I have selected my service and am on the payment screen, when I enter my payment details and confirm, then the transaction should process in less than 10 seconds, and I should receive a confirmation notification of the payment.

As a customer, I want to use my digital wallet to pay so that I can complete my transaction quickly without entering my card details manually.

Given I have added my digital wallet as a payment method, when I choose to pay using this method, then the system should initiate the transaction using the wallet and complete it successfully, updating my account balance accordingly.

As a shop owner, I need to ensure that all completed transactions via mobile payment are automatically logged in the accounting system for accurate financial tracking.

Given a mobile payment transaction is completed, when I check the transaction logs, then the payment record should appear within 5 minutes with accurate details including transaction ID, amount, and payment method.

As a customer, I want to be notified if my payment fails, so that I can take immediate action to resolve the issue without frustration.

Given I am attempting to make a payment, when the payment fails, then I should receive a notification explaining the reason for the failure and steps to resolve it immediately.

As a customer, I want to see a summary of my payment transaction after completing it, so that I can confirm the details before leaving.

Given I have successfully completed my payment, when I return to the app, then I should see a summary page displaying the transaction details including service received, amount paid, and payment method used.

As a customer, I want the mobile payment interface to be user-friendly and accessible, so that I can easily navigate through the payment process without confusion.

Given I am on the payment screen, when I interact with the interface, then it should comply with accessibility standards, allowing a visually impaired user to complete the process without assistance.

As a shop owner, I want to ensure that the system supports multiple payment methods so that my customers have flexible options to pay for their repairs.

Given I am reviewing the payment integration, when I check the supported payment methods, then the system should list at least five different options including major credit cards, digital wallets, and bank transfers.

Transaction History Tracking

"As a customer, I want to access my transaction history in the app so that I can review my past payments and manage my expenses better."

Description

The Transaction History Tracking requirement aims to provide customers with easy access to their payment history within the AutoWatch platform. This feature allows users to view past transactions, including dates, amounts, and services associated with each payment. The benefit of this requirement lies in enhancing transparency and trust, as customers can quickly reference their payment activity at any time. Integration with the existing customer profile system is essential, ensuring that transaction data is accurately linked to the respective user accounts. This feature also enables better financial management for users, allowing them to keep track of their expenses over time.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer Accessing Transaction History through the AutoWatch Platform

Given a registered user logged into their AutoWatch account, when they navigate to the transaction history section, then they should see a list of past transactions including date, amount, and associated services for each payment.

Integration with Customer Profile System

Given a transaction has been completed by a user, when they access their transaction history, then the transaction should be accurately linked to their respective user account and displayed.

Error Handling for Missing Transactions

Given a user is logged into their account, when there are no past transactions available, then an appropriate message should be displayed indicating no transactions found.

Viewing Transaction Details

Given a user views their transaction history, when they click on a specific transaction, then detailed information about that transaction (including services rendered and payment method) should be displayed.

Date Filtering for Transaction History

Given a user is on the transaction history page, when they apply date filters, then the transactions displayed should be limited to only those within the selected date range.

Exporting Transaction History

Given a user is viewing their transaction history, when they select the option to export their transaction data, then the system should generate a downloadable file in CSV format containing the relevant transaction details.

Mobile Accessibility of Transaction History

Given a user accesses their AutoWatch account on a mobile device, when they navigate to their transaction history, then the layout should be optimized for mobile viewing, ensuring usability across different screen sizes.

Automated Receipt Generation

"As a customer, I want to receive a digital receipt after my payment, so that I have a record of my transaction for future reference."

Description

The Automated Receipt Generation requirement is designed for the system to automatically generate and send digital receipts to customers upon completion of their payment transactions. This feature ensures that all customers receive a receipt via their preferred method, whether through email, SMS, or in-app notifications. The benefit of this requirement is to enhance customer convenience, providing them with digital documentation for their transactions immediately, which is particularly useful for record-keeping and warranty purposes. Additionally, it aids the auto repair shop in maintaining accurate financial documentation without added manual effort, improving operational efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer completes a payment transaction using the Quick Pay feature and expects an automated receipt to be generated immediately after the transaction is confirmed.

Given a customer successfully completes a payment transaction through Quick Pay, When the payment is confirmed, Then a digital receipt should be generated and sent to the customer's preferred method of contact (email, SMS, or in-app).

A customer opts to receive their receipt via email after completing a payment transaction and checks their inbox for the receipt.

Given the customer's preferred contact method is email, When the payment transaction is completed, Then the customer should receive a digital receipt in their inbox within 1 minute of transaction confirmation.

A customer selects to receive a receipt via SMS after completing a payment transaction and checks their SMS messages for the receipt.

Given the customer has chosen SMS as their preferred method for receipt delivery, When the payment transaction is completed, Then an SMS with the digital receipt details should be received by the customer within 1 minute of transaction confirmation.

The system automatically logs all digital receipts generated for audit and reconciliation purposes.

Given a payment transaction is completed and a digital receipt is generated, When the receipt is sent to the customer, Then the receipt details should be logged in the system’s database with a timestamp and transaction reference number for audit purposes.

A customer wants to view their digital receipt directly in the app after completing their payment transaction.

Given a customer has completed a payment transaction using Quick Pay, When they navigate to their transaction history, Then the digital receipt should be accessible within the app with all relevant transaction details displayed accurately.

The system handles a scenario where a customer's preferred method for digital receipt delivery is unavailable due to technical issues.

Given the customer's preferred receipt delivery method fails (e.g., email or SMS), When the payment transaction is completed, Then the system should automatically switch to the default method (in-app notification) and inform the customer of the change via a fallback notification.

User Authentication for Mobile Payments

"As a customer, I want to securely authenticate my identity when making a payment through the app so that I can ensure my financial information is protected."

Description

The User Authentication for Mobile Payments requirement focuses on ensuring secure and reliable user verification before processing payments through the AutoWatch mobile application. This feature should incorporate multi-factor authentication, biometric options (like fingerprint or facial recognition), and secure password protocols to enhance the security of mobile transactions. Implementing this requirement is crucial in protecting sensitive customer data and maintaining trust in the platform. Moreover, it reduces the chances of unauthorized transactions, thus safeguarding the financial interests of both the shop and the customers.

Acceptance Criteria

User initiates mobile payment after selecting services in the AutoWatch app.

Given a user with a registered account, when they select services and proceed to checkout, then the app should prompt for multi-factor authentication.

User verifies their identity using a biometric option during mobile payment.

Given a user has enabled biometric authentication, when they choose to pay, then the app should allow payment only after successful facial recognition or fingerprint scan.

User enters a secure password during mobile payment process.

Given a user chooses to authenticate via password, when they enter their password, then the app should validate the password against the registered user credentials and proceed only if it matches.

User attempts payment with invalid authentication credentials.

Given a user tries to authenticate with invalid credentials, when they enter incorrect password or fail biometric verification, then the app should display an error message and block payment processing.

User completes a payment successfully using authenticated credentials.

Given the user has successfully authenticated via multi-factor authentication, when they confirm the payment, then the app should process the payment and display a confirmation message.

User changes their authentication settings in the app.

Given the user accesses the account settings, when they update their authentication preferences (e.g., enable/disable biometric authentication), then the app should save the changes and reflect them immediately in the payment process.

System logs failed authentication attempts for security review.

Given a user fails to authenticate multiple times, when the fifth failure occurs, then the app should log the event for potential security review and notify the system administrator.

Real-Time Payment Notifications

"As a customer, I want to receive instant notifications upon making a payment, so that I can be assured that my transaction was successful without delay."

Description

The Real-Time Payment Notifications requirement involves creating a system that notifies customers instantly via push notifications or SMS upon the successful processing of their payments. This functionality aims to enhance customer awareness and confidence in their transactions by providing immediate confirmation of payment completion. Additionally, this feature is essential for providing timely updates regarding order status, specifically when payments are linked to services rendered. Not only does this improve customer communication, but it also reduces the volume of customer inquiries related to payment status, thereby streamlining operations for the auto repair shop.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer initiates a payment for services rendered at the auto repair shop using the Quick Pay feature on their smartphone.

Given that the payment is successfully processed, When the transaction is completed, Then the customer receives a push notification or SMS with confirmation of the payment and transaction details.

Customer checks the payment status in their mobile app after completing a transaction.

Given that the customer has completed a transaction, When they navigate to the payment history screen, Then the payment status is marked as 'Completed' with the timestamp and transaction ID visible.

An auto repair shop owner addresses customer inquiries regarding payment status after implementing Real-Time Payment Notifications.

Given that Real-Time Payment Notifications have been implemented, When a customer contacts the shop regarding their payment, Then the owner is able to verify the payment status quickly without needing to check payment processor logs, reducing inquiry handling time by at least 30% over the next month.

Multiple customers complete payments during peak hours at the auto repair shop.

Given that multiple transactions are processed in a short period, When each transaction is completed, Then all customers receive their respective notifications within 5 seconds of payment completion without system lag or failures.

Customers opt-in to receive SMS notifications during the payment process.

Given that the customer opts in for SMS notifications, When they complete the payment, Then they receive an SMS confirmation that complies with SMS marketing regulations and includes the shop's contact information for further inquiries.

A customer attempts to complete a payment that fails due to insufficient funds.

Given that the payment fails, When the payment fails notification is generated, Then the customer receives an immediate notification informing them of the failure and suggesting alternatives to complete the payment.

The payment notifications are tested for delivery reliability.

Given that a series of test payments are conducted, When notifications are sent for each payment, Then at least 95% of the notifications must be successfully delivered to customers within the expected time frame for the feature to be considered successfully implemented.

Payment History Tracker

Payment History Tracker provides customers with an organized view of their past payments directly within the AutoWatch app. This feature enables users to easily access their transaction details anytime, ensuring transparency and better financial management.

Requirements

User Authentication

"As an auto repair shop owner, I want a secure authentication process so that I can protect my sensitive business data from unauthorized access."

Description

The User Authentication requirement ensures secure login and access control for users of the AutoWatch platform. This feature will implement multi-factor authentication (MFA), password recovery options, and user role management to enhance security. By protecting user data and ensuring that only authorized personnel can access sensitive information, this requirement will build trust and compliance with industry standards, contributing to better data security and customer confidence.

Acceptance Criteria

User logs into the AutoWatch platform using valid credentials and is required to complete multi-factor authentication for secure access.

Given a user has registered their mobile device for MFA, when the user enters valid login credentials, then they should receive a verification code via SMS to proceed with logging in.

User attempts to log in with incorrect password and receives appropriate feedback to help remediate the situation.

Given a user enters an incorrect password, when they attempt to log in, then they should see an error message indicating 'Invalid password. Please try again or click on 'Forgot Password' to reset.'

User requests a password recovery link to regain access to their account.

Given a user clicks on 'Forgot Password', when they enter their registered email address, then they should receive a password recovery email within 10 minutes.

User with the appropriate role logs in to the AutoWatch platform and accesses sensitive information based on their permissions.

Given a user with 'Admin' role logs in successfully, when they navigate to the user management panel, then they should see all user accounts and their access levels as specified by system roles.

User attempts to access a restricted area of the AutoWatch app that requires higher permissions.

Given a regular user logs in and tries to access the admin panel, when they navigate to that section, then they should receive a message stating 'Access Denied: You do not have permission to view this page.'

User logs in and chooses the 'Remember Me' option during authentication.

Given a user selects 'Remember Me' while logging in, when they return to the application after closing the browser, then they should be logged in automatically without needing to re-enter credentials within 14 days.

User logs out of the AutoWatch platform, ensuring that their session is completely terminated for security.

Given a user clicks 'Logout', when they try to navigate back to the dashboard directly via URL, then they should be redirected to the login page and not access the dashboard until logging in again.

Real-time Payment Notifications

"As a shop owner, I want to receive real-time notifications when payments are processed so that I can stay updated about my cash flow without manually checking the system."

Description

The Real-time Payment Notifications requirement will provide users with instant alerts whenever a payment is made or received through the AutoWatch platform. This feature will integrate with the payment processing system and send notifications via email or SMS, ensuring users stay informed about their financial transactions in real time. This enhancement will lead to improved user engagement and better financial oversight for shop owners and customers alike.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives real-time notifications upon successful payment processing through the AutoWatch platform.

Given a user has successfully processed a payment, when the payment is completed, then an email and SMS notification should be sent to the user's registered contact information within 1 minute of payment confirmation.

User receives a notification for each payment received for their services.

Given a service has been billed and a payment is received, when the payment is processed, then the user should receive a notification detailing the payment amount, date, and service rendered, sent via email and SMS.

User can view a summary of all received payment notifications in the Payment History Tracker.

Given the user has received multiple payment notifications, when they access the Payment History Tracker, then they should see a chronological list of all notifications with details of amounts, dates, and services.

User receives a notification for payments made on their behalf (like deposits or refunds).

Given a user has made a payment or received a refund related to their account, when the payment is processed, then a notification summarizing the transaction should be sent to the user.

User can customize notification settings within their account preferences.

Given a user wants to control their notification settings, when they access their account preferences, then they should be able to choose between email, SMS, or both for receiving payment notifications.

User can test the notification system prior to receipt of actual payment notifications.

Given the user wants to ensure their notification settings are working, when they trigger a system test notification, then they should receive a test message confirming the setup is functional.

User can easily access help or support regarding payment notifications.

Given the user has questions or issues regarding the payment notification feature, when they access the help section, then they should find clear instructions and contact support options specifically related to payment notifications.

Payment Filter Options

"As a user, I want to be able to filter my payment history by various criteria so that I can easily find specific transactions when needed."

Description

The Payment Filter Options requirement allows users to customize their payment history view based on various criteria such as date range, payment type, or customer name. This feature will enable users to quickly filter relevant transactions, making it easier to manage past payments and conduct financial analysis. Enhancing the payment history tracker with filtering capabilities will maximize user efficiency and improve their experience on the platform.

Acceptance Criteria

User wants to filter their payment history to review transactions made in the last month.

Given the user selects the date range option, when they specify the last month, then the payment history should display only transactions from that period.

User is interested in reviewing only credit card transactions from their payment history.

Given the user selects the payment type filter, when they choose 'Credit Card', then the payment history should display only the transactions made using a credit card.

User wants to see payments made by a specific customer for a detailed review.

Given the user enters a customer name in the filter, when they apply the filter, then the payment history should show all transactions related to that customer.

User needs to analyze transaction patterns over a custom date range.

Given the user sets a custom date range in the filter, when they apply the filter, then the payment history should reflect only transactions that occurred within that custom date range.

User attempts to reset the filters applied to view their entire payment history.

Given the user has applied filters to the payment history, when they click on the 'Reset Filters' button, then all filters should be cleared, and the user should see the entire payment history.

User wants to combine multiple filter criteria simultaneously for a refined view of their payment history.

Given the user selects both a date range and a payment type, when they apply these filters, then the payment history should display transactions that match both criteria.

Export Payment History

"As an accountant, I want the ability to export payment history so that I can perform financial analysis and reporting without having to manually compile the information."

Description

The Export Payment History requirement enables users to download their payment history in multiple formats (e.g., CSV, PDF) directly from the AutoWatch app. This feature will facilitate better record-keeping and external reporting, allowing users to easily share financial information with stakeholders or accountants. By streamlining the export process, this requirement will add significant value to users performing audits or financial reviews.

Acceptance Criteria

User initiates the export of their payment history from the AutoWatch app after accessing the Payment History Tracker feature, intending to analyze their financial records for the past year.

Given the user is logged into the AutoWatch app, when they select the 'Export Payment History' option, then they should be presented with options to choose a format (CSV, PDF), and upon selecting a format and clicking 'Download', the payment history file should be successfully generated and downloaded to their device without errors.

A user needs to export their payment history to submit to their accountant for tax purposes, ensuring the accuracy and completeness of the financial data provided.

Given the user has selected to export their payment history for the last 12 months, when the file is downloaded, then the exported document must contain all transactions within the specified period, including dates, amounts, and payment methods with no omissions.

A business owner describes their experience with exporting payment history while attempting to share financial information with a co-owner through email.

Given the user exports their payment history in PDF format, when they complete the download, then they should have the ability to directly share the PDF via email or upload it to a cloud service without needing to locate the file manually, ensuring ease of access and sharing.

A user is evaluating the software's data retention and export features during a demo session, assessing how well the payment export function integrates into their workflow.

Given the user navigates through the demo scenario of exporting payment history, when they attempt to access the export feature, then the user interface should be intuitive, with clearly labeled buttons for export options and format selections, ensuring a seamless user experience.

A shop owner prepares for an upcoming audit and wants to use the export feature to retrieve their full payment history for verification.

Given the user selects a specific date range for their payment history export, when they initiate the download process, then the system must generate the file within a reasonable time frame (e.g., under one minute) and allow the user to access it without errors or delays, confirming the system's efficiency.

A customer attempts to export a payment history file but experiences a network interruption, prompting them to test the recoverability of the export process.

Given the user faces a network interruption during the export process, when they retry the download after restoring their connection, then the system must allow them to seamlessly initiate a new export without duplicating previously exported data, ensuring reliability and user satisfaction.

Payment History Search Functionality

"As a user, I want to be able to search my payment history so that I can quickly locate specific transactions without scrolling through a long list."

Description

The Payment History Search Functionality requirement will introduce a search bar within the payment history tracker, allowing users to quickly find specific transactions by entering keywords. This will improve user experience by reducing the time spent scrolling through their payment history and enabling them to locate information efficiently. Integrating a search function will help users manage their payments effectively and enhance overall platform usability.

Acceptance Criteria

User Searches for a Specific Transaction by Date and Amount

Given the user is viewing the Payment History Tracker, when they enter a date and amount in the search bar, then the system should display all transactions matching the criteria within 2 seconds.

User Searches for a Transaction Using Keywords

Given the user has a list of past transactions, when they type a keyword (such as 'oil change' or 'brake repair') into the search bar, then the system should return all relevant transactions that include the keyword within 3 seconds.

User Receives No Results from a Search Query

Given the user inputs a non-existent keyword or date range in the search bar, when they click search, then the system should inform them with a 'No results found' message and prompt them to refine their search.

User Clears the Search Bar to View All Transactions

Given the user has performed a search, when they click on the 'Clear' button next to the search bar, then the system should reset the transaction list to show all past payments without any filters applied.

User Accesses Search Functionality on Different Devices

Given the user is accessing the Payment History Tracker feature on both mobile and desktop devices, when they attempt to use the search function, then the search results should display in a consistent format across all devices within the same time frame.

User Searches and Sorts Results by Transaction Amount

Given the user searches for transactions with a keyword, when they sort the results by transaction amount (ascending or descending), then the system should accurately reflect the sorting choice on the displayed results immediately after the action.

User Sees an Autocomplete Suggestion in the Search Bar

Given the user starts typing in the search bar, when they type an existing transaction type, then the system should provide autocomplete suggestions for relevant previous transactions based on the input, enhancing search efficiency.

Recurring Payment Management

"As an auto repair shop owner, I want to manage recurring payments for regular customers so that I can automate billing and enhance customer convenience."

Description

The Recurring Payment Management requirement provides users the ability to set up, manage, and modify recurring payments for regular services. This feature will allow users to automate the payment process for customers who receive periodic services, ensuring consistent cash flow and improving customer satisfaction through ease of payment. The implementation of this capability will simplify financial management for users and enhance service delivery.

Acceptance Criteria

User initiates the setup of a recurring payment for a customer who subscribes to monthly vehicle maintenance services.

Given the user is on the Recurring Payment Management page, when they input the customer's payment information and set the recurrence to 'Monthly', then the system should save the payment details and display a confirmation message.

User modifies an existing recurring payment schedule for a customer who has requested a change in their service frequency.

Given the user selects an existing recurring payment from the dashboard, when they change the payment frequency from 'Monthly' to 'Quarterly' and save the changes, then the updated schedule should reflect the new frequency and trigger a notification to the customer.

User accesses the payment history to review transactions related to recurring payments.

Given the user navigates to the Payment History Tracker, when they filter the transactions by 'Recurring Payments', then all past recurring payment transactions should be displayed accurately, including dates and amounts.

User attempts to delete a recurring payment that is no longer needed.

Given the user selects a recurring payment from their list, when they click the 'Delete' button and confirm their action, then the recurring payment should be removed from their dashboard and no longer processed in future cycles.

User wants to ensure they receive reminders for upcoming recurring payments.

Given the user has set up a recurring payment, when they check their notification settings, then they should see an option to receive reminders at least 3 days before each payment is due.

User needs to view details of a specific recurring payment to confirm its terms.

Given the user selects a recurring payment from the management interface, when they click on 'Details', then the full details of the recurring payment including amount, frequency, and next due date should be displayed clearly.

Multiple Payment Methods

This feature offers customers a variety of payment options, including credit/debit cards, digital wallets, and bank transfers. By accommodating different customer preferences, Multiple Payment Methods enhances convenience and increases the likelihood of transaction completion.

Requirements

Credit/Debit Card Payments

"As a customer, I want to pay for my services using my credit or debit card so that I can conveniently complete my transaction without needing to carry cash."

Description

This requirement allows customers to pay for services using their credit or debit cards. The payment process should be secure, compliant with relevant regulations, and user-friendly. It should integrate with existing payment processing solutions and provide customers with instant confirmation of the transaction. Offering credit/debit card payment enhances customer satisfaction and convenience, catering to a large segment of the customer base.

Acceptance Criteria

User initiates a payment for services at the checkout using a credit or debit card.

Given a user is on the checkout page, when they input valid credit/debit card information and submit the payment, then the transaction should be processed successfully and the user should receive a confirmation message.

User attempts to pay with an expired credit or debit card.

Given a user is on the checkout page, when they input expired credit/debit card information and submit the payment, then the system should display an error message indicating that the card is expired and the transaction should not be processed.

User tries to pay using a credit or debit card without sufficient funds.

Given a user is on the checkout page, when they input a valid credit/debit card that has insufficient funds and submit the payment, then the system should display an error message indicating a decline due to insufficient funds and the transaction should not be processed.

User wants to save their credit or debit card information for future transactions.

Given a user is logged in and on the payment page, when they choose to save their credit/debit card information for future use, then the system should securely store the card information and confirm with the user that the card has been saved successfully.

User makes a payment and then requests a refund due to dissatisfaction with services.

Given a user has completed a payment successfully, when they request a refund through the platform, then the system should process the refund within the stipulated timeframe and notify the user of the successful refund.

User wishes to view their transaction history including credit/debit card payments.

Given a user is logged in to their account, when they navigate to the transaction history section, then they should be able to see a detailed list of all transactions made using credit/debit cards along with their statuses.

Digital Wallet Integration

"As a customer, I want to use my digital wallet for payments so that I can make quick and secure transactions without entering my card details each time."

Description

The Digital Wallet Integration requirement enables customers to pay for services using popular digital wallets such as PayPal, Apple Pay, and Google Pay. This feature should include seamless integration with the respective APIs and provide a secure checkout process. By accepting digital wallets, AutoWatch accommodates tech-savvy customers and increases the likelihood of transaction completion by providing a fast and efficient payment method.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer initiates a payment for their service using a digital wallet option during checkout.

Given that the customer selects a digital wallet payment method, when they complete the payment process, then the transaction should be processed successfully and reflected in the customer's order history.

Customer attempts to pay using PayPal and encounters an issue with their credentials.

Given that the customer has entered their PayPal credentials incorrectly, when they attempt to complete the payment, then an error message should clearly indicate the issue without compromising security.

A customer wants to use Apple Pay to make a payment for a service in the AutoWatch application.

Given that the customer has configured their Apple Pay account, when they select Apple Pay at checkout and authorize the payment, then the transaction should be completed within 5 seconds with a confirmation receipt sent to their email.

Customers using Google Pay complete a transaction for their service.

Given that the Google Pay option is selected by the customer, when the payment is processed, then the payment confirmation should be displayed on screen and a notification sent to the customer's device.

A customer wants to switch payment methods mid-checkout process.

Given that a customer is on the payment screen, when they select a different digital wallet option, then they should be able to seamlessly switch methods without losing their order details.

The system needs to ensure security and compliance during digital wallet transactions.

Given that a payment is initiated via a digital wallet, when the transaction is processed, then all payment data should be encrypted and comply with PCI DSS standards.

Customer service needs to assist a customer with failed digital wallet transactions.

Given that a customer reports a failed payment through their digital wallet, when the customer service representative accesses the transaction logs, then they should have the ability to view detailed error logs to assist with resolving the issue.

Bank Transfer Option

"As a customer, I want to pay via bank transfer so that I can manage my payments directly from my bank account for larger transactions."

Description

This requirement introduces a bank transfer option for customers who prefer to pay directly from their bank accounts. The process should be streamlined to ensure ease of use, allowing customers to initiate bank transfers directly from the AutoWatch platform. This feature is particularly beneficial for higher-value transactions, where customers may prefer not to use cards. Clear instructions and tracking for bank transfers are crucial to enhance user confidence and satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer initiates a bank transfer payment during the checkout process for a vehicle repair service valued at $1,200.

Given the customer has selected the bank transfer option, when they complete the required bank details, then the system should validate the information and display a confirmation message before proceeding to payment completion.

Customer views the payment options after selecting a service and deciding to pay via bank transfer.

Given the customer is on the payment options page, when they select bank transfer, then they should see clear instructions and a secure form to enter their bank information with an estimated timeline for processing the transfer.

A customer attempts to cancel a bank transfer payment before completion.

Given the customer is in the process of making a bank transfer, when they click the 'Cancel Payment' button, then the system should halt the transaction and notify the customer that the payment has been cancelled successfully.

After initiating a bank transfer, the customer wants to check the status of their payment.

Given the customer has completed a bank transfer payment, when they navigate to the payment history section, then they should see updated status information for their bank transfer, including pending, completed, or failed, along with timestamp details.

A customer makes a bank transfer for a repair service and wants to receive notifications about the payment status.

Given the customer opts into notifications, when they complete the bank transfer, then they should receive an email and SMS text indicating the payment initiation and details on how to track the payment's progress.

Payment History Dashboard

"As a shop owner, I want to view all payment transactions so that I can easily manage and track my finances without needing to seek external records."

Description

The Payment History Dashboard requirement provides both customers and shop owners with access to a comprehensive history of payments made through the AutoWatch platform. This feature should allow users to view transaction dates, amounts, and payment methods, as well as download or print receipts for their records. Having access to payment history enhances transparency and facilitates better financial management for users.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer views payment history after making multiple payments using different methods.

Given the customer is logged into their AutoWatch account, when they navigate to the Payment History Dashboard, then they should see a list of transactions including dates, amounts, and payment methods for at least the last 6 months.

Shop owner accesses payment history to track performance and reconcile accounts.

Given the shop owner is logged into their AutoWatch account, when they access the Payment History Dashboard, then they should be able to filter the transactions by date range and see a summary of total payments received within that period.

Customer downloads a receipt from their payment history.

Given the customer is viewing their Payment History Dashboard, when they click on the download button for a specific transaction, then a downloadable PDF receipt should be generated and the customer should be able to save it to their device.

Customer prints a receipt directly from the payment history.

Given the customer is on the Payment History Dashboard, when they select the print option for a specific transaction, then the print dialog should open with a correctly formatted receipt containing all necessary transaction details.

Both customers and shop owners view payment history on mobile devices.

Given that both customers and shop owners are using mobile devices, when they access the Payment History Dashboard, then the layout should be responsive and all payment information should be easily viewable without horizontal scrolling.

Payment history updates in real-time after a new transaction is completed.

Given a payment has just been made by a customer, when the shop owner refreshes the Payment History Dashboard, then the new transaction should immediately appear in the list with the correct details.

Promotional Code Capability

"As a shop owner, I want to create promotional codes so that I can attract more customers and encourage repeat business by offering discounts."

Description

This requirement enables shop owners to offer promotional codes or discounts at checkout, thereby increasing customer engagement and retention. The feature should allow for easy creation and management of promotional codes within the AutoWatch system, along with validation to ensure codes are applied correctly at checkout. This capability not only enhances customer satisfaction by providing savings but can also drive repeat business.

Acceptance Criteria

Shop owner creates a promotional code for a limited-time discount on services offered at their auto repair shop.

Given a shop owner is logged into AutoWatch, When they navigate to the promotional code management page and successfully create a new code with a specified discount amount and expiration date, Then the promotional code should be saved and available for customer use at checkout.

Customer applies a promotional code during their checkout process for a repair service.

Given a customer is at the checkout page and has a valid promotional code, When they enter the promotional code and click 'Apply', Then the discount corresponding to the promotional code should be deducted from the total price displayed on the checkout page.

Shop owner attempts to create a promotional code with an invalid format or parameters.

Given a shop owner is on the promotional code management page, When they attempt to create a promotional code with missing required fields or incorrect format, Then an error message should be displayed indicating the necessary fields to correct and not saving the code until corrected.

Customer tries to use an expired promotional code at checkout.

Given a customer is at the checkout page and has an expired promotional code, When they enter the promotional code and click 'Apply', Then an error message should be displayed indicating that the promotional code is expired and the discount should not be applied to the total amount.

Shop owner views a report of promotional code usage to analyze their effectiveness.

Given a shop owner is logged into AutoWatch, When they navigate to the promotions report page, Then they should see a list of all promotional codes created, including details such as usage count, total discounts applied, and the revenue generated from each code.

One-Click Checkout

One-Click Checkout streamlines the payment process by allowing customers to save their payment information securely and complete purchases with a single tap. This speeds up checkout times and encourages prompt payment, benefiting both customers and shop owners.

Requirements

Secure Payment Storage

"As a customer, I want to securely save my payment information so that I can complete my future purchases faster without repeatedly entering my details."

Description

The Secure Payment Storage requirement focuses on providing functionality that allows customers to save their payment information securely within the AutoWatch platform. This feature must comply with data protection regulations such as PCI DSS (Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard) to ensure that sensitive information is encrypted and protected from unauthorized access. The primary benefit of this requirement is the enhanced user experience, allowing customers to complete transactions quickly while ensuring their payment details are stored safely. This integration will work seamlessly with the One-Click Checkout feature, ultimately leading to reduced cart abandonment and increased conversion rates for shop owners.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer securely saves their payment information for the first time within the AutoWatch platform after completing an auto repair transaction.

Given that the customer enters their payment details, when they submit the information, then the system should securely encrypt and store the payment details in compliance with PCI DSS standards.

Customer initiates a One-Click Checkout after having previously saved their payment information.

Given that the customer's payment information is securely stored, when they select One-Click Checkout, then the payment should be processed successfully without requiring further input from the customer.

An administrator verifies that no unsecured payment information is stored in the AutoWatch system during a security audit.

Given that a security audit is performed, when the administrator checks the payment storage system, then there should be 0 instances of unencrypted payment information found.

Customer attempts to save invalid payment information within the AutoWatch platform.

Given that the customer enters invalid payment details (e.g., expired card number), when they submit the information, then the system should reject the input and notify the customer of the error.

Customer updates their saved payment information in the AutoWatch platform.

Given that the customer inputs new payment details, when the information is submitted, then the system should securely overwrite the existing payment details while maintaining PCI DSS compliance.

Customer checks their saved payment methods within their AutoWatch account settings.

Given that the customer accesses the payment methods section, when they view their saved payment information, then the details should display only the last four digits of the card number, with other information masked for security.

Real-Time Payment Processing

"As a shop owner, I want to receive instant payment notifications so that I can manage my inventory and operations more effectively after each transaction."

Description

The Real-Time Payment Processing requirement aims to enable the AutoWatch platform to process customer payments instantly at the time of checkout. This feature should integrate with various payment gateways to provide customers with multiple payment options, including credit/debit cards, PayPal, and other digital wallets. The benefit of real-time processing is the immediate confirmation of payment, allowing for a smoother transaction experience and reducing the inventory holding period. Integration with the One-Click Checkout will ensure that payments are swift and efficient, enhancing customer satisfaction and operational efficiency for auto repair shops.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer initiates checkout with saved payment information on the AutoWatch platform using the One-Click Checkout feature.

Given a customer has saved their payment information, when they choose the One-Click Checkout option, then their payment should process instantly and display a confirmation message within 2 seconds.

Customer selects a payment option other than their saved method during checkout on the AutoWatch platform.

Given the customer is at the checkout page, when they select a different payment method and complete the checkout, then the system should process the payment in real-time, and the customer should receive a confirmation of payment within 2 seconds.

Shop owner views transaction history after customer payments have been processed.

Given multiple transactions have been completed, when the shop owner navigates to the transaction history dashboard, then all transactions should reflect accurate payment statuses, timestamps, and customer details within 5 seconds of the request.

Customer attempts to make a payment using an expired card stored in the system.

Given a customer has an expired card saved, when they attempt to checkout using the One-Click Checkout feature, then the system should trigger an error message indicating that the payment method is invalid and prompt the customer to update their payment method.

Payment gateway fails during transaction at checkout.

Given a transaction is being processed, when the payment gateway fails, then the system should display an error message to the customer and allow them to retry the payment or select a different payment method without losing their cart data.

Multiple payment options are available at checkout for customers.

Given the customer is on the checkout page, when they expand the payment options, then they should see at least three different payment methods listed, including credit/debit cards, PayPal, and digital wallets, with clear information on how to use each option.

User-Friendly Payment Interface

"As a customer, I want a simple and intuitive payment interface so that I can complete my purchases quickly without confusion."

Description

The User-Friendly Payment Interface requirement focuses on creating an intuitive and easy-to-navigate payment experience for customers during the checkout process. This includes a clearly structured layout, minimal steps to complete the purchase, and responsive design to accommodate various devices (mobile, tablet, desktop). By simplifying the payment process, customers can complete their transactions quickly, which reduces the likelihood of abandoned carts and enhances overall satisfaction. The interface should also feature visual cues and progress indicators to guide users through the One-Click Checkout process.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer initiates a One-Click Checkout transaction on a mobile device after selecting a service and confirming their intent to pay.

Given a customer has previously saved their payment information, when they click the 'One-Click Checkout' button, then the payment is processed within 2 seconds with a confirmation message displayed.

Customer views the payment interface while using a tablet device, intending to complete a purchase using One-Click Checkout.

Given a customer is on the checkout page, when they access the payment interface, then the layout adjusts responsively to fit the tablet screen without any loss of functionality or readability.

Customer attempts to initiate One-Click Checkout but has not saved their payment information.

Given a customer is on the checkout page, when they click the 'One-Click Checkout' button without saved payment information, then they are prompted to enter and save their payment details before proceeding.

Shop owner reviews transactions through AutoWatch's analytics dashboard after implementing the One-Click Checkout feature.

Given the One-Click Checkout feature is active, when the shop owner accesses the analytics dashboard, then transaction speed and completion rates are visibly improved compared to previous data without the feature.

Customer experiences the One-Click Checkout process and requires visual cues for navigation.

Given a customer is on the payment interface, when they navigate through the checkout process, then visual cues and progress indicators are displayed clearly at each step to guide them to completion.

Customer completes the One-Click Checkout on a desktop device while using a browser that may block pop-ups.

Given a customer completes the One-Click Checkout on a desktop browser with pop-up blockers enabled, when they finish the transaction, then the confirmation message is displayed in the browser without relying on pop-ups.

Automated Receipt Generation

"As a customer, I want to receive my payment receipt automatically so that I can keep track of my transactions without waiting for a manual follow-up."

Description

The Automated Receipt Generation requirement involves implementing functionality that automatically generates and sends receipts to customers upon successful payment. This feature must capture transaction details such as the service provided, payment amount, date, and any additional notes relevant to the transaction. By providing customers with prompt receipts via email or in-app notifications, it enhances transparency and can assist in record-keeping for both customers and shop owners. This will further strengthen customer trust and improve service satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

Scenario 1: Payment is successfully processed through the One-Click Checkout feature, triggering the automatic generation of a receipt.

Given that a payment is successfully completed via One-Click Checkout, when the payment confirmation is received, then an email receipt should be generated and sent to the customer's registered email address containing transaction details such as service provided, payment amount, date, and additional notes.

Scenario 2: Receipt generation occurs when multiple services are paid for in a single transaction.

Given that multiple services have been added to the cart and paid for using One-Click Checkout, when the payment process is completed, then a single comprehensive receipt should be generated that lists all services provided, payment amounts for each, total amount, date, and additional notes if provided.

Scenario 3: Receipt is sent through in-app notifications as an alternative option for users who prefer not to receive email receipts.

Given that a customer opts in for in-app notifications during their account setup, when a payment is successfully processed, then a receipt notification should be delivered through the app containing the same details as the email receipt.

Scenario 4: Customer can view past receipts for transaction history within their account.

Given that a customer has made previous payments, when they navigate to the transaction history section, then they should see a list of all past receipts with options to view complete details for each transaction.

Scenario 5: Automated receipts comply with data protection regulations.

Given that an automated receipt is generated and sent, when the receipt includes personal customer information, then it must comply with relevant data protection regulations, ensuring all sensitive information is securely handled and not displayed unnecessarily.

Scenario 6: Receipt delivery is logged in the system for tracking and customer inquiries.

Given that a receipt has been generated and sent to the customer, when the system logs the transaction, then the action of sending the receipt must be recorded with a timestamp and status update for future reference.

Multicurrency Support

"As an international customer, I want to select my currency during checkout so that I can easily understand the cost of services in my local currency."

Description

The Multicurrency Support requirement is designed to allow customers to choose their preferred currency during the checkout process, making AutoWatch accessible to a broader audience, including international clients. This functionality will utilize real-time currency conversion rates to display accurate pricing and will be integrated within the One-Click Checkout feature. By providing multicurrency support, AutoWatch can improve its attractiveness to users from different regions, thereby increasing potential sales and enhancing customer satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

User selects their preferred currency during checkout.

Given a user is on the checkout page, when they click on the currency dropdown, then they can see a list of available currencies to select from and the selected currency should update the total price displayed.

System handles real-time currency conversion during checkout.

Given a user has selected a currency, when they proceed to checkout, then the system should display the correct converted price based on the current exchange rate.

User can save payment information associated with different currencies.

Given a user has successfully completed a transaction, when they save their payment information, then the payment method should be stored with the selected currency for future transactions.

Currency display updates based on user's location.

Given a user accesses the platform from a specific region, when they visit the checkout page, then the system should automatically set the default currency to the local currency based on their location.

User experiences seamless transition between currencies during checkout.

Given a user switches from one currency to another in the checkout process, when the switch occurs, then all displayed prices and total amounts should be updated simultaneously without any delay.

Admin can manage and update supported currencies in the system.

Given the administrator is in the settings section, when they navigate to the currency management panel, then they should be able to add, remove, or modify the list of supported currencies.

Automated Invoice Generation

Automated Invoice Generation creates digital invoices immediately after a service is completed. Customers receive these invoices via email or through the AutoWatch app, providing a clear record of their transactions and simplifying bookkeeping for both customers and shops.

Requirements

Real-time Notification System

"As a customer, I want to receive real-time notifications about my vehicle's service status so that I can stay informed about the progress and know when to expect the invoice."

Description

The Real-time Notification System ensures that customers and auto shop owners receive immediate updates about the status of their service, including when a service is initiated, completed, and when invoices are generated. This increases transparency and enhances customer trust and satisfaction by providing timely information and reducing inquiries related to service status. This requirement plays a crucial role in integrating with the automated invoice generation feature, enhancing customer engagement and satisfaction through proactive communication.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer receives an update via email notification when the service is initiated.

Given a customer has requested a service, when the service is initiated, then the customer should receive an email notification detailing the start of the service.

Customer receives a notification upon the completion of their service.

Given a service has been completed, when the completion occurs, then the customer should receive a push notification through the AutoWatch app indicating that their service is finished.

Customers receive an invoice notification immediately after service completion.

Given the service was completed and an invoice is generated, when the invoice is created, then the customer should receive an email with the invoice attached and a summary of the service performed.

Auto shop owner is notified when a customer's service is initiated.

Given a service has started for a customer, when the service is initiated, then the auto shop owner should receive a real-time notification alerting them of the new service.

Auto shop owner receives a notification when an invoice is generated for a customer.

Given an invoice has been created after service completion, when the invoice is generated, then the auto shop owner should receive a notification that includes relevant details of the transaction.

Customers can access service status updates in the AutoWatch app.

Given a customer is logged into the AutoWatch app, when they navigate to the service updates section, then they should see real-time updates reflecting the current status of their service.

Notifications are logged for audit purposes in the system.

Given any notification has been sent out to customers or shop owners, when the notification is dispatched, then it should be logged in the system with a timestamp and recipient details.

Invoice Customization Options

"As a shop owner, I want to customize my invoices with my branding and specific details so that I can present a professional image to my customers and enhance my brand's recognition."

Description

The Invoice Customization Options feature allows auto repair shops to personalize their invoices with their brand logo, customized fields, and tailored messages. This requirement enhances the professional appearance of the invoices and strengthens brand identity, thereby improving customer perception and trust. Providing flexibility in invoice customization can lead to improved customer relationships and streamline bookkeeping processes for shop owners.

Acceptance Criteria

Automated invoice generation for completed services with customization options used by shop owners.

Given a service is completed, when the shop owner customizes an invoice with their logo, specific fields, and messages, then the invoice should be generated automatically and sent to the customer via email or the app with the customized content.

Personalization of invoices by changing the brand logo at different times of the year.

Given the shop owner accesses the invoice customization settings, when they upload a new logo for seasonal promotions, then the updated logo should appear on all invoices generated during that promotion period.

Editing of invoice fields to include additional charges or discounts prior to customer sending.

Given the invoice is generated automatically, when the shop owner edits the invoice to include an additional charge or discount, then the adjusted invoice should reflect these changes before being sent to the customer.

Ability for shop owners to create templates with custom fields for their invoices.

Given the shop owner initiates the creation of a new invoice template, when they select custom fields and save the template, then the template should be available for future invoices to ensure consistent branding.

Ensuring that customers receive their invoices with the correct details as per the customization done by the shop owner.

Given the invoice has been customized and generated, when it is sent to the customer, then it should include the shop's logo, correct fields, and tailored messages as per the customization settings.

Test the invoice customization feature across different devices and platforms.

Given the invoice customization options are available, when accessed on different devices (desktop, tablet, mobile), then the customization features should function consistently with the same look and options available across all devices.

Verify that invoices correctly display the date and time of service completion in the customized format.

Given an invoice for a completed service is generated, when the shop owner customizes the date and time format settings, then the invoices sent to customers should reflect the chosen format accurately.

Payment Integration Module

"As a customer, I want to be able to pay my invoice directly through the email link so that I can settle my payment quickly and easily without needing to visit the shop."

Description

The Payment Integration Module allows customers to make payments directly through the digital invoices they receive. This feature simplifies the payment process for customers and streamlines collections for shop owners. By integrating with various payment methods (credit card, PayPal, etc.), this requirement addresses the need for convenience and can significantly reduce the time taken to collect payments, ultimately enhancing cash flow for auto repair shops.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer receives an invoice after a completed service via email.

Given a service is marked as completed in the AutoWatch system, when the invoice is generated, then the customer must receive an email with the digital invoice within 5 minutes.

Customer makes a payment through the digital invoice link.

Given the customer receives a digital invoice, when they click on the payment link, then they must be directed to a secure payment page where they can pay using a credit card or PayPal.

Shop owner receives notification of successful payment.

Given a customer completes the payment, when the transaction is successful, then the shop owner must receive an automated notification within 2 minutes of the payment confirmation.

Customer can view their invoice history through the AutoWatch app.

Given that the customer has logged into the AutoWatch app, when they navigate to the invoice history section, then they should see a list of all invoices with status (paid/unpaid) and details of each invoice.

Digital invoices are generated in a clear and consistent format.

Given an invoice is generated, when the invoice is viewed by the customer, then it must contain all relevant details (service description, amounts, dates) and follow a pre-defined template.

Integration with various payment gateways is functioning properly.

Given the payment integration module is in use, when a payment is attempted using different payment methods, then each method (credit card, PayPal) must process successfully with no errors.

Error handling for failed payments is in place and informs the customer.

Given a payment attempt fails, when the customer tries to make a payment, then they must receive a clear error message explaining the failure with suggested next steps.

Invoice Tracking Dashboard

"As an auto shop owner, I want to access a dashboard that shows me the status of all my invoices so that I can manage my cash flow and follow up on overdue payments efficiently."

Description

The Invoice Tracking Dashboard provides shop owners with a comprehensive overview of all generated invoices, their statuses (paid, pending, overdue), and associated analytics. This requirement is essential for better financial management, allowing owners to track their cash flow effectively and ensure timely follow-ups on outstanding payments. By integrating real-time data, shop owners can make informed decisions and prioritize follow-ups accordingly, thus enhancing operational efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

Invoice Status Overview for Shop Owners

Given that a shop owner accesses the Invoice Tracking Dashboard, when they request to view the invoice list, then they should see all generated invoices categorized by status (paid, pending, overdue) with accurate counts for each category.

Real-Time Analytics on Invoice Payments

Given that invoices have been generated and sent, when a shop owner views the Invoice Tracking Dashboard, then they should see real-time data reflecting the total amount due, total paid, and total overdue invoices, updated every minute.

Search and Filter Functionality for Invoices

Given that a shop owner is on the Invoice Tracking Dashboard, when they utilize the search and filter options, then they should be able to filter invoices by customer name, date range, and status, displaying only the relevant invoices that meet the criteria.

Notification System for Overdue Invoices

Given that there are overdue invoices, when the shop owner accesses the Invoice Tracking Dashboard, then they should receive a notification alerting them of any outstanding invoices that require follow-up.

Exporting Invoice Data for Reporting

Given that the shop owner wants to analyze their invoices, when they click on the export feature in the Invoice Tracking Dashboard, then they should be able to download a report in CSV format that includes all invoice details within the selected date range.

User Access Control for Invoice Dashboard

Given that multiple users have access to the AutoWatch platform, when a user attempts to access the Invoice Tracking Dashboard, then their access should be validated based on their role in the system (e.g., admin, staff) to ensure data security and appropriate permissions.

Visual Graphs for Invoice Trends

Given that a shop owner is viewing their invoices, when they toggle to the analytics section of the Invoice Tracking Dashboard, then they should see visual graphs representing payment trends over time, including monthly income and payment timelines, for better decision-making.

Multi-Language Support

"As a non-English speaking customer, I want to receive my invoice in my preferred language so that I can understand the details clearly and avoid any confusion regarding the charges."

Description

The Multi-Language Support feature enables the invoice generation system to create invoices in multiple languages. This requirement caters to a diverse customer base and enhances usability for non-native speakers. By providing invoices in the customer's preferred language, it increases clarity and reduces misunderstandings regarding services rendered and payment terms, ultimately improving customer satisfaction and loyalty.

Acceptance Criteria

Invoice Generation for Spanish-speaking Customers

Given a customer who prefers invoices in Spanish, when a service is completed, then an invoice should be generated in Spanish and sent via email to the customer's registered email address.

Invoice Generation for French-speaking Customers

Given a customer who prefers invoices in French, when a service is completed, then an invoice should be generated in French and accessible through the AutoWatch app.

Invoice Generation for Mixed Language Customers

Given a customer who speaks both English and Spanish, when a service is completed, then the invoice should be generated in Spanish if the preferred language is set to Spanish in their profile.

Invoice Review by Customer Support

Given a customer who receives an invoice in their preferred language, when they contact support regarding the invoice, then the support representative should be able to view the invoice in the same language in the support system.

Language Preference Update

Given a customer who wants to change their language preference, when they update their profile preferences in the AutoWatch app, then all future invoices should be generated in the newly selected language.

Multi-Language Support Compatibility

Given that the system supports multiple languages, when a new language is added, then all invoices should be correctly generated and formatted in that language without errors or visual discrepancies.

Loyalty Points Integration

This feature allows customers to earn loyalty points for every mobile payment made. By integrating this incentive into the mobile payment process, shops can encourage repeat business while rewarding customers for their loyalty.

Requirements

Loyalty Points Accrual

"As a customer, I want to earn loyalty points with every mobile payment I make so that I can feel rewarded for my continued patronage and redeem those points for discounts or gifts."

Description

This requirement outlines the system's ability to track and accumulate loyalty points for customers with each successful mobile payment transaction. The integration must ensure that points are awarded accurately based on predefined criteria (e.g., percentage of payment, flat rate per transaction), and points should be stored securely in the user’s profile. The functionality will encourage repeat business while enhancing customer satisfaction by providing a tangible reward for loyalty. It is critical that records of points accrued be seamlessly integrated with the customer’s account for easy access and management, fostering a sense of engagement and encouraging future visits.

Acceptance Criteria

User completes a mobile payment transaction at an auto repair shop using the AutoWatch application.

Given a customer has an account with the shop, When they make a successful mobile payment, Then the loyalty points should reflect immediately in their account profile.

Customer queries their loyalty points balance after making multiple transactions.

Given a customer has made several mobile payments, When they check their loyalty points balance in their profile, Then the total points accrued should be accurately displayed based on the predefined criteria.

Shop owner reviews a customer's loyalty points history for marketing purposes.

Given a customer has accrued loyalty points, When the shop owner accesses the customer's account, Then the detailed history of loyalty points earned and redeemed should be accessible and clearly presented.

Customer attempts to make a purchase using their accrued loyalty points.

Given a customer has enough loyalty points, When they choose to redeem points during a payment process, Then the correct amount of points should be deducted from their account and reflected in their transaction receipt.

System administrator configures the loyalty points accrual metrics for mobile payments.

Given the administrator wants to set or update the loyalty points criteria, When they specify the percentage of payment or flat rate per transaction, Then the system should save the new settings and apply them to subsequent transactions.

User receives a notification when loyalty points are accrued after a mobile payment.

Given a customer has just completed a mobile payment, When the transaction is processed, Then the customer should receive an automated notification confirming the points earned.

User logs into their account to check their loyalty points usage over a defined period.

Given the customer wants to track their loyalty points usage, When they access their account's loyalty section, Then a report summarizing points earned, redeemed, and current balance should be provided for the last 12 months.

Points Redemption Mechanism

"As a customer, I want to redeem my loyalty points during my payment process so that I can benefit immediately from my loyalty rewards without any hassle."

Description

This requirement focuses on creating a user-friendly interface that allows customers to redeem their accumulated loyalty points during their next mobile payment. The redemption process must be clearly communicated, allowing customers to choose how many points they wish to use during transactions. The system should automatically deduct the appropriate points from the customer’s account balance while updating the transaction total accordingly. Proper validation must be implemented to ensure that customers can only redeem points they have accrued, thus enhancing engagement and driving repeat business. The implementation will foster a positive customer experience by making rewards feel accessible and rewarding.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer wishes to redeem loyalty points during their mobile payment checkout process.

Given the customer has accumulated loyalty points, when they proceed to the payment screen, then they should see an option to redeem points and view their current balance.

Customer selects a specific amount of loyalty points to redeem during their transaction.

Given the customer is at the payment screen, when they choose to redeem a specific number of points, then the system should allow them to enter or select the amount and display the corresponding discount on the transaction total.

Customer attempts to redeem more points than they have accrued.

Given the customer wishes to redeem points that exceed their balance, when they attempt to submit the transaction, then the system should display an error message indicating insufficient points for redemption.

Redemption of loyalty points successfully updates the transaction total.

Given the customer redeems a specific number of points, when the transaction is processed, then the system should deduct the correct amount of points from the customer's account and update the transaction total accordingly.

System ensures customers can only redeem points earned through their transactions.

Given a customer is attempting to redeem points, when their transaction history is checked, then the system should validate that only points earned through completed transactions are eligible for redemption.

Confirmation of points redemption after a successful transaction.

Given the customer has successfully completed their payment with points redeemed, when the transaction is finalized, then the system should send a confirmation notification detailing the points used and the new balance.

Admin Dashboard for Loyalty Management

"As an admin, I want to view comprehensive statistics on loyalty points earned and redeemed so that I can optimize our rewards program and enhance customer engagement."

Description

This requirement involves developing a comprehensive admin dashboard that provides auto repair shop owners with real-time insights into loyalty points accrued and redeemed by their customers. The dashboard should feature analytics that display trends in customer behavior regarding loyalty rewards, helping owners better strategize their customer engagement efforts. It must also offer functionalities for administrators to adjust points accumulation and redemption rates based on business needs, thereby providing flexibility and control over the loyalty program. Proper security measures should be incorporated to protect sensitive customer data while ensuring intuitive access for shop administrators.

Acceptance Criteria

Admin views the loyalty points dashboard to assess overall customer engagement with the loyalty program after a promotional campaign.

Given the admin is logged into the dashboard, when they navigate to the loyalty points section, then they should see a summary of total points accrued and redeemed during the specified timeframe, displayed in both visual graphs and statistical data.

Admin adjusts the loyalty points settings based on seasonal trends to encourage more customer engagement in the upcoming months.

Given the admin has accessed the loyalty settings page, when they modify the accumulation rate and save the changes, then the new rates should be effective immediately and reflected in the dashboard summary for all customer transactions afterward.

Admin analyzes customer behavior trends to determine the effectiveness of the loyalty program during specific months.

Given the admin selects a specific date range in the analytics section, when they generate the report, then it should display detailed statistics on points earned, redeemed, and the number of active participants, including comparisons to previous periods.

Admin receives a notification alerting them to potential anomalies in loyalty points transactions, indicating possible misuse.

Given the alerts are enabled, when an unusual spike in points redemption occurs, then the admin should receive an automated notification detailing the specifics of the anomaly and the customers involved.

Admin needs to ensure that customer data is securely protected while accessing and navigating the loyalty points dashboard.

Given the admin is logged in, when they access any part of the dashboard, then all customer data should be encrypted and comply with industry-standard security measures, with access logs maintained for audit purposes.

Admin intends to audit and review individual customer loyalty points history for discrepancies.

Given the admin is on the loyalty management dashboard, when they search for a specific customer’s transaction history, then they should be able to view all accrued and redeemed points, along with timestamps, without any errors or data loss.

Auto Notification System for Points Updates

"As a customer, I want to receive notifications when I earn loyalty points or when my points are about to expire, so that I can maximize the benefits of the loyalty program and avoid losing rewards."

Description

This requirement includes a system for automatically notifying customers via SMS or email when they earn loyalty points or when their points balance is about to expire. These notifications should be customizable to allow shops to align messaging with their branding while providing essential information to customers. This will enhance customer communication and keep users informed about their rewards status, fostering ongoing engagement. Proper tracking of communication will also be necessary to ensure that all notifications are reliably sent. This feature aims to improve customer satisfaction and encourage point usage before expiration.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer earns loyalty points upon completion of a mobile payment transaction.

Given a customer makes a mobile payment for a service, When the transaction is processed successfully, Then the customer receives an SMS or email notification confirming the earned loyalty points with details of their current balance.

Customer receives notification when loyalty points balance is about to expire.

Given a customer has loyalty points that are within 30 days of expiration, When the system checks the points balance, Then the customer receives an SMS or email notification informing them of the impending expiration and encouraging usage of points.

Shops can customize the messaging of notifications sent to customers about their loyalty points.

Given an admin user accesses the notification settings, When they customize the SMS or email template for loyalty points notifications, Then the updated message is saved and reflected in notifications sent to customers.

Tracking system for sent notifications to ensure reliability and accountability.

Given the notification system sends an SMS or email, When the communication is logged in the system, Then the log accurately reflects the time, date, method, and content of the sent notification regarding loyalty points.

Customer can opt-in or opt-out for loyalty points notifications.

Given a customer accesses their account preferences, When they select their notification preferences for loyalty points updates, Then their choice is saved and respected in future communications.

System processes loyalty points notifications during peak hours without delays.

Given peak usage hours for the notification system, When a mobile payment occurs and triggers a notification, Then the notification is sent within 5 minutes without any system errors or delays.

Notifications must include information aligned with the shop's branding.

Given the shop admin has set their branding preferences, When a customer receives a notification about their loyalty points, Then the notification reflects the shop's logo and branding colors as configured by the admin.

Integration with Existing Payment Systems

"As a shop owner, I want the loyalty points system to work with our current payment processing methods so that we can offer rewards without overhauling our existing systems."

Description

This requirement ensures that the loyalty points feature can be seamlessly integrated with the existing mobile payment systems used by auto repair shops without causing disruptions to current processes. The integration should support various payment methods while maintaining compliance with security standards such as PCI DSS. It must include testing and validation phases to ensure that loyalty points are correctly accrued and redeemed across different payment platforms. By achieving this integration, the loyalty points feature will enhance the overall payment experience while ensuring protection and efficiency of financial transactions.

Acceptance Criteria

Integrating loyalty points earning for mobile payments made through various payment methods in the AutoWatch application.

Given a customer makes a payment via mobile payment, when the payment is processed, then the loyalty points should be accrued correctly according to the payment amount and predefined conversion rate.

Testing the integration with existing mobile payment systems used by auto repair shops.

Given the integration is completed, when a test transaction is conducted through each supported payment system, then the transaction should be completed successfully, and the loyalty points should be calculated and displayed correctly.

Customers redeeming loyalty points during their mobile payment transactions in the AutoWatch system.

Given a customer has loyalty points available, when they choose to redeem points during a payment, then the deduction of points should reflect correctly on the transaction total and the customer's loyalty points balance should be updated accordingly.

Ensuring compliance with PCI DSS during the payment process with loyalty points integration.

Given the integration is established, when any payment transaction occurs, then all data handling should comply with PCI DSS standards without any security breaches or vulnerabilities.

Validating the reporting of loyalty points accumulation and redemption within the AutoWatch analytics dashboard.

Given a series of transactions over a specific time period, when reported in the analytics dashboard, then the accumulated and redeemed loyalty points should match the recorded transactions accurately without discrepancies.

Receiving customer feedback on the loyalty points integration after transactions.

Given a customer completes a transaction using the loyalty points system, when the feedback form is accessed, then at least 80% of customers should report satisfaction with the loyalty points integration based on a predefined survey.

Identifying and handling errors during the loyalty points integration process.

Given different mobile payment systems are in use, when an error occurs during the points calculation, then the system should log the error and notify the user of the issue while allowing for a resolution attempt.

Secure Payment Processing

Secure Payment Processing ensures that all transactions made through the AutoWatch platform are encrypted and protected. This feature builds trust with customers by offering a safe and reliable way to make payments, thus enhancing overall user confidence.

Requirements

Encryption Standards Compliance

"As a shop owner, I want to ensure that my customers' payment information is securely processed so that they feel safe making transactions through the AutoWatch platform."

Description

This requirement entails the implementation of industry-standard encryption protocols to protect payment information during transactions. By adhering to the latest encryption standards (such as AES-256), the AutoWatch platform ensures that customer payment data is securely transmitted and stored, building customer trust and ensuring regulatory compliance. This is crucial for customer confidence in making transactions and for preventing data breaches that could compromise sensitive information.

Acceptance Criteria

User initiates a payment transaction on the AutoWatch platform using a credit card.

Given the user enters valid credit card information, when the payment is submitted, then the payment must be securely processed using AES-256 encryption, and a confirmation of the encrypted transaction must be generated.

User accesses their payment history to review past transactions.

Given the user is logged in and navigates to the payment history section, when the user views transaction details, then all sensitive payment data should be masked for security, displaying only the last four digits of credit cards and transaction status.

Customer makes a payment through the AutoWatch mobile application when connected to public Wi-Fi.

Given the nature of public Wi-Fi, when the customer completes a payment transaction, then end-to-end encryption must be confirmed, ensuring that no sensitive data is exposed during transmission.

A shop owner receives an alert for a failed payment transaction due to compliance issues.

Given a payment transaction fails due to encryption compliance, when the alert is received by the shop owner, then the notification must clearly specify that the failure was due to non-compliance with encryption standards and suggest corrective actions.

A regulatory auditor reviews the AutoWatch payment processing security measures.

Given the auditor is assessing compliance, when the security protocols are reviewed, then all payment transactions must demonstrate adherence to industry-standard encryption protocols such as AES-256, and documentation of compliance should be readily available.

User Authentication and Access Control

"As an administrator, I want to implement multi-factor authentication for payment processing so that I can enhance security and control access to sensitive financial information."

Description

This requirement involves developing a robust user authentication system that ensures only authorized users can access the payment processing feature. It will include multi-factor authentication (MFA) to add an extra layer of security. This enhances the security of the entire payment processing ecosystem and protects sensitive information from unauthorized access, thereby promoting user confidence in the platform.

Acceptance Criteria

User attempts to log into the AutoWatch platform and initiates a payment process for a repair service while on a mobile device.

Given a registered user enters correct credentials, When the user clicks 'Login', Then the user should be authenticated and directed to the payment processing screen.

An authorized user accesses the payment processing section of the AutoWatch platform after providing the correct multi-factor authentication code.

Given a user is logged in and has enabled multi-factor authentication, When the user enters the MFA code sent to their device, Then the user should gain access to the payment processing functionality.

A user who has not set up multi-factor authentication attempts to access the payment processing feature.

Given a user that has not set up MFA attempts to log in, When they try to access the payment processing feature, Then the user should receive a prompt to set up MFA before they can proceed.

After completing the payment process, a user wants to log out from the AutoWatch platform securely.

Given a user is on the payment processing confirmation screen, When they click on the 'Logout' button, Then the session should end and the user should be redirected to the login page.

An unauthorized user attempts to access the payment processing feature without valid credentials and MFA.

Given an unauthorized user tries to access payment processing, When they enter incorrect credentials, Then access should be denied with an error message displayed.

An authorized user wants to reset their password following a security incident.

Given a user has received a security alert about their account, When they request a password reset, Then an email with reset instructions should be sent to the user's registered email address, and the user should be prompted to create a new password.

An authenticated user wants to view their payment history after successfully completing a payment transaction.

Given a user is authenticated and on the dashboard, When they navigate to 'Payment History', Then the user should see a list of their recent transactions with details such as date, amount, and service description.

Integration with Payment Gateways

"As a customer, I want to be able to choose my preferred payment method at checkout so that I can complete transactions more conveniently."

Description

This requirement focuses on enabling seamless integration of the AutoWatch platform with various payment gateways (such as PayPal, Stripe, and Square). This integration should facilitate smooth transaction processes, allowing users to choose their preferred payment methods while ensuring compliance with payment gateway standards. It reduces friction during the payment process and caters to the diverse preferences of customers, thus improving user experience.

Acceptance Criteria

User initiates a payment transaction for a service through the AutoWatch platform.

Given the user has selected a service and is on the payment page, when they choose a payment gateway (e.g., PayPal, Stripe), then the payment should be securely processed and a confirmation message displayed to the user.

A customer attempts to make a payment using a valid credit card through the integrated payment gateway.

Given the customer is entered valid credit card information, when they submit the payment, then the transaction must be processed successfully, and a receipt should be emailed to the customer.

Shop owner wants to integrate multiple payment gateways into the AutoWatch platform.

Given the shop owner accesses the integration settings, when they choose to add a new payment gateway, then the platform should allow for configuration of that gateway without errors or issues.

A customer needs to make a payment but chooses a payment method that is not available.

Given the customer is on the payment page, when they select an unavailable payment gateway, then an error message should be displayed informing them of the unavailability.

User requests a refund for a transaction processed through the AutoWatch platform.

Given the user has initiated a refund request for a valid transaction, when the request is processed, then the refund should be completed successfully, and the user notified of the outcome.

A shop owner wants to view transaction history through the AutoWatch platform after integrating payment gateways.

Given the shop owner selects the transaction history section, when they view transactions, then all transactions processed through any integrated payment gateway should be displayed accurately.

Customer uses a mobile device to complete a payment through AutoWatch.

Given the customer is using a mobile device, when they complete a payment, then the transaction should be processed securely, and the mobile user interface should display confirmation without any glitches.

Real-Time Payment Notifications

"As a customer, I want to receive immediate confirmation after making a payment so that I know my transaction was successful and I can retain the receipt for my records."

Description

The requirement to implement a system where real-time notifications are sent to both the customer and the shop owner upon successful transaction processing. Notifications should include transaction details and receipts. This not only enhances transparency but also keeps users informed about payment status, fostering trust and reducing queries regarding payment follow-ups.

Acceptance Criteria

Customer initiates a payment for services rendered through the AutoWatch platform.

Given that the customer has completed a payment successfully, when the transaction is processed, then both the customer and the shop owner should receive real-time notifications containing transaction details and a receipt.

Shop owner reviews payment status for services provided to ensure transparency.

Given that a payment notification is sent, when the shop owner accesses the notifications section, then they should see the latest payment notifications with complete details including amount, transaction ID, and timestamp.

Customer needs assurance of their payment status after completing a transaction.

Given that a customer has completed a payment, when they check their email or SMS notifications, then they should receive a confirmation message that includes transaction details within 5 minutes.

Payment processing encounters an error during transaction.

Given there is an error during payment processing, when the transaction fails, then both the customer and shop owner should receive an error notification with a brief explanation of the issue and a call to action for resolution.

Customer requests a receipt for their completed transaction after the initial notification.

Given a successful payment, when a customer requests a receipt via the AutoWatch platform, then they should be able to download or view the receipt that includes all relevant transaction details.

Shop owner analyzes payment notification logs for finance tracking.

Given that notifications are generated upon payment processing, when the shop owner reviews the payment notification logs, then they should see a complete history of notifications categorized by date and payment status.

Customer fails to receive payment notification after successful transaction.

Given that a customer has successfully completed a payment, when checking the notification system, then the analytics should reflect 100% delivery rate of notifications sent to customers for successful transactions.

Automated Refund Processing

"As a shop owner, I want to be able to process refunds automatically through the platform so that I can handle customer issues promptly and efficiently without manual errors."

Description

This requirement involves creating an automated system for processing refunds directly through the payment processing feature in AutoWatch. It should ensure that refunds can be executed quickly, with minimal manual intervention, while also notifying both the shop owner and customer about the status of the refund. This speeds up the resolution of issues, enhances customer satisfaction, and streamlines operations for shop owners.

Acceptance Criteria

Requesting a refund for a recent service due to customer dissatisfaction.

Given a customer has initiated a refund request through the AutoWatch platform, When the request is validated by the system, Then the refund should be processed automatically and an email notification should be sent to both the customer and the shop owner confirming the process.

Shop owner manually processes a refund through the system.

Given a shop owner is logged into the AutoWatch platform, When the shop owner selects a transaction for refund and submits the request, Then the system should process the refund without manual intervention and notify both the shop owner and customer of the successful transaction.

Customer receives an update on the refund status after initiating a refund request.

Given a customer has requested a refund, When the refund status changes, Then the customer should receive a notification with the updated status of their refund, including whether it has been approved or denied.

Processing refunds during non-business hours.

Given a refund request is made after business hours, When the system receives the request, Then the refund should be processed automatically and notifications sent to both parties on the next business day without delay.

Handling multiple refund requests simultaneously.

Given multiple refund requests are submitted at the same time, When the system processes these requests, Then each request should be handled independently and notifications sent out without any delays or errors in processing.

Tracking the history of refund transactions for auditing purposes.

Given the shop owner accesses the financial reports section of the AutoWatch platform, When they review the refund transaction history, Then all processed refunds should be listed with corresponding dates, amounts, and customer details for clarity and auditing.

Ensuring compliance with payment processing regulations during refunds.

Given a refund request is processed, When the system executes the refund, Then it must comply with all relevant financial regulations and standards, and log the transaction details for compliance auditing.

Predictive Stock Alerts

Predictive Stock Alerts provide notifications when inventory levels for specific parts reach predetermined thresholds. This proactive feature enables shop owners to restock essential items before they run out, thus preventing service delays and maintaining optimal workflow.

Requirements

Threshold Notification Settings

"As a shop owner, I want to set custom inventory thresholds for specific parts so that I can receive timely restock alerts tailored to my business needs."

Description

The Threshold Notification Settings requirement allows users to configure and adjust the minimum inventory levels for specific parts. This feature enables shop owners to personalize the thresholds based on usage frequency and supplier capabilities, ensuring that stock alerts are relevant and timely. By providing a user-friendly interface to set up notifications, this requirement facilitates optimal inventory management, reducing the risk of running out of essential parts while increasing operational efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

Shop owner accesses the Threshold Notification Settings feature to configure minimum inventory levels for specific parts used frequently in car repairs.

Given the user is on the Threshold Notification Settings page, when they input a minimum inventory level for a specific part and save the settings, then the updated inventory threshold should be accurately reflected in the system and trigger a notification when stock falls below this level.

A shop owner wants to receive an alert when their inventory of essential parts drops below the threshold set in the system.

Given that inventory levels are monitored in real-time, when the stock of a specified part reaches the predetermined threshold, then an automated notification should be sent to the shop owner's registered email and mobile app.

A user navigates to the Threshold Notification Settings and adjusts the threshold for a part that has fluctuating usage due to seasonal demand.

Given the user adjusts the inventory threshold and saves the changes, when the inventory level of that part varies due to new supply data, then the notification system should reflect the updated threshold and guide the user without reverting to the previous setting.

The shop owner needs to verify that the Threshold Notification Settings are correctly capturing and alerting based on the configured levels after making adjustments.

Given that the owner has set multiple thresholds for different parts, when they conduct a test run with known inventory levels, then alerts should be accurately dispatched based on those thresholds without any errors or omissions.

An admin checks the system logs to review the history of changes made to inventory threshold settings.

Given the admin requests to view the change history, when they access the logs, then all previous threshold settings alterations should be displayed with timestamps, user information, and the parts affected, ensuring an auditable record is maintained.

A user uninstalls and reinstalls the application to see if the previously saved notification settings are retained.

Given that the user has set specific thresholds before uninstalling, when they reinstall the application and log in, then their previous settings should be automatically restored without any need for reconfiguration.

Real-time Restock Notifications

"As a shop owner, I want to receive real-time notifications when my parts inventory is low so that I can act quickly to restock and avoid service delays."

Description

The Real-time Restock Notifications requirement ensures that shop owners receive instantaneous alerts via SMS, email, or in-app notifications when inventory levels fall below predetermined thresholds. This functionality is critical for maintaining workflow continuity and minimizing service interruptions. By integrating with communication channels already used by shop owners, this requirement streamlines the restocking process, enhancing overall customer satisfaction by ensuring continuous availability of necessary parts.

Acceptance Criteria

Shop owner receives low inventory alerts while managing customer appointments and repairs in their shop, ensuring they can restock parts before running out.

Given that the inventory level for a specific part falls below the predetermined threshold, when the threshold is crossed, then the shop owner receives an instant alert via SMS, email, or in-app notification.

A shop owner is currently in the middle of a busy workday when the inventory for an essential part is about to run out, prompting immediate restock action.

Given that the shop owner is actively managing repairs, when the inventory level of a critical part reaches the alert threshold, then the alert notification is received without any delay.

A shop owner has customized their inventory alert settings to prioritize certain parts over others based on service history and demand.

Given that the shop owner has set specific alert preferences for certain parts, when any of these prioritized parts reach the low threshold, then the owner receives an immediate notification referencing the specific parts that need restocking.

During an end-of-day review, the shop owner checks the status of stock levels and the alerts received throughout the day for strategic planning.

Given that it is the end of the day, when the shop owner reviews the notifications, then they should see a log of all restock alerts received along with timestamp details for each alert.

The shop owner has integrated AutoWatch with third-party inventory and scheduling tools to streamline operations.

Given that the shop owner utilizes third-party tools for inventory management, when the inventory level falls below the threshold, then the alert should also reflect in the integrated applications promptly.

When the shop owner is out of the office, they should still receive notifications about low inventory in real-time to ensure timely restocking.

Given that the shop owner is away from the shop, when inventory levels fall below the thresholds, then all notification channels (SMS, email, app) should reliably inform them of the low stock situation.

Inventory Analytics Dashboard

"As a shop owner, I want an analytics dashboard that shows my inventory trends so that I can make informed decisions about stocking levels and purchasing."

Description

The Inventory Analytics Dashboard requirement provides shop owners with an overview of inventory trends, including usage patterns, stock turnover rates, and predictive analytics for future inventory needs. This analytics tool integrates seamlessly with the existing AutoWatch platform, offering visual insights and data-driven recommendations for optimizing stock levels. By enabling informed decision-making, this requirement enhances operational efficiency and helps improve profit margins by reducing excess inventory and minimizing stockouts.

Acceptance Criteria

Shop Owner Views Inventory Analytics Dashboard

Given that the shop owner accesses the Inventory Analytics Dashboard, when the dashboard loads, then it displays current inventory levels, usage patterns over the last month, and stock turnover rates within a clear and interactive format.

Shop Owner Receives Predictive Stock Alert

Given that the inventory levels of a specific part reach the predetermined threshold, when the alert system triggers, then the shop owner receives a notification via the platform and email detailing the part and suggested reorder quantity.

Shop Owner Analyzes Trends from Inventory Dashboard

Given that the shop owner navigates to the analytics section of the dashboard, when they select the 'Usage Trends' tab, then the system displays a visual graph of part usage over the last six months, enabling the owner to identify patterns.

Shop Owner Executes Inventory Restock Based on Dashboard Recommendations

Given that the shop owner reviews the recommended stock levels provided by the inventory analytics, when they choose to restock items, then the system automatically generates a purchase order for the suggested quantities.

Shop Owner Validates Stock Turnover Rates

Given that the shop owner accesses the Inventory Analytics Dashboard, when they view the stock turnover rates, then the metrics should accurately reflect the actual turnover rates calculated based on historical sales data from the last quarter.

Shop Owner Customizes Notification Preferences

Given that the shop owner is on the settings page for predictive stock alerts, when they adjust the thresholds for low inventory notifications and save their changes, then the system confirms the updates and applies them to the notification settings.

Shop Owner Reviews Historical Inventory Data

Given that the shop owner accesses the historical data section of the dashboard, when they select a specific period for analysis, then the dashboard displays a comprehensive report of inventory usage and restocking actions for that period.

Supplier Integration Interface

"As a shop owner, I want to automatically reorder parts from suppliers when my inventory is low so that I can save time on manual orders and ensure I always have necessary items in stock."

Description

The Supplier Integration Interface requirement allows shop owners to connect their inventory management system with suppliers' databases to automate the restocking process. By implementing APIs that facilitate real-time order placements based on inventory alerts, this requirement will significantly reduce the time spent on manual ordering, ensuring that the right parts are ordered at the right time. This seamless integration also helps build stronger supplier relationships, enabling better negotiation terms and quicker fulfillment.

Acceptance Criteria

Supplier Integration for Automated Restocking of Inventory

Given a supplier's database integrated with AutoWatch, when an inventory level for a specific part falls below the predetermined threshold, then an automated order should be placed with the supplier without manual intervention.

Real-Time Inventory Notification System

Given that the auto repair shop owner has set inventory thresholds for specific parts, when the stock level reaches the threshold, then the shop owner receives a notification alerting them of low stock and suggesting a reorder.

Supplier Quality Assessment Post-Order Placement

Given an order is placed with a supplier via the Supplier Integration Interface, when the parts are received, then the system should allow the shop owner to rate and assess the quality of the parts delivered for future reference.

Error Handling for Supplier Integration Failures

Given that the Supplier Integration Interface is active, when a failure occurs in placing an automated order, then a clear error message is displayed to the shop owner detailing the next steps to rectify the issue.

Supplier Relationship Management Dashboard

Given the integration of supplier databases, when accessing the Supplier Relationship Management Dashboard, then the shop owner should see metrics on order fulfillment times, quality assessments, and cost comparisons for each supplier.

Audit Trail of Automated Orders

Given the automated order placement feature, when an order is executed, then an audit trail should be logged in the system containing details of the order, the timestamp, and the supplier's response for accountability and tracking purposes.

Customizable Alert Preferences

"As a shop owner, I want to customize how and when I receive inventory alerts so that I can manage my workflow without being overwhelmed by notifications."

Description

The Customizable Alert Preferences requirement allows shop owners to choose how and when they receive stock alerts. Users can select their preferred communication method, frequency of alerts, and types of alerts (e.g., low stock, critical stock, etc.). This level of customization ensures that shop owners receive information relevant to their operational needs without overwhelming them with notifications. The feature enhances user satisfaction by providing control over their inventory management communications.

Acceptance Criteria

Shop owner wants to receive low stock alerts via email every day at 9 AM.

Given the shop owner has set their alert preferences, when the inventory level for a selected part falls below the low stock threshold, then an email notification should be sent daily at 9 AM.

Shop owner is notified immediately via SMS when critical stock levels are reached for important parts.

Given the shop owner has opted for immediate notifications for critical stock, when the inventory level for a critical part reaches the threshold, then a text message should be sent immediately to the owner's registered phone number.

Shop owner customizes their alert preferences to receive weekly summaries of their stock levels.

Given the shop owner selects a weekly summary option, when the week ends, then the owner should receive a summary email detailing stock levels for all parts, including low and critical items.

Shop owner changes their alert preferences from SMS to in-app notifications for all types of alerts.

Given the shop owner updates their alert preferences, when a stock level for any part meets the alert criteria, then an in-app notification should be displayed instead of sending an SMS.

Shop owner wishes to receive notifications only for specific parts rather than all parts in inventory.

Given the shop owner has selected certain parts to monitor, when those parts reach their respective alert thresholds, then notifications should only be sent for the selected parts and not others.

Shop owner receives confirmation of their alert preferences update.

Given the shop owner submits changes to their alert preferences, when the changes are saved successfully, then the owner should receive a confirmation notification indicating their preferences have been updated.

Demand Trend Analysis

Demand Trend Analysis operates by identifying historical consumption patterns and seasonal trends in service demand. By visualizing these patterns, shop owners can make informed decisions regarding inventory procurement, ensuring they have the right parts when customers need them.

Requirements

Data Visualization Dashboard

"As an auto shop owner, I want to view a visual representation of historical service demand trends so that I can make informed decisions on inventory procurement and stock management."

Description

The Data Visualization Dashboard requirement focuses on creating an interactive and user-friendly dashboard that displays historical consumption patterns and seasonal trends in service demand. This dashboard will provide shop owners with visual insights into demand fluctuations, allowing them to quickly assess trends over time. It integrates with the AutoWatch system to pull real-time data, ensuring that the information presented is accurate and up-to-date. This requirement enhances decision-making regarding inventory management and optimizes resource allocation, ultimately contributing to better service delivery and increased customer satisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

Dashboard Display of Historical Data

Given that I am logged into the AutoWatch platform, when I navigate to the Data Visualization Dashboard, then I should see a graphical representation of historical consumption patterns for the past 12 months.

Seasonal Trend Identification

Given that the demand trend analysis has been conducted, when I access the dashboard during a specific month, then I should be able to view seasonal trends and fluctuations for that month compared to the averages from previous years.

Real-Time Data Integration

Given that the AutoWatch system is connected to live inventory data, when I refresh the Data Visualization Dashboard, then the displayed information should reflect real-time data without any delays.

Interactive Chart Functionality

Given that I am viewing the Data Visualization Dashboard, when I hover over data points on the chart, then I should see detailed tooltips showing exact values and additional context for each data point.

Customizable Time Frame Selection

Given that I am using the Data Visualization Dashboard, when I select a specific time range from the settings, then the dashboard should update to display data only within the chosen time frame.

User Access Levels and Permissions

Given that different employee roles exist in the AutoWatch platform, when I attempt to access the Data Visualization Dashboard, then I should only see data relevant to my role as per defined permissions.

Exporting Dashboard Data

Given that I am viewing the Data Visualization Dashboard, when I select the export option, then I should be able to download the displayed data in a CSV format.

Automated Reporting

"As an auto shop owner, I want to receive automated reports on service demand trends so that I can save time analyzing data and focus on improving my business."

Description

The Automated Reporting requirement involves generating regular reports on service demand trends and inventory usage without manual intervention. This functionality will allow shop owners to receive weekly or monthly insights directly to their inbox, enabling them to stay informed about their operational metrics. The reports will leverage existing data within the AutoWatch system and will be customizable based on the user’s preferences. By automating this process, shop owners save time and can focus on key business activities while having access to critical information at their fingertips.

Acceptance Criteria

Automated Reports are generated and received by the shop owner weekly without manual intervention.

Given the shop owner has selected the frequency for report generation as weekly, when the scheduled time arrives, then the system should automatically compile the relevant data and email the report to the shop owner's registered email address.

Shop owners can customize the content and format of the automated reports they receive.

Given the shop owner accesses the report customization settings, when they specify the metrics and layout preferences, then the system should save these preferences and reflect them in future automated reports.

The automated report includes accurate and timely data reflecting service demand trends and inventory usage for the specified period.

Given the system accesses the database for report generation, when the automated report is created, then it must include precise data representing service demand trends and inventory counts for the last week/month as selected by the shop owner.

Shop owners can opt out or pause their automated report subscriptions at any time.

Given the shop owner navigates to the report subscription settings, when they choose to opt out or pause the subscription, then the system should effectively stop sending automated reports to their email without affecting report generation for other users.

The system sends notification alerts before the first automated report is sent to ensure shop owners are aware of the upcoming reports.

Given the automated reporting feature is activated, when the system prepares to send the first report, then it should notify the shop owner via email one day prior to the delivery of the report.

In case of a data error during report generation, the system should notify the shop owner immediately.

Given there is a data retrieval error in the report generation process, when the system fails to compile the report, then it must send an error notification to the shop owner detailing the issue encountered.

Automated reports should be accessible from the AutoWatch dashboard for real-time monitoring.

Given the shop owner is logged into their AutoWatch account, when they navigate to the reports section, then they should see the most recent automated reports available for view or download directly from the dashboard.

Inventory Alerts

"As an auto shop owner, I want to receive alerts when my inventory levels drop below a set threshold so that I can reorder parts in a timely manner and avoid service delays."

Description

The Inventory Alerts requirement entails developing a notification system that informs shop owners when stock levels for frequently used parts fall below a specified threshold. The alerts will be generated based on data analytics from the Demand Trend Analysis feature, ensuring that purchases align with demand patterns. This feature will prevent stockouts and overstock situations, helping shop owners maintain an efficient inventory while minimizing costs. Integration with the existing AutoWatch platform will allow users to customize their alert parameters and channels (e.g., email, SMS) for convenience.

Acceptance Criteria

Shop owner receives an inventory alert when the stock level of a frequently used part falls below the defined threshold, prompting them to take action before running out of stock.

Given that the stock level of a part is below the threshold, when the alert system is active, then the shop owner should receive a notification via the selected channel (email/SMS) within 5 minutes of the threshold being breached.

A shop owner customizes the alert parameters for different parts, including setting individual thresholds and preferred notification channels.

Given that the shop owner accesses the alert settings, when they update the threshold and notification preferences for a specific part, then the system should save these settings and reflect them in the alert log.

Inventory alerts are generated and delivered to the shop owner's mobile device when stock levels are checked against historical data and trends.

Given that the shop owner has configured their alert preferences, when the Inventory Alerts system runs its daily check against the Demand Trend Analysis, then alerts for any parts needing attention should be sent to the shop owner's mobile device in real-time.

A shop owner views the historical alert log to assess past inventory notifications and related actions taken.

Given that the shop owner selects the alert log feature, when they navigate to the historical alerts section, then they should see a chronological list of all alerts, including timestamps, part names, and actions taken.

Multiple users at a shop can receive inventory alerts based on their roles and responsibilities within the management system.

Given that a shop has multiple users assigned different roles, when the inventory alert is triggered for a part, then all users with alert permissions should receive notifications according to their preferences set in the system.

The alert system integrates seamlessly with the existing AutoWatch platform without causing disruptions to other functionalities.

Given that the Inventory Alerts feature is implemented, when the system undergoes routine operation tests following the integration, then there should be no errors or performance degradation of the overall AutoWatch platform.

Shop owners can disable or enable inventory alerts at any time based on their operational needs.

Given that the shop owner accesses their user settings, when they choose to disable or enable inventory alerts, then the system should reflect this change immediately and stop or resume alert notifications accordingly.

Customer Demand Forecasting

"As an auto shop owner, I want to forecast future service demand based on historical data so that I can better prepare my inventory and staff to meet customer needs."

Description

The Customer Demand Forecasting requirement aims to utilize historical data to predict future service demand trends more accurately. By leveraging machine learning algorithms and data analytics, this feature will provide shop owners with insights into expected service demands over specific periods (e.g., months, seasons). This predictive capability will enhance inventory management strategies and workforce scheduling by equipping shop owners with proactive insights, leading to improved operational efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

As a shop owner, I want to access the Customer Demand Forecasting feature at the beginning of each month to review predicted service demands for the upcoming month based on historical data.

Given that the historical service data is available, when I open the Customer Demand Forecasting dashboard, then I should see accurate demand predictions displayed for the month and relevant visual trends.

As a shop owner, I want to compare predicted demand trend data with actual service demand at the end of the month to evaluate the accuracy of the forecasting system.

Given the predicted demand data and the actual service demand data for the month, when I run a comparison report, then the system should provide a percentage accuracy rating of the forecast against the actual demand.

As a shop owner, I want to receive automated notifications if the predicted service demand exceeds my current inventory levels to avoid stockouts.

Given the demand forecast indicates service demand will exceed inventory, when the threshold is met, then I should receive an automated email alert notifying me of the low inventory situation.

As a shop owner, I want to customize the forecasting parameters to include specific seasonal variables that are unique to my shop's location and customer patterns.

Given that I have seasonal variables to consider, when I access the forecasting settings and input the relevant parameters, then the system should save these changes and apply them to the next forecasting cycle.

As a shop owner, I want to view a historical comparison of my shop's demand forecasts against actual service demands over the past year to assess the effectiveness of the forecast.

Given that the system has historical forecasting and demand data, when I select the 'Annual Comparison' report, then I should see a detailed graphical representation of forecasts versus actual demands for each month over the past year.

User Customization Options

"As an auto shop owner, I want to customize the dashboard settings to focus on the metrics that matter most to my business so that I can quickly access the information I need for decision-making."

Description

The User Customization Options requirement allows shop owners to tailor the functionality and appearance of the Demand Trend Analysis feature according to their specific needs. Users will be able to select preferred metrics, customize dashboard layouts, and adjust report settings. This level of customization ensures that shop owners can focus on the most relevant data to their business, thereby improving usability and enhancing decision-making capability. This requirement facilitates a user-centric approach in the AutoWatch platform, catering to diverse operational styles among users.

Acceptance Criteria

Customization of Metrics Display

Given a user accesses the Demand Trend Analysis feature, when they select their preferred metrics from the customization options, then the dashboard should reflect the selected metrics accurately without any discrepancies.

Dashboard Layout Adjustment

Given a user wants to customize their dashboard layout, when they rearrange the dashboard components and save the changes, then the dashboard should retain the new layout upon the next login.

Report Setting Adjustments

Given a user adjusts the report settings for the Demand Trend Analysis, when the user generates a new report, then the report should reflect the user's specified settings such as date range and metrics included.

User-Specific Customizations

Given multiple users have access to the Demand Trend Analysis, when one user customizes their settings, then those customizations should only be visible to that user, ensuring individual preferences are maintained.

Real-Time Data Updates

Given a user is analyzing the Demand Trend Analysis dashboard, when new data for service demand becomes available, then the dashboard should refresh to display the latest data without requiring a manual refresh.

Error Handling for Customization Changes

Given a user attempts to customize the Demand Trend Analysis settings, when an error occurs due to a valid input, then an appropriate error message should be displayed guiding the user to correct the input.

Notifications for Customization Confirmation

Given a user successfully saves changes to their customization options, when they look for confirmation, then a notification should appear confirming that their customizations have been saved successfully.

Automated Reordering System

The Automated Reordering System streamlines the restocking process by automatically placing orders for parts when inventory levels drop below a specified threshold. This eliminates manual tracking and reduces the risk of stockouts, ensuring that shops maintain adequate supplies for ongoing repairs.

Requirements

Threshold Level Management

"As a shop owner, I want to set personalized threshold levels for each part in my inventory so that I can maintain optimal stock levels and avoid disruptions during repairs."

Description

The Threshold Level Management requirement enables auto repair shops to set minimum inventory levels for various parts, ensuring that the Automated Reordering System can accurately monitor stock. By allowing shop owners to customize these threshold levels for specific parts based on historical usage and projected demand, this feature ensures that the right amount of inventory is maintained without overstocking. This functionality optimizes the reordering process, enhances inventory visibility, minimizes costs associated with excess inventory, and ensures operational continuity by preventing stockouts during critical times.

Acceptance Criteria

Setting Threshold Levels for Inventory Parts

Given an authorized shop owner, when they access the inventory management system and input a minimum threshold level for a specific part, then the threshold level should be saved and reflected in the inventory settings.

System Alerts for Stock Levels

Given that the automated reordering system is configured, when the inventory level of a part drops below the set threshold, then the system should generate a notification alerting the shop owner to reorder.

Inventory Monitoring Dashboard

Given that the inventory system is in place, when the shop owner views the inventory monitoring dashboard, then the current stock levels and set threshold levels for all parts should be clearly displayed.

Customization of Threshold Levels

Given an authorized shop owner, when they wish to modify the threshold level of a part, then they should be able to adjust the value and save the new threshold without any errors.

Reporting Stock Levels

Given that the inventory system has been operational for a period, when the shop owner generates an inventory report, then the report should accurately reflect the current stock levels alongside the set threshold levels for all monitored parts.

System Functionality during Stockouts

Given that the shop owner has not set the threshold levels, when inventory reaches zero for a part, then the system should still alert the shop owner about the stockout situation even if threshold levels are not defined.

Integration with Supplier Systems

Given that the automated reordering system is in place, when the inventory levels trigger a reorder, then the system should automatically place an order with the predefined supplier without manual intervention.

Supplier Integration

"As a shop manager, I want to connect my reordering system to my suppliers so that I can automate orders and track deliveries directly."

Description

The Supplier Integration requirement focuses on establishing connections between the Automated Reordering System and various parts suppliers. This integration will allow for seamless order placement and tracking, enabling automated ordering directly from preferred suppliers without manual intervention. It will enhance the efficiency of the reordering process by allowing shop owners to choose suppliers based on pricing, delivery times, and reliability. This requirement ensures that parts can be ordered promptly, reducing lead times and improving overall inventory management.

Acceptance Criteria

Supplier Integration successfully connects the Automated Reordering System with at least three preferred parts suppliers allowing for streamlined order placements.

Given that the supplier API is correctly configured, when the inventory level drops below the threshold, then an order request should be automatically sent to the selected supplier.

Once the order is placed through the Automated Reordering System, the system should accurately reflect the new inventory status and provide an expected delivery date.

Given an order is placed, when the supplier confirms the order, then the inventory level must update in the system within 5 minutes, displaying the expected delivery date.

Shop owners should be able to select preferred suppliers based on unique criteria such as pricing, previous delivery times, and reliability metrics.

Given multiple suppliers are available, when the shop owner accesses the ordering interface, then they must see a sortable list of suppliers ranked by pricing and reliability, allowing selection based on their preferences.

The Automated Reordering System must notify shop owners of any issues with order placements, such as supplier unavailability or order cancellation.

Given an order fails to be placed, when the error is detected, then the system must generate an instant notification to the shop owner via email and within the application, detailing the reason for failure.

All order placements should maintain a log for accountability and reference, allowing shop owners to review past orders easily.

Given orders are placed, when the shop owner navigates to the order history section, then they must see a complete log of all orders, including status, supplier details, and timestamps.

Automated Notifications

"As an inventory manager, I want to receive alerts when stock levels are low so that I can take timely action to reorder parts and prevent stockouts."

Description

The Automated Notifications requirement involves creating an alert system that notifies shop owners and staff when inventory levels are nearing the specified threshold. These notifications will provide timely alerts through various channels such as email or in-app notifications, ensuring that all relevant personnel are aware of low-stock situations. This feature ensures proactive management of inventory and reinforces accountability among staff members and management, ultimately leading to better-informed decisions regarding restocking and prioritizing purchases.

Acceptance Criteria

Automated Notifications for Low Inventory Levels via Email Alerting

Given the inventory level of a specific part is below the threshold, When the system triggers an alert, Then an email notification is sent to the designated shop owner and staff email addresses.

In-App Notifications for Real-Time Low Inventory Alerts

Given the inventory level of a specific part is below the threshold, When the system identifies this situation, Then an in-app notification appears on the shop owner's dashboard.

Customization of Notification Threshold Levels

Given the shop owner wants to set a custom threshold for a specific part, When the owner updates the threshold in the system settings, Then the notifications should reflect the new threshold level.

Logging of Notification History for Inventory Management

Given the system has sent low inventory notifications, When the owner reviews the inventory management logs, Then all sent notifications should be documented with timestamps and recipients listed.

Response Tracking to Automated Notifications

Given the shop staff receives a low inventory notification, When they take action on the notification (restocking or reviewing), Then the system should track and log the action taken for accountability.

Verification of Notification Delivery and Read Status

Given a low inventory notification has been sent via email or in-app, When the shop owner checks the notification status, Then there should be a confirmation of whether the notification was delivered and read.

Integration with External Inventory Systems for Notifications

Given the shop uses an external inventory management system, When inventory levels are updated in that system, Then the automated notification system should reflect these changes and trigger alerts as necessary.

Reporting and Analytics Dashboard

"As a shop owner, I want to view analytics on my inventory usage so that I can make informed decisions about restocking and optimizing my inventory."

Description

The Reporting and Analytics Dashboard requirement will provide an overview of inventory performance, including metrics such as average turnover rates, historical stock levels, and reorder frequencies. By integrating this dashboard into the AutoWatch platform, shop owners can gain valuable insights into their inventory usage and ordering patterns. This requirement helps shops make data-driven decisions regarding their inventory management strategies, allow for forecasting of future needs, and optimize their purchasing processes.

Acceptance Criteria

Dashboard displays key inventory performance metrics for shop owners to review during weekly staff meetings.

Given the shop owner accesses the Reporting and Analytics Dashboard, when they view the inventory performance metrics, then they should see average turnover rates, historical stock levels, and reorder frequencies accurately displayed for the last six months.

Shop owner uses the dashboard to identify slow-moving parts in the inventory.

Given the shop owner utilizes the Reporting and Analytics Dashboard, when they filter for parts with low turnover rates, then the dashboard should display a list of parts that have not sold within the last 90 days.

Shop owner generates a report on reorder frequencies for the past quarter.

Given the shop owner requests a report from the Reporting and Analytics Dashboard, when they select the time period of the last quarter, then they should receive a downloadable report detailing the reorder frequencies for each part.

Shop owner compares historical stock levels for the past year to identify trends.

Given the shop owner accesses the Reporting and Analytics Dashboard, when they select the historical stock levels for the past year, then the data should be displayed in a clear graphical format highlighting trends and patterns in stock levels.

Dashboard provides alerts for parts that are frequently reordered.

Given the shop owner is using the Reporting and Analytics Dashboard, when they view the ordering patterns, then they should see alerts for any parts that are reordered more than three times in a month, indicating potential overstock or high demand.

Shop owner trains new staff on how to utilize the dashboard for inventory insights.

Given that the shop owner has new staff members, when they demonstrate the Reporting and Analytics Dashboard, then the staff should be able to retrieve and interpret inventory performance metrics independently after the training session.

User Role Permissions

"As an admin, I want to assign different roles to my staff so that I can control access to sensitive inventory management features and enhance accountability."

Description

The User Role Permissions requirement sets up different access levels and permissions for various users within the AutoWatch system relating to inventory management. This functionality ensures that only authorized personnel can alter inventory thresholds, view supplier contracts, or access sensitive analytics dashboard information. By controlling user permissions, this requirement adds a layer of security and accountability, reducing errors in inventory management and enhancing the integrity of the ordering process.

Acceptance Criteria

User Role Assignment for Inventory Management Validation

Given an admin user, when they attempt to assign roles to staff, then the permissions must reflect correctly in the system, allowing only designated users to alter inventory thresholds.

Permission Denial for Unauthorized Users

Given a user without the necessary permissions, when they try to access the analytics dashboard or modify inventory settings, then they must receive an access denied message and be prevented from making any changes.

Audit Logging of Inventory Permission Changes

Given a user makes changes to inventory permissions, when the changes are saved, then an entry must be created in the audit log detailing the user, action taken, and timestamp of the change.

Bulk Role Assignment for Efficiency

Given an admin user, when they select multiple staff members for bulk role assignment, then the system must correctly apply the selected permissions to all chosen users without errors.

Password Protection for Sensitive Operations

Given a user with permission to change inventory thresholds, when they attempt to save changes, then they must be prompted to enter their password for verification to enhance security.

Reviewing User Permissions in a Simple Interface

Given an admin user, when they navigate to the user permissions section, then they must be able to view a clear list of all users and their respective access rights in a user-friendly format.

Notification upon Permission Changes

Given a user’s permissions are changed, when the change is saved, then the user must receive a notification informing them of the new permissions assigned to their account.

Restock History Log

"As a shop owner, I want to review a history of all my restocking activities so that I can evaluate my inventory strategies and make necessary adjustments."

Description

The Restock History Log requirement will keep a detailed record of all automated reordering activities, including orders placed, quantities, and supplier details. This feature is essential for tracking inventory management efficiency and making audits simpler. The log allows shop owners to review past orders, identify patterns of usage, and anticipate future needs. By providing a complete history of restocking actions, this requirement helps shops ensure compliance, maintain accountability, and fine-tune their inventory strategies over time.

Acceptance Criteria

Restock History Log displays automated reordering information after inventory levels fall below thresholds.

Given the inventory level of a part falls below the predefined threshold, when an order is automatically placed, then the system should log the part details, ordered quantity, supplier name, and timestamp in the Restock History Log.

Shop owners can view the Restock History Log to analyze past reordering activities.

Given a shop owner navigates to the Restock History Log page, when they select a date range, then the log should display all orders made within that period including quantities, parts, and suppliers.

The system allows for filtering and searching through the Restock History Log for specific parts or suppliers.

Given a user is on the Restock History Log page, when they input a part name or supplier name into the search filter, then the log should return results matching the criteria promptly, showing relevant ordering history.

Restock History Log includes an export functionality for easy reporting.

Given the user has accessed the Restock History Log, when they select the export option, then the system should generate a downloadable report in CSV format containing all log entries.

Automated reordering system generates alerts if inventory levels are critically low and an order was not placed.

Given inventory levels fall below a critical threshold, when the automated reordering mechanism fails to place an order, then an alert should trigger notifying the shop owner of the issue via email and in-system notification.

The log retains historical data for audits and compliance checks.

Given the system has been in use for multiple months, when the shop owner requests access to the Restock History Log, then all historical data should be retrievable without loss, ensuring compliance and accountability.

Shop owners receive user feedback to improve automated reordering effectiveness.

Given the Restock History Log is being reviewed, when a shop owner identifies excessive reorders for certain parts, then they should be able to provide feedback directly within the app to adjust thresholds for those parts.

Customizable Inventory Profiles

Customizable Inventory Profiles allow shop owners to set individual inventory criteria based on vehicle types, customer preferences, and historical data. This personalized approach helps ensure that specific parts that are frequently required by their clientele are always on hand, thus enhancing customer satisfaction.

Requirements

Dynamic Inventory Notifications

"As an auto shop owner, I want to receive real-time inventory notifications so that I can ensure critical parts are always in stock and reduce customer wait times."

Description

Dynamic Inventory Notifications enable shop owners to receive real-time alerts regarding inventory levels for specific parts tailored to different vehicle types. This feature allows for automatic notifications when stock reaches a preset threshold, ensuring that critical components are always readily available. The benefit lies in reducing downtime due to parts unavailability, thus directly enhancing customer service and operational efficiency. In addition, this functionality integrates seamlessly with the existing inventory management system, enabling a streamlined process for order placements and tracking.

Acceptance Criteria

Shop owner receives a notification alert when the inventory level of a critical component falls below the predetermined threshold during their daily inventory check.

Given that the inventory for a critical component is set to a threshold of 5 units, When the stock level reaches 4 units, Then the system sends an automated notification to the shop owner's mobile app and email.

Shop owner customizes inventory thresholds based on specific vehicle types and receives notifications accordingly.

Given that the shop owner sets specific thresholds for inventory items based on vehicle types, When the stock level of the customized item drops to the set threshold, Then the system should trigger real-time notifications specific to that vehicle type.

Shop owner reviews and modifies existing inventory thresholds for improved inventory management practices.

Given that the shop owner accesses the inventory management interface, When they change the threshold level of a specific part, Then the system updates the threshold and confirms the change through a notification to the shop owner.

System integration functions through seamless notification of low stock parts within the existing inventory management system.

Given that the inventory management system is integrated with the notification system, When a critical component stock level falls below the threshold, Then the system automatically places an order for the part and alerts the shop owner of the action taken.

Shop owner analyzes inventory trends through received notifications to make purchasing decisions.

Given that the shop owner receives notifications for low stock levels, When the shop owner reviews the notification history, Then it should display trends and statistics related to stock levels of critical components over the last month.

Customer feedback regarding stock availability is gathered to assess the effectiveness of inventory notifications.

Given that dynamic inventory notifications are implemented, When customers are surveyed about parts availability, Then at least 80% should report satisfaction with stock availability for their regularly needed components.

Performance testing of the dynamic inventory notifications feature during peak hours to ensure reliability.

Given that the shop operates during peak hours, When the inventory levels fall below thresholds for multiple components simultaneously, Then the system should successfully send notifications without lag or failure for at least 95% of notifications triggered.

Customer Preference Profiles

"As a shop manager, I want to maintain customer preference profiles so that I can provide tailored recommendations and improve customer satisfaction."

Description

Customer Preference Profiles allow the auto repair shop to record and manage customer preferences for specific parts and services. This capability enables shop owners to create tailored profiles for repeat customers, making it easier to anticipate their needs and improve service delivery accuracy. By leveraging historical transaction data and customer feedback, this feature enhances personalization in customer interactions, fostering loyalty and repeat business. Integrating this feature with the scheduling and service management systems will provide a holistic view of customer relationships and needs.

Acceptance Criteria

Shop owner needs to create a new Customer Preference Profile for a returning customer who frequently requests specific parts to ensure quick service during their next visit.

Given that the shop owner has accessed the Customer Preference Profiles section, When they input the customer's historical preferences and save the profile, Then the profile should be created successfully and accessible for future service requests.

A customer calls the shop to inquire which parts are recommended based on their previous preferences, and the shop owner needs to retrieve this information quickly.

Given that the customer’s profile is stored in the system, When the shop owner searches for the customer's profile, Then the system should display all preferences and recommend parts in less than 5 seconds.

A shop owner wants to update a Customer Preference Profile to reflect a new part that the customer recently mentioned.

Given that the shop owner is viewing the customer's existing preference profile, When they add the new part and save the updates, Then the profile should reflect the new addition with an updated timestamp and be retrievable immediately.

After a successful service, the shop owner wants to collect feedback from the customer related to their preferences for future services.

Given that the service has been completed, When the shop owner sends a feedback request to the customer via the platform, Then the customer should receive the request within 1 minute and be able to respond easily.

The shop owner needs to analyze customer preference data for trend identification to forecast inventory needs.

Given that the shop owner is in the analytics section, When they request a report on customer preferences for the last quarter, Then the report should generate accurately with visual insights within 10 seconds.

A new mechanic joins the shop and needs to understand customer preferences to provide adequate service.

Given that the mechanic is accessing the customer profiles for the first time, When they view the profile for a specific customer, Then they should be able to see all recorded preferences clearly organized by part and service category.

A shop owner wants to delete a Customer Preference Profile for a customer who no longer visits the shop.

Given that the shop owner is in the customer profiles section, When they select the customer profile and confirm deletion, Then the profile should no longer be retrievable in the system and confirmation of deletion should be provided.

Vehicle Type Classification

"As an inventory manager, I want to classify parts by vehicle type so that I can optimize inventory levels according to customer demand."

Description

Vehicle Type Classification allows the auto shop to categorize inventory based on different vehicle models and types, enabling precise tracking of part usage patterns. This requirement facilitates trends analysis and assists in optimizing stock levels for various vehicle types prevalent among the clientele. With the classification in place, auto shops can make informed purchasing decisions, ensuring that they stock the most requested parts. This functionality integrates with existing analytics tools for deeper insights into purchasing trends and inventory demand management.

Acceptance Criteria

Vehicle Type Inventory Update Scenario

Given an auto shop owner has categorized inventory by vehicle type, when they attempt to add a new part, then the system should prompt them to select a vehicle type for the new part, ensuring it is categorized correctly.

Part Usage Analysis Scenario

Given that vehicle types are classified in the inventory, when the auto shop owner reviews part usage over the last three months, then they should see a report displaying the usage of parts categorized by each vehicle type.

Stock Level Optimization Scenario

Given that inventory is classified by vehicle type, when the shop owner accesses the stock level report, then they should see suggestions for optimizing stock levels based on part usage patterns for each vehicle type.

Customer Preference Profile Integration Scenario

Given that vehicle types are classified in the inventory, when a customer profile is created, then the system should allow the shop owner to associate specific vehicle types with that customer to tailor inventory recommendations.

Historical Data Analysis Scenario

Given that vehicle type classification is established, when the shop owner accesses the historical data analytics dashboard, then they should be able to filter inventory data by vehicle type over specified timeframes for better decision-making.

Automated Reordering Scenario

Given that the inventory is organized by vehicle types, when an inventory level falls below a pre-set threshold for any vehicle type, then the system should automatically trigger a reorder alert for the shop owner.

User Permission Settings Scenario

Given that vehicle types are classified in the inventory, when the shop owner manages user permissions, then they should be able to restrict or grant access to inventory management features based on user roles within the shop.

Historical Data Analysis Tools

"As a business owner, I want to analyze historical data trends so that I can make more informed purchasing decisions and improve service efficiency."

Description

Historical Data Analysis Tools will provide shop owners with insights into past inventory usage trends and customer behavior patterns. This feature enables the analysis of data over specified periods, helping to identify peak demand times for particular parts or services. By integrating visualization tools within the dashboard, shop owners will be able to view trends graphically, making it easier to generate actionable insights for inventory purchase strategies and service optimizations, thus enhancing decision-making processes and overall efficiency.

Acceptance Criteria

Historical Data Analysis for Inventory Optimization

Given a shop owner accesses the Historical Data Analysis Tools, when they input a specific date range for unused parts, then the system should display a list of parts that have not been utilized during that period with quantifiable metrics.

Visualization of Inventory Usage Trends

Given a shop owner utilizes the dashboard feature, when they select a specific part, then the system should generate a graphical representation of inventory usage trends over the last 12 months.

Identification of Peak Demand Times

Given a shop owner runs an analysis on historical data, when analyzing the highest demand for specific parts, then the system should provide peak times with accurate percentages for each part over the past year.

Integration of Customer Behavior Patterns

Given a shop owner views customer reports, when looking at parts ordered by customers, then the system should display a summary of customer behavior trends and preferences indicating parts purchased most frequently.

Actionable Insights Generation for Inventory Management

Given a shop owner examines the analysis tool, when they review insights, then the system should offer at least three actionable strategies for improving inventory management based on historical data.

Exporting Historical Data Reports

Given a shop owner analyzes historical trends, when they choose to export the data, then the system should allow the user to download the report in CSV format with all relevant data accurately represented.

Automated Ordering System

"As an auto shop owner, I want an automated ordering system so that I can efficiently manage my inventory levels without manual intervention."

Description

The Automated Ordering System simplifies the reordering process by enabling automatic purchase orders to be generated when inventory reaches a designated low point based on historical data and customer demand. This feature results in a significant reduction in manual efforts required for restocking and minimizes the risk of running out of critical parts. The integration with suppliers' systems will ensure real-time order placements, further enhancing the efficiency in inventory management and operations.

Acceptance Criteria

Supplier integration for automated ordering in a typical shop environment when inventory is low.

Given that the inventory level of a part falls below the predefined threshold, When the system triggers an automated reorder, Then a purchase order should be sent to the relevant supplier without manual intervention.

Testing the system's response to various parts reaching low inventory thresholds.

Given a part's inventory is depleted, When the automated ordering system is active, Then a notification should be generated indicating a reorder has been placed within 5 minutes.

Validating the historical data analysis used for determining low stock thresholds in a real-world scenario.

Given historical data from the past 6 months, When the inventory profiles are analyzed, Then the system should accurately predict reorder points for at least 80% of the high-demand parts based on customer preferences.

Ensuring supplier connectivity for seamless reorder processing.

Given the system is connected to supplier APIs, When a purchase order is initiated, Then the system should receive a confirmation response from the supplier within 2 minutes.

Assessing accuracy in automated parts ordering for multiple vehicle types.

Given there are multiple vehicle types registered in the system, When the inventory for parts specific to a vehicle type falls below the threshold, Then the automated ordering system must correctly generate orders specific to each vehicle type and their respective parts.

Determining the impact of automated ordering on overall inventory management efficiency.

Given a 3-month period post-implementation, When inventory levels and reorder efficiency are analyzed, Then there should be a minimum of 30% decrease in manual ordering efforts and out-of-stock incidents.

Supplier Performance Metrics

Supplier Performance Metrics track and evaluate the reliability and delivery times of parts suppliers. By assessing this data, shop owners can optimize their vendor relationships and choose the most dependable sources, ultimately enhancing inventory management and reducing delays.

Requirements

Supplier Reliability Tracking

"As a shop owner, I want to track supplier reliability metrics so that I can evaluate my suppliers' performance and ensure timely delivery of quality parts, improving my overall service efficiency."

Description

The Supplier Reliability Tracking requirement involves implementing a system that continuously monitors supplier performance in real-time. This system will track metrics such as on-time delivery rates, quality of parts delivered, and turnaround times for orders. By aggregating this data, shop owners can evaluate suppliers objectively, helping them make informed decisions regarding vendor selection and management. This feature will ultimately lead to improved supplier relationships, enhanced inventory management, and reduced delays in service delivery, contributing to the overall efficiency of the auto repair shop operations.

Acceptance Criteria

Supplier Performance Metrics are utilized by shop managers during weekly inventory reviews to assess supplier reliability and make informed vendor selections.

Given that the shop manager accesses the Supplier Performance Metrics dashboard, when they select a specific supplier, then the dashboard must display the supplier's on-time delivery rate, quality of parts, and average turnaround time for the last three months.

The system generates weekly reports on supplier reliability metrics that are shared with the shop owner for strategic decision-making.

Given that the automated reporting system runs every Monday, when the report is generated, then it should include all supplier performance data and be emailed to the shop owner without error.

New supplier data is entered into the Supplier Performance Metrics system by shop staff during supplier onboarding.

Given that shop staff adds a new supplier to the system, when they input the required details and save the entry, then the system must successfully store the supplier information and display it in the supplier list with a default performance rating of 'Not Yet Rated.'

Shop managers analyze supplier performance metrics during the evaluation phase of vendor selection to improve overall service delivery.

Given that the shop manager is evaluating two suppliers, when they access the Supplier Performance Metrics, then they should be able to compare key performance metrics side by side for both suppliers, including on-time delivery rates and average lead times.

Informed decisions are made based on historical supplier performance trends tracked in the system.

Given that the historical performance data for a specific supplier is accessed, when the shop manager reviews the trends over the last 12 months, then they should see a visual representation (graph or chart) of the changes in performance metrics over that period.

System alerts notify shop managers of underperforming suppliers based on pre-defined thresholds.

Given that a supplier's on-time delivery rate falls below 80%, when that change occurs, then an alert notification must be triggered and sent to the shop manager via in-app notification and email.

Automated Supplier Scorecard

"As a shop owner, I want an automated supplier scorecard so that I can easily visualize and compare supplier performance over time, allowing me to make better-informed purchasing decisions."

Description

The Automated Supplier Scorecard requirement aims to develop a systematic evaluation tool that generates real-time scorecards for each supplier based on their performance metrics. This tool will automatically calculate scores using predefined criteria such as delivery times, quality ratings, and service responsiveness. Shop owners will be able to visualize supplier performance trends over time, facilitating data-driven decision-making on supplier selection and renegotiation of contracts. This feature not only simplifies supplier management but also enhances accountability and fosters stronger partnerships with preferred suppliers.

Acceptance Criteria

Supplier scorecards will be generated automatically at the end of each month based on supplier performance data for the prior month.

Given that the system has logged supplier performance data for the past month, when the end of the month is reached, then the system should generate and display scorecards for each supplier with calculated scores based on delivery times, quality ratings, and service responsiveness.

Shop owners want to visualize trends in supplier performance over time for better decision-making.

Given that scorecards have been generated for at least three consecutive months, when the shop owner accesses the supplier performance dashboard, then the system should provide visual graphs showing trend lines for each supplier's scores over these months.

The system needs to notify shop owners of any suppliers that drop below a certain performance threshold.

Given that the predefined performance threshold score is set, when a supplier's average score for any metric falls below this threshold after the scorecard generation, then the system should automatically send a notification alert to the shop owner regarding the performance issue.

Shop owners need to customize which performance metrics are included in the scorecard calculations.

Given that the shop owner is in the settings menu, when they select which performance metrics to include or exclude from the automated scorecards, then the updated selections should be saved successfully and reflected in the next scorecard generation.

AutoWatch requires an intuitive interface for shop owners to access supplier performance metrics easily.

Given that the shop owner logs into the AutoWatch platform, when they navigate to the supplier management section, then the system should present a user-friendly interface that allows easy access to scorecards, trend graphs, and performance settings without requiring extensive training.

Shop owners need to generate ad-hoc reports on supplier performance for specific time periods.

Given that the shop owner selects a custom time range in the reporting tool, when the request is submitted, then the system should generate a detailed scorecard report for all suppliers within that specified time frame, including all relevant performance metrics.

Suppliers should have a portal to view their own performance metrics and feedback.

Given that a supplier logs into their dedicated portal, when they access their scorecard, then the system should display their specific performance metrics, trends over time, and any feedback provided by the shop owner to ensure transparency and foster improvement.

Supplier Alerts and Notifications

"As a shop owner, I want to receive alerts about supplier issues so that I can respond quickly to potential problems, ensuring that my repair shop runs smoothly without delays."

Description

The Supplier Alerts and Notifications feature will set up an alert system to notify shop owners about critical supplier-related events such as shipment delays, quality issues, or changes in pricing. Notifications can be customized based on urgency and type of alert, enabling proactive communication with suppliers and timely action to address issues. This feature will minimize the impact of supplier-related challenges on business operations by ensuring that shop owners are always informed and can make necessary adjustments swiftly, thus preventing service interruptions and customer dissatisfaction.

Acceptance Criteria

Notification for Supplier Shipment Delay

Given a supplier is delayed in shipping parts, When the delay occurs, Then the shop owner receives an immediate email notification detailing the shipment status and expected delay timeframe.

Quality Issue Alerts

Given a quality issue is reported by a shop owner regarding received parts, When the issue is acknowledged, Then the system sends a customizable alert to the supplier and generates a notification for the shop owner.

Pricing Change Notification

Given a supplier has updated their pricing, When the pricing change is implemented, Then the shop owner receives a notification summarizing the changes and potential impact on inventory costs.

Customizable Alert Settings

Given the shop owner accesses the alert settings, When they customize the urgency and types of alerts, Then the system updates the notification preferences successfully without errors.

Integration with Inventory Management

Given a supplier delay affects inventory, When the alert is triggered, Then the system automatically updates inventory status and notifies relevant staff of the potential impact on service delivery.

Historical Notification Log

Given the shop owner wants to review past alerts, When they access the notification log, Then all past alerts are displayed with details such as date, time, and type of alert.

Inventory Utilization Dashboard

The Inventory Utilization Dashboard provides real-time insights into the turnover rates and usage patterns of inventory items. By visualizing this data, shops can identify underused assets and make strategic decisions on inventory adjustments, reducing costs and increasing efficiency.

Requirements

Real-Time Inventory Monitoring

"As an auto repair shop owner, I want to monitor my inventory in real-time so that I can quickly identify when to reorder supplies and avoid running out of essential items."

Description

The Real-Time Inventory Monitoring requirement enables auto repair shop managers to view live updates of their inventory status, including stock levels, turnover rates, and order alerts. This requirement is crucial as it provides shop owners with immediate insights into their inventory usage, helping them reduce excess stock, avoid shortages, and streamline ordering processes. Integrating with the existing inventory tracking system within AutoWatch, this feature enhances the overall efficiency of inventory management, contributes to cost reductions, and ultimately leads to improved customer service through better product availability.

Acceptance Criteria

Auto Repair Shop Manager views the live inventory status to assess stock levels during a busy service period.

Given the shop manager is logged into the AutoWatch platform, when they navigate to the Real-Time Inventory Monitoring section, then they should see up-to-date stock levels and turnover rates for all inventory items.

Shop owner receives an alert for low stock levels of critical parts during inventory review.

Given the inventory threshold settings are configured, when stock levels fall below the defined threshold, then the shop owner shall receive an automated notification via email and in-app alert.

Manager analyzes usage patterns of specific inventory items to make informed ordering decisions after reviewing turnover rates.

Given the inventory utilization dashboard is available, when the manager selects a specific item, then they should see visual representations of turnover rates and historical usage trends for that item.

Auto repair shop prepares an end-of-month report using real-time data to analyze inventory efficiency and identify underused assets.

Given the real-time inventory data is accessible, when the shop manager generates the end-of-month report, then the report should accurately reflect current stock levels, turnover rates, and highlight any underutilized inventory items.

Shop manager needs to reorder parts based on real-time inventory insights before running out of stock.

Given the real-time inventory monitoring feature is active, when the stock level of any item approaches zero, then reorder suggestions should automatically be displayed to the manager for review and action.

Admin reviews real-time inventory logs to ensure the accuracy of stock records against physical counts during audits.

Given the system logs inventory transactions in real time, when an audit is performed, then discrepancies between system records and physical counts should be flagged for investigation.

Usage Patterns Analysis

"As an inventory manager, I want to analyze usage patterns of my inventory items so that I can make better purchasing decisions and eliminate underperforming products."

Description

The Usage Patterns Analysis requirement allows auto repair shops to analyze and visualize their inventory usage trends over specific time periods. This feature is essential for identifying which items are frequently used and which are underperforming. By providing actionable insights through graphical representations such as charts and graphs, shop owners can make informed decisions regarding purchasing, promotions, and discontinuing poor-selling items. This capability integrates smoothly with the Inventory Utilization Dashboard, enhancing the strategic capabilities of shop owners to optimize inventory levels.

Acceptance Criteria

Usage Patterns Analysis enables the shop owner to review inventory usage trends over various timeframes to identify frequently used and underperforming items.

Given the shop owner accesses the Usage Patterns Analysis feature, when they select a specific time period, then the dashboard should display a graphical representation of inventory usage trends for that period.

The shop owner wants to receive actionable insights into inventory utilization to inform purchasing decisions.

Given the Usage Patterns Analysis is integrated with the Inventory Utilization Dashboard, when the shop owner views underperforming inventory, then the dashboard should provide recommendations for potential action (e.g., discontinue, promote, restock).

The shop owner needs to analyze monthly trends to determine seasonal inventory needs for their shop.

Given the owner selects a monthly time frame on the Usage Patterns Analysis, when the data is processed, then the analysis should reflect usage patterns with clear visibility on peak and low seasons for relevant inventory items.

The shop owner aims to boost efficiency by identifying excess stock that requires management.

Given the shop owner reviews the usage patterns, when they filter by inventory turnover rates, then the dashboard must display a list of items that have not been used within a defined period, highlighting potential overstock issues.

The shop owner seeks to visualize inventory usage to enhance operational decisions.

Given that the shop owner integrates the Usage Patterns Analysis with the Inventory Utilization Dashboard, when they request a specific item's usage trend, then the dashboard should display an interactive graph showcasing that item's usage over layers of selected timeframes.

The shop owner intends to understand customer demand for specific parts to improve response times.

Given the Usage Patterns Analysis is utilized, when the shop owner analyzes the data, then it should clearly show the frequency of part requests by customers over time, enabling informed stock ordering decisions.

The shop owner needs a summary report of inventory trends for discussion in monthly team meetings.

Given the shop owner accesses the Usage Patterns Analysis at the end of a month, when they generate a report, then the report should include key metrics such as total usage, underused items, and recommendations based on the analysis.

Automated Inventory Alerts

"As a shop manager, I want to receive automated alerts when inventory items reach low stock levels so that I can ensure we have the necessary supplies at all times without manual checking."

Description

The Automated Inventory Alerts requirement enables auto repair shops to receive immediate notifications regarding critical inventory thresholds. When stock levels of specific items fall below pre-defined limits, the system will automatically notify the relevant personnel via email or mobile notifications. This feature directly supports efficient inventory management by minimizing the risk of stockouts and allows for timely replenishment. Integration with communication tools enhances the management process, ensuring that users are always informed of their inventory status in a timely manner.

Acceptance Criteria

User receives an automated notification when the stock level of oil filters drops below the defined threshold of 10 units.

Given the oil filter inventory has dropped below 10 units, when the threshold is reached, then the system sends an email notification to the store manager and a mobile notification to the inventory supervisor.

Inventory manager updates the threshold for battery stock to 5 units and confirms the change.

Given the inventory manager updates the battery threshold to 5 units, when the user saves the changes, then the system should confirm the update with a success message and reflect the new threshold on the dashboard.

A shop experiences a stockout of brake pads, and the automated alert system must trigger a notification to the purchasing department.

Given that the stock of brake pads is completely depleted, when the stock level reaches 0, then the system triggers an immediate notification to the purchasing department via email and mobile push notification.

User wants to adjust multiple inventory thresholds simultaneously through the dashboard interface.

Given the user selects multiple inventory items to adjust their thresholds from the dashboard, when the user sets new thresholds and submits, then the system should successfully update all selected items and notify the user of the completion status.

An administrator wants to review past automated alerts to check inventory history and adjustments.

Given the administrator accesses the historical alerts section, when they filter alerts by date range, then the system should display all past notifications related to inventory thresholds within the selected date range.

A user wishes to receive notifications through a third-party communication tool like Slack for inventory alerts.

Given the user has linked their Slack account in the settings, when the inventory stock level drops below the threshold, then the system sends an alert to the user's designated Slack channel in addition to the email notification.

A system admin wants to configure and test the automated alert feature before deployment.

Given the system admin has set up a test environment and predefined inventory thresholds, when the thresholds are met in the testing phase, then the system should accurately trigger the notifications as specified without any delays.

Inventory Performance Metrics

"As a financial analyst, I want to view detailed inventory performance metrics so that I can evaluate the effectiveness of our inventory management practices and identify areas for improvement."

Description

The Inventory Performance Metrics requirement provides detailed reports on key performance indicators (KPIs) related to inventory management, such as inventory turnover ratios, total inventory value, and carrying costs. This functionality aids auto repair shop owners in understanding the financial health of their inventory. By generating periodic reports, users can track trends over time and align their inventory investments with overall business goals. This requirement enhances the analytical capabilities of AutoWatch, allowing shop owners to drive profitability through data-driven insights.

Acceptance Criteria

Viewing Inventory Performance Metrics Report for Inventory Analysis

Given the user is logged into AutoWatch and navigates to the Inventory Utilization Dashboard, When the user selects the 'Performance Metrics' report for a specific time period, Then the system displays a comprehensive report including inventory turnover ratios, total inventory value, and carrying costs.

Generating Periodic Inventory Reports

Given the user has access to the Inventory Performance Metrics, When they set the report to generate automatically on a monthly basis, Then the system successfully schedules the report generation and sends a notification to the user upon completion.

Identifying Underutilized Inventory Items

Given the user has access to the Inventory Utilization Dashboard, When they view the inventory turnover rates, Then the dashboard highlights any items with a turnover rate below a predefined threshold, allowing the user to identify underutilized inventory.

Accessing Customizable Inventory Metrics

Given the user has permission to customize reports, When they select specific KPIs to include in their inventory performance report, Then the system generates a report that reflects only the selected metrics, providing tailored insights into inventory performance.

Comparing Inventory Performance Over Time

Given the user is viewing the Inventory Performance Metrics, When they select two different time periods for comparison, Then the system displays a side-by-side comparison of key performance indicators to analyze trends in inventory performance.

Exporting Inventory Performance Reports

Given the user has generated an Inventory Performance Metrics report, When they choose to export the report in PDF format, Then the system successfully generates a PDF file that accurately reflects the displayed report data for offline use.

Customizable Dashboard Views

"As a shop owner, I want to customize my inventory dashboard so that I can focus on the metrics that are most important to my business and improve my decision-making process."

Description

The Customizable Dashboard Views requirement allows users to personalize their Inventory Utilization Dashboard based on their preferences and operational needs. Users can choose which metrics to display, adjust layouts, and set default views that reflect their most critical inventory data points. This feature enhances user engagement by providing tailored insights that are relevant to individual user roles, from shop owners to inventory managers. Moreover, it supports improved decision-making by ensuring that users have quick access to the information that matters most to them.

Acceptance Criteria

User sets up their personalized dashboard view for the first time.

Given the user accesses the Inventory Utilization Dashboard, when they choose metrics to display and arrange them according to their preference, then their selections should be saved and reflected in the dashboard the next time they log in.

User adjusts layout of their dashboard during a busy workday.

Given the user is viewing their dashboard, when they drag and drop metrics to rearrange them, then the dashboard should update dynamically to reflect the new layout without requiring a refresh.

Inventory manager reviews dashboard after the default view has been set.

Given the user has set a default view, when they log in to the dashboard, then the default view should automatically load displaying the selected metrics and layout.

User filters dashboard metrics based on time periods.

Given the user accesses the dashboard, when they apply a time filter to the metrics displayed, then only the metrics corresponding to the selected time period should be shown without affecting other views.

Shop owner shares their customized dashboard with an inventory manager.

Given that a user has customized their dashboard, when they select the share option and choose a recipient, then the recipient should receive access to the identical dashboard layout and metrics as configured by the user.

User receives visual feedback on changes made to dashboard views.

Given the user makes alterations to their dashboard, when the changes are made, then visual indicators should confirm that the changes have been successfully applied, such as a notification or an update marker.

User resets their dashboard to the default settings.

Given the user is viewing their customized dashboard, when they select the reset option, then their dashboard should revert to the factory default settings and metrics, removing all previous customizations.

Forecast Accuracy Report

The Forecast Accuracy Report evaluates the precision of inventory predictions made by the Intelligent Inventory Forecasting feature. This report highlights areas for improvement and continuously refines the forecasting algorithm, ensuring that inventory decisions are based on reliable and actionable data.

Requirements

Data Input Validation

"As an inventory manager, I want the system to validate data inputs, so that I can ensure that the information used for forecasting is accurate and reliable."

Description

This requirement ensures that all data entered into the Forecast Accuracy Report is validated against predefined criteria to enhance data quality. It will prevent inaccurate data entry and ensure that the metrics used in generating the report reflect the true state of inventory forecasting. By implementing robust validation rules, the platform will maintain high-quality data integrity, reduce errors, and increase the reliability of the forecasting algorithm. This will ultimately lead to more accurate inventory decisions based on actionable insights.

Acceptance Criteria

Data Entry Validation for Inventory Inputs

Given that a user enters inventory data into the Forecast Accuracy Report, when the user submits the data, then the system validates the data against predefined rules for format, range, and completeness, ensuring that only accurate data is accepted.

Error Handling for Invalid Data Inputs

Given that a user submits invalid data in the Forecast Accuracy Report, when the system detects the invalid input, then an error message is displayed to the user detailing the specific validation issue and prompting correction.

Performance Benchmarking of Validation Rules

Given that the validation rules are implemented in the system, when the system processes a batch of inventory data submissions, then the average processing time for data validation must not exceed 2 seconds per input.

Integration of Validation Rules with Reporting Features

Given that the validation rules are executed during data entry, when generating the Forecast Accuracy Report, then only validated and approved data must appear in the report outputs, and unvalidated entries must be excluded completely.

User Access Permissions for Data Entry

Given that a user is logged into the AutoWatch platform, when they attempt to enter data into the Forecast Accuracy Report, then the system checks and enforces user permissions, allowing only authorized users to input and modify data.

Reporting on Data Validation Performance

Given that the data entry validation has been in operation for one month, when generating a report on validation outcomes, then the report must include metrics such as the number of validations performed, error rates, and types of validation failures encountered.

User Training for Data Input Best Practices

Given that new validation features have been implemented, when training sessions are held for users, then training materials must cover the importance of providing accurate data inputs and demonstrate how the validation process works.

Automated Report Generation

"As a shop owner, I want to receive automated Forecast Accuracy Reports, so that I can focus on improving inventory strategies without spending time generating reports manually."

Description

This requirement allows for the automated generation of the Forecast Accuracy Report on a set schedule, reducing manual work and ensuring that stakeholders always have access to the latest data. The system will pull data from the Intelligent Inventory Forecasting feature and create reports at predefined intervals (e.g., weekly, monthly). This automation not only saves time but also ensures consistency in reporting, allowing managers to focus on analysis and strategy rather than data compilation.

Acceptance Criteria

Automated report generation on a weekly schedule for assessing inventory forecast accuracy.

Given the system is set to generate the Forecast Accuracy Report weekly, when the scheduled time arrives, then the report should be automatically generated without manual intervention.

Ensuring data accuracy in the Forecast Accuracy Report after an automated generation on a monthly basis.

Given the report is generated monthly, when the report is reviewed, then it should reflect accurate data pulled from the Intelligent Inventory Forecasting feature with no discrepancies exceeding 5%.

User notification of report availability following automated generation.

Given the report is generated successfully, when the report is ready, then all designated stakeholders should receive an automated email notification with access information to the report within 1 hour.

Automated report generation during system downtime without failures.

Given the system is scheduled to generate the report, when the system goes down, then the report generation should queue and execute automatically once the system is back online.

Customization of report intervals based on user preferences.

Given a user has selected a custom schedule for report generation, when they save their preferences, then the system should accommodate the new schedule and report generation should occur as per the user's selection.

Accessibility of generated reports on the AutoWatch platform for stakeholders.

Given a report has been generated, when stakeholders log into AutoWatch, then they should find the report available in the designated report section within 24 hours of generation.

Evaluation of the report generation process for performance metrics.

Given multiple reports are being generated, when analyzing system performance, then the report generation process should not exceed a duration of 10 minutes per report without degrading system performance.

User-Friendly Dashboard View

"As a business analyst, I want a visual dashboard for Forecast Accuracy metrics, so that I can quickly interpret data and identify areas for improvement at a glance."

Description

This requirement involves incorporating a user-friendly dashboard that visually displays key metrics from the Forecast Accuracy Report, allowing users to quickly assess performance at a glance. The dashboard will include graphical representations like graphs and charts to highlight trends and performance indicators, making the information more accessible and understandable. This enhancement will aid in quick decision-making by providing immediate visual insights into forecast accuracy trends.

Acceptance Criteria

User accesses the dashboard to view the Forecast Accuracy Report after logging into AutoWatch.

Given the user is logged into AutoWatch, when they navigate to the dashboard, then the dashboard should display graphical representations of the key metrics from the Forecast Accuracy Report.

User interacts with the dashboard to filter the forecast accuracy metrics by date range.

Given the user is on the dashboard, when they select a date range filter, then the dashboard should refresh to display metrics only within the selected date range.

User wants to understand the trends presented in the Forecast Accuracy Report via the dashboard.

Given the user is on the dashboard, when they view the graphs and charts, then they should clearly indicate trends over time, with labels that are easily readable and interpretative.

User accesses the dashboard from a mobile device to review the Forecast Accuracy Report.

Given the user is accessing the dashboard from a mobile device, when the page loads, then the dashboard should be responsive and all graphical elements should be resized accordingly for optimal viewing.

User reviews a specific metric from the Forecast Accuracy Report on the dashboard.

Given the user is on the dashboard, when they hover over a specific data point in a graph, then a tooltip should appear providing detailed information about that metric.

User seeks to download the Forecast Accuracy Report data from the dashboard.

Given the user is on the dashboard, when they click on the download button, then the system should generate a report in a CSV format for the user to download.

Notification System for Report Updates

"As a shop manager, I want to receive notifications for new Forecast Accuracy Reports, so that I can stay informed about inventory forecasting and make timely decisions."

Description

This requirement sets up a notification system that alerts relevant users whenever a new Forecast Accuracy Report is available or when significant changes are detected in inventory forecasting accuracy. This real-time notification feature will help ensure that stakeholders are always informed about important updates, enabling them to respond proactively to inventory issues. Users can customize their notification preferences, ensuring they receive updates in their preferred manner (e.g., email, in-app notifications).

Acceptance Criteria

User Subscription to Notification Types

Given a user is logged into the AutoWatch platform, When they navigate to the notifications settings page and select their preferred notification types (email, in-app), Then their preferences should be saved and confirmed with an acknowledgment message.

Receiving Notifications for New Reports

Given a user has subscribed to receive notifications via email, When a new Forecast Accuracy Report is generated and published, Then the user should receive an email containing the report summary within 5 minutes of its release.

Alert on Significant Accuracy Changes

Given a user is subscribed to real-time notifications, When the inventory forecasting accuracy changes beyond a defined threshold, Then the user should receive an in-app notification detailing the change immediately.

Notification Preferences Modification

Given a user has previously set their notification preferences, When they navigate to the notification settings and alter their preferences, Then their updated preferences should be saved, and a confirmation notification should appear.

Test Notification Delivery Speed

Given a new Forecast Accuracy Report has been generated, When the system sends out notification emails to all subscribed users, Then the delivery time for the emails should not exceed 10 minutes for all users.

User Unsubscribing from Notifications

Given a user is currently subscribed to notifications, When they opt to unsubscribe via the notification settings page, Then they should receive a confirmation that they have successfully unsubscribed from all future notifications.

User Feedback Integration

"As a regular user of the reporting feature, I want to provide feedback on the Forecast Accuracy Report, so that my suggestions can help improve its usefulness and accuracy over time."

Description

This requirement focuses on integrating a feedback mechanism that allows users to provide input on the effectiveness and utility of the Forecast Accuracy Report. Users can submit their thoughts and suggestions, which will be reviewed to enhance the forecasting system continually. Integrating user feedback will ensure the feature evolves according to user needs and expectations, improving overall satisfaction and effectiveness.

Acceptance Criteria

User submits feedback through the integrated feedback mechanism after reviewing the Forecast Accuracy Report.

Given a logged-in user reviews the Forecast Accuracy Report, when they fill out and submit the feedback form, then their feedback is successfully recorded in the system.

Admin receives an aggregated summary of user feedback on the Forecast Accuracy Report.

Given multiple users have submitted feedback, when the admin accesses the feedback dashboard, then the dashboard shows an up-to-date aggregated summary of all feedback.

User requests to provide feedback on the usability of the feedback submission process.

Given a user accesses the feedback form, when they complete the form with suggestions and submit it, then the system displays a confirmation message indicating successful submission.

User reviews previous feedback submissions to the Forecast Accuracy Report.

Given a user has submitted feedback in the past, when they navigate to the feedback history section, then they can see a list of their previous feedback entries and the status of those submissions.

System utilizes user feedback to improve the forecasting algorithm.

Given that user feedback is aggregated and analyzed, when the developers update the forecasting algorithm based on the feedback, then the next version of the Forecast Accuracy Report reflects these improvements.

User accesses the FAQ section related to the feedback mechanism on the platform.

Given a user is on the platform, when they navigate to the FAQ section, then they should find clear information regarding how to provide feedback and how it is utilized.

System notifies the user about changes made based on their feedback.

Given a user submits feedback, when any changes are made to the system based on that feedback, then the user receives a notification detailing what changes were made and how their feedback was implemented.

Product Details

Vision & Mission

Problem & Solution

Details & Audience

User Personas

Liam the Efficient Organizer

Background

Needs & Pain Points

Needs

Pain Points

Psychographics

Channels

Sophia the Customer Experience Advocate

Background

Needs & Pain Points

Needs

Pain Points

Psychographics

Channels

Daniel the Tech-Savvy Young Mechanic

Background

Needs & Pain Points

Needs

Pain Points

Psychographics

Channels

Ava the Financial Strategist

Background

Needs & Pain Points

Needs

Pain Points

Psychographics

Channels

Ethan the Marketing Innovator

Background

Needs & Pain Points

Needs

Pain Points

Psychographics

Channels

Product Features

Instant Troubleshoot

Requirements

AI-Powered Diagnostic Suggestions

Description

Acceptance Criteria

User Training Module

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Real-Time Collaborative Troubleshooting

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Feedback and Improvement Loop

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Mobile Accessibility

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Knowledge Base Access

Requirements

Knowledge Base Search Functionality

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Interactive Troubleshooting Guides

Description

Acceptance Criteria

User Feedback System for Knowledge Base

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Offline Access to Knowledge Base

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Automated Updates for Knowledge Base

Description

Acceptance Criteria

Voice Command Feature

Requirements

Voice Recognition Accuracy

Description